Liquid Crystal Display Device and Driving Method Thereof
To provide a hold-type display device without a problem of motion blur and a driving method thereof. The length of a period for displaying a blanking image in one frame period is controlled in accordance with a control parameter showing the degree of motion blur, and the level of a signal supplied to a display element is changed in accordance with the length of the period for displaying the blanking image. Accordingly, the hold-type display device without a problem of motion blur and the driving method thereof can be provided.
Latest Patents:
1. Field of the Invention
The present invention relates to a display device and an operating method of the display device. In particular, the present invention relates to a method for improving quality of a moving image of a hold-type display device.
2. Description of the Related Art
In recent years, there have been growing interests in thin display devices. Liquid crystal displays, plasma displays, projection displays, and the like have been developed and becoming popular instead of CRT displays. Further, field emission displays, inorganic electroluminescence displays, organic electroluminescence displays, electronic paper, and the like have been developed as next-generation display devices.
In a display portion which is provided in the above-described display device, pixels which are minimum units for forming an image are arranged. Each of the pixels emits light with desired luminance by being supplied with a signal generated by image data. Accordingly, an image is displayed in the display portion.
In addition, the signal supplied to the pixel is updated (refreshed) at a constant period. An inverse number of this period is referred to as a frame rate. Further, time after the signal is updated once and before the signal is updated next is referred to as one frame period. Display of a moving image in the display portion is realized by supplying a signal which is different from the signal supplied before to the pixel when the signal is updated. On the other hand, display of a still image in the display portion is realized by supplying a signal which is the same as the signal supplied before to the pixel when the signal is updated.
Further, driving methods of display devices can be classified by temporal distribution of luminance of a pixel in one frame period. In hold-type display devices which are used for active matrix display devices, a pixel continuously emits light in one frame period. On the other hand, in impulsive-type display devices typified by CRTs, a pixel immediately attenuates and does not emit light after the pixel strongly emits light once in one frame period. In impulsive-type display devices, most one frame period is a non-light emitting state.
It has become obvious that hold-type display devices have a problem such that a moving object seems to leave traces when a moving image is displayed and part of an image is moved or the entire image blurs when the entire image is moved (motion blur). This is characteristics of hold-type display devices and a problem of motion blur does not occur in impulsive-type display devices.
As a method for solving a problem of motion blur in hold-type display devices, the following two methods have been mainly proposed (see Reference 1). A first method is a method of providing a period during which the original image is displayed and a period during which a black image is displayed in one frame period. Thus, display can be made closer to that of impulsive-type display devices, so that quality of a moving image can be improved (see References 2 and 3). A second method is a method in which display is performed by shortening the length of one frame period (increasing a frame rate) and generating a temporally compensated image with respect to an increased frame at the same time. Thus, quality of a moving image can be improved (see Reference 4). In addition, as an improvement technology of the first method, it is disclosed that quality of a moving image can be improved by displaying a darker image than the original image instead of a black image (see References 5, 6, 9, 10, and 11). Further, a method of changing driving methods in accordance with conditions is also disclosed (see Reference 7 and 8).
- [Reference 1] Japanese Published Patent Application No. H04-302289
- [Reference 2] Japanese Published Patent Application No. H09-325715
- [Reference 3] Japanese Published Patent Application No. 2000-200063
- [Reference 4] Japanese Published Patent Application No. 2005-268912
- [Reference 5] Japanese Published Patent Application No. 2002-23707
- [Reference 6] Japanese Published Patent Application No. 2004-240317
- [Reference 7] Japanese Published Patent Application No. 2002-91400
- [Reference 8] Japanese Published Patent Application No. 2004-177575
- [Reference 9] Society For Information Display '05 DIGEST, 60.2, pp. 1734 to 1737, (2005)
- [Reference 10] Society For Information Display '06 DIGEST, 69.4, pp. 1950 to 1953, (2006)
- [Reference 11] Society For Information Display '06 DIGEST, 69.5, pp. 1954 to 1957, (2006)
Although various methods for solving a problem of motion blur in hold-type display devices have been considered, advantageous effects thereof are not sufficient in some cases. In addition, other troubles are increased by using the methods in some cases. For example, a flicker increases in a method in which display is made closer to that of impulsive-type display devices by displaying a black image. In addition, by displaying the black image, luminance of an image decreases compared with the case of not inserting a black image. In that case, in order to obtain luminance which is equal to that of the case of not inserting a black image, it is necessary to increase luminance instantaneously. Accordingly, loads on display devices are increased to decrease reliability or increase power consumption, which becomes problematic.
In a method of increasing a frame rate, a driver circuit which can process data at high speed is necessary because data processing becomes complicated, so that manufacturing cost increases, heat is generated in accordance with data processing, and power consumption increases, which become problematic. In addition, in a method in which a new image is generated by compensating image data, it is difficult to obtain high-quality compensated image, and on the contrary, quality of a moving image decreases in some cases by displaying an image by insertion of compensated data.
Further, when the above-described method for solving a problem of motion blur is applied to a liquid crystal display device, there is a problem in that speed during which transmittance of a liquid crystal is change is slow and it is difficult to sufficiently follow change in signals. Furthermore, there is a problem in that degree of light emission of a pixel is changed depending on viewing angles.
The present invention has been made in view of the foregoing problems. It is an object of the present invention to provide a hold-type display device without a problem of motion blur and a driving method of thereof. It is another object of the present invention to provide a display device with low power consumption and a driving method of thereof. In addition, it is another object of the present invention to provide a display device with improved quality for still images and moving images and a driving method of thereof. Further, it is another object of the present invention to provide a display device with a wider viewing angle and a driving method of thereof. Furthermore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a display device with improved response speed of a liquid crystal and a driving method of thereof.
One aspect of the present invention is a driving method of a liquid crystal display device in which an image is displayed by applying signal voltage Vi in accordance with an image signal to a liquid crystal element. One frame period is divided into a first subframe period and a second subframe period. When the length of the first subframe period is denoted by τa, first voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element in the first subframe period is denoted by Va, and second voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element in the second subframe period is denoted by Vb, the first voltage V1 is determined in accordance with a difference between the second voltage Vb and the signal voltage Vi, and the length of the first subframe period τa. The second voltage Vb is voltage at which the liquid crystal element performs black display.
Another aspect of the present invention is a driving method of a liquid crystal display device in which an image is displayed by applying signal voltage Vi in accordance with an image signal to a liquid crystal element. The liquid crystal display device includes a backlight. When the length of a backlight lighting period in one frame period is denoted by τa, first voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element in one frame period is denoted by Va, and initialization voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element right before one frame period is denoted by V0, the first voltage V1 is determined in accordance with a difference between the initialization voltage V0 and the signal voltage Vi, and the length of the backlight lighting period τa.
Another aspect of the present invention is a driving method of a liquid crystal display device in which an image is displayed by applying signal voltage Vi in accordance with an image signal to a liquid crystal element. The liquid crystal display device includes a backlight. The backlight is divided into a plurality of light-emitting regions in a display region and is sequentially scanned to emit light. When the length of a lighting period of each of a plurality of light-emitting regions in one frame period is denoted by τa, first voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element in one frame period is denoted by Va, and initialization voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element right before one frame period is denoted by V0, the first voltage Va is determined in accordance with a difference between the initialization voltage V0 and the signal voltage Vi, and the length of the lighting period τa of each of the plurality of light-emitting regions.
Another aspect of the present invention is a driving method of a liquid crystal display device in which an image is displayed by applying signal voltage Vi in accordance with an image signal to a liquid crystal element. The liquid crystal display device includes a backlight. One frame period is divided into a first subframe period and a second subframe period. When the length of a backlight lighting period in one frame period is denoted by τa1, the length of the first subframe period is denoted by τa2, first voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element in the first subframe period is denoted by Va, and second voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element in the second subframe period is denoted by Vb, the first voltage Va is determined in accordance with a difference between the second voltage Vb and the signal voltage Vi, the length of the backlight lighting period τa1, and the length of the first subframe period τa2. The second voltage Vb is voltage at which the liquid crystal element performs black display.
Another aspect of the present invention is a driving method of a liquid crystal display device in which an image is displayed by applying signal voltage Vi in accordance with an image signal to a liquid crystal element. The liquid crystal display device includes a backlight. The backlight is divided into a plurality of light-emitting regions in a display region and is sequentially scanned to emit light. One frame period is divided into a first subframe period and a second subframe period. When the length of a lighting period of each of a plurality of light-emitting regions in one frame period is denoted by τa1, the length of the first subframe period is denoted by τa2, first voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element in the first subframe period is denoted by Va, and second voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element in the second subframe period is denoted by Vb, the first voltage Va is determined in accordance with a difference between the second voltage Vb and the signal voltage Vi, the length of the lighting period τa1 of each of the plurality of light-emitting regions, and the length of the first subframe period τa2. The second voltage Vb is voltage at which the liquid crystal element performs black display.
Another aspect of the present invention is a liquid crystal display device in which an image is displayed by applying signal voltage Vi in accordance with an image signal to a liquid crystal element. One frame period is divided into a first subframe period and a second subframe period. When the length of the first subframe period is denoted by τa, first voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element in the first subframe period is denoted by Va, and second voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element in the second subframe period is denoted by Vb, the first voltage Va is determined in accordance with a difference between the second voltage Vb and the signal voltage Vi, and the length of the first subframe period τa. The second voltage Vb is voltage at which the liquid crystal element performs black display.
Another aspect of the present invention is a liquid crystal display device in which an image is displayed by applying signal voltage Vi in accordance with an image signal to a liquid crystal element. The liquid crystal display device includes a backlight. When the length of a backlight lighting period in one frame period is denoted by τa, first voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element in one frame period is denoted by Va, and initialization voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element right before one frame period is denoted by V0, the first voltage Va is determined in accordance with a difference between the initialization voltage V0 and the signal voltage Vi, and the length of the backlight lighting period τa.
Another aspect of the present invention is a liquid crystal display device in which an image is displayed by applying signal voltage Vi in accordance with an image signal to a liquid crystal element. The liquid crystal display device includes a backlight. The backlight is divided into a plurality of light-emitting regions in a display region and is sequentially scanned to emit light. When the length of a lighting period of each of a plurality of light-emitting regions in one frame period is denoted by τa, first voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element in one frame period is denoted by Va, and initialization voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element right before one frame period is denoted by V0, the first voltage Va is determined in accordance with a difference between the initialization voltage V0 and the signal voltage Vi, and the length of the lighting period τa of each of the plurality of light-emitting regions.
Another aspect of the present invention is a liquid crystal display device in which an image is displayed by applying signal voltage Vi in accordance with an image signal to a liquid crystal element. The liquid crystal display device includes a backlight. One frame period is divided into a first subframe period and a second subframe period. When the length of a backlight lighting period in one frame period is denoted by τa1, the length of the first subframe period is denoted by τa2, first voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element in the first subframe period is denoted by Va, and second voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element in the second subframe period is denoted by Vb, the first voltage Va is determined in accordance with a difference between the second voltage Vb and the signal voltage Vi, the length of the backlight lighting period τa1, and the length of the first subframe period τa2. The second voltage Vb is voltage at which the liquid crystal element performs black display.
Another aspect of the present invention is a liquid crystal display device in which an image is displayed by applying signal voltage Vi in accordance with an image signal to a liquid crystal element. The liquid crystal display device includes a backlight. The backlight is divided into a plurality of light-emitting regions in a display region and is sequentially scanned to emit light. One frame period is divided into a first subframe period and a second subframe period. When the length of a lighting period of each of a plurality of light-emitting regions in one frame period is denoted by τa1, the length of the first subframe period is denoted by τa2, first voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element in the first subframe period is denoted by Va, and second voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element in the second subframe period is denoted by Vb, the first voltage Va is determined in accordance with a difference between the second voltage Vb and the signal voltage Vi, the length of the lighting period τa1 of each of the plurality of light-emitting regions, and the length of the first subframe period τa2. The second voltage Vb is voltage at which the liquid crystal element performs black display.
Note that in this specification, a condition where the darkest gray scale among gray scales which can be displayed is displayed even a slight amount of light is emitted is described that “luminance is 0” in some cases in addition to a condition where light is not emitted at all.
Note that various types of switches can be used as a switch shown in this document (a specification, a claim, a drawing, and the like). An electrical switch, a mechanical switch, and the like are given as examples. That is, any element can be used as long as it can control a current flow, without limiting to a certain element. For example, a transistor (e.g., a bipolar transistor or a MOS transistor), a diode (e.g., a PN diode, a PIN diode, a Schottky diode, a MIM (metal insulator metal) diode, a MIS (metal insulator semiconductor) diode, or a diode-connected transistor), a thyristor, or the like can be used as a switch. Alternatively, a logic circuit in which such elements are combined can be used as a switch.
In the case of using a transistor as a switch, polarity (a conductivity type) of the transistor is not particularly limited because it operates just as a switch. However, a transistor of polarity with smaller off-current is preferably used when off-current is to be suppressed. A transistor provided with an LDD region, a transistor with a multi-gate structure, and the like are given as examples of a transistor with smaller off-current. In addition, it is preferable that an N-channel transistor be used when a potential of a source terminal of the transistor which is operated as a switch is closer to a potential of a low-potential-side power supply (e.g., Vss, GND, or 0 V), while a P-channel transistor be used when the potential of the source terminal is closer to a potential of a high-potential-side power supply (e.g., Vdd). This is because the absolute value of gate-source voltage can be increased when the potential of the source terminal of the transistor which is operated as the switch is closer to a potential of a low-potential-side power supply in an N-channel transistor and when the potential of the source terminal of the transistor which is operated as the switch is closer to a potential of a high-potential-side power supply in a P-channel transistor, so that the transistor is useful to be operated as a switch. This is also because the transistor does not often perform a source follower operation, so that reduction in output voltage does not often occur.
Note that a CMOS switch using both N-channel and P-channel transistors may be used. By using a CMOS switch, the switch can easily operate as a switch because current can flow when the P-channel transistor or the N-channel transistor is turned on. For example, voltage can be appropriately output regardless of whether voltage of an input signal of the switch is high or low. In addition, since a voltage amplitude value of a signal for turning on or off the switch can be made small, power consumption can be reduced.
Note also that when a transistor is used as a switch, the switch includes an input terminal (one of a source terminal and a drain terminal), an output terminal (the other of the source terminal and the drain terminal), and a terminal for controlling electrical conduction (a gate electrode). On the other hand, when a diode is used as a switch, the switch does not have a terminal for controlling electrical conduction in some cases. Therefore, when a diode is used as a switch, the number of wirings for controlling terminals can be more reduced than the case of using a transistor as a switch.
Note that in this document (the specification, the claim, the drawing, and the like), when it is explicitly described that “A and B are connected”, the case where elements are electrically connected, the case where elements are functionally connected, and the case where elements are directly connected are included therein. Here, each of A and B corresponds to an object (e.g., a device, an element, a circuit, a wiring, an electrode, a terminal, a conductive film, or a layer). Accordingly, in structures disclosed in this document (the specification, the claim, the drawing, and the like), another element may be interposed between elements having a connection relation shown in drawings and texts, without limiting to a predetermined connection relation, for example, the connection relation shown in the drawings and the texts.
For example, in the case where A and B are electrically connected, one or more elements which enable electrical connection of A and B (e.g., a switch, a transistor, a capacitor, an inductor, a resistor, and/or a diode) may be provided between A and B. In addition, in the case where A and B are functionally connected, one or more circuits which enable functional connection of A and B (e.g., a logic circuit such as an inverter, a NAND circuit, or a NOR circuit, a signal converter circuit such as a DA converter circuit, an AD converter circuit, or a gamma correction circuit, a potential level converter circuit such as a power supply circuit (e.g., a boosting circuit or a voltage lower control circuit) or a level shifter circuit for changing a potential level of a signal, a voltage source, a current source, a switching circuit, or an amplifier circuit such as a circuit which can increase signal amplitude, the amount of current, or the like (e.g., an operational amplifier, a differential amplifier circuit, a source follower circuit, or a buffer circuit), a signal generating circuit, a memory circuit, and/or a control circuit) may be provided between A and B. Alternatively, in the case where A and B are directly connected, A and B may be directly connected without interposing another element or another circuit therebetween.
Note that when it is explicitly described that “A and B are directly connected”, the case where A and B are directly connected (i.e., the case where A and B are connected without interposing another element or another circuit therebetween) and the case where A and B are electrically connected (i.e., the case where A and B are connected by interposing another element or another circuit therebetween) are included therein.
Note that when it is explicitly described that “A and B are electrically connected”, the case where A and B are electrically connected (i.e., the case where A and B are connected by interposing another element or another circuit therebetween), the case where A and B are functionally connected (i.e., the case where A and B are functionally connected by interposing another circuit therebetween), and the case where A and B are directly connected (i.e., the case where A and B are connected without interposing another element or another circuit therebetween) are included therein. That is, when it is explicitly described that “A and B are electrically connected”, the description is the same as the case where it is explicitly only described that “A and B are connected”.
Note that a display element, a display device which is a device having a display element, a light-emitting element, and a light-emitting device which is a device having a light-emitting element can use various types and can include various elements. For example, as a display element, a display device, a light-emitting element, and a light-emitting device, whose a display medium, contrast, luminance, reflectivity, transmittivity, or the like changes by an electromagnetic action, such as an EL element (e.g., an EL element including organic and inorganic materials, an organic EL element, or an inorganic EL element), an electron emitter, a liquid crystal element, electronic ink, an electrophoresis element, a grating light valve (GLV), a plasma display panel (PDP), a digital micromirror device (DMD), a piezoelectric ceramic display, or a carbon nanotube can be used. Note that display devices using an EL element include an EL display; display devices using an electron emitter include a field emission display (FED), an SED-type flat panel display (SED: Surface-conduction Electron-emitter Display), and the like; display devices using a liquid crystal element include a liquid crystal display (e.g., a transmissive liquid crystal display, a semi-transmissive liquid crystal display, a reflective liquid crystal display, a direct-view liquid crystal display, or a projection liquid crystal display); and display devices using electronic ink include electronic paper.
Note that by using a catalyst (e.g., nickel) in the case of forming microcrystalline silicon, crystallinity can be further improved and a transistor having excellent electric characteristics can be formed. At this time, crystallinity can be improved by performing heat treatment without using a laser. Accordingly, a gate driver circuit (e.g., a scan line driver circuit) and part of a source driver circuit (e.g., an analog switch) can be formed over the same substrate. In addition, in the case of not using a laser for crystallization, crystallinity unevenness of silicon can be suppressed. Therefore, an image having high quality can be displayed.
Note also that polycrystalline silicon and microcrystalline silicon can be formed without using a catalyst (e.g., nickel).
In addition, a transistor can be formed by using a semiconductor substrate, an SOI substrate, or the like. In that case, a MOS transistor, a junction transistor, a bipolar transistor, or the like can be used as a transistor described in this specification. Therefore, a transistor with few variations in characteristics, sizes, shapes, or the like, with high current supply capacity, and with a small size can be formed. By using such a transistor, power consumption of a circuit can be reduced or a circuit can be highly integrated.
In addition, a transistor including a compound semiconductor or a oxide semiconductor such as ZnO, a-InGaZnO, SiGe, GaAs, IZO, indium tin oxide (ITO), or SnO, and a thin film transistor or the like obtained by thinning such a compound semiconductor or a oxide semiconductor can be used. Therefore, manufacturing temperature can be lowered and for example, such a transistor can be formed at room temperature. Accordingly, the transistor can be formed directly on a substrate having low heat resistance such as a plastic substrate or a film substrate. Note that such a compound semiconductor or an oxide semiconductor can be used for not only a channel portion of the transistor but also other applications. For example, such a compound semiconductor or an oxide semiconductor can be used as a resistor, a pixel electrode, or a light-transmitting electrode. Further, since such an element can be formed at the same time as the transistor, cost can be reduced.
A transistor or the like formed by using an inkjet method or a printing method can also be used. Accordingly, a transistor can be formed at room temperature, can be formed at a low vacuum, or can be formed using a large substrate. In addition, since the transistor can be formed without using a mask (a reticle), layout of the transistor can be easily changed. Further, since it is not necessary to use a resist, material cost is reduced and the number of steps can be reduced. Furthermore, since a film is formed only in a necessary portion, a material is not wasted compared with a manufacturing method in which etching is performed after the film is formed over the entire surface, so that cost can be reduced.
Further, a transistor or the like including an organic semiconductor or a carbon nanotube can be used. Accordingly, such a transistor can be formed using a substrate which can be bent. Therefore, a device using a transistor or the like including an organic semiconductor or a carbon nanotube can resist a shock.
Furthermore, transistors with various structures can be used. For example, a MOS transistor, a junction transistor, a bipolar transistor, or the like can be used as a transistor described in this document (the specification, the claim, the drawing, and the like). By using a MOS transistor, the size of the transistor can be reduced. Thus, a plurality of transistors can be mounted. By using a bipolar transistor, large current can flow. Thus, a circuit can be operated at high speed.
A MOS transistor, a bipolar transistor, and the like may be formed over one substrate. Thus, reduction in power consumption, reduction in size, high speed operation, and the like can be realized.
Furthermore, various transistors can be used.
A transistor can be formed using various types of substrates. The type of a substrate where a transistor is formed is not limited to a certain type. For example, a single crystalline substrate, an SOI substrate, a glass substrate, a quartz substrate, a plastic substrate, a paper substrate, a cellophane substrate, a stone substrate, a wood substrate, a cloth substrate (including a natural fiber (e.g., silk, cotton, or hemp), a synthetic fiber (e.g., nylon, polyurethane, or polyester), a regenerated fiber (e.g., acetate, cupra, rayon, or regenerated polyester), or the like), a leather substrate, a rubber substrate, a stainless steel substrate, a substrate including a stainless steel foil, or the like can be used as a substrate where the transistor is formed. Alternatively, a skin (e.g., epidermis or corium) or hypodermal tissue of an animal such as a human being can be used as a substrate where the transistor is formed. In addition, the transistor may be formed using one substrate, and then, the transistor may be transferred to another substrate. A single crystalline substrate, an SOI substrate, a glass substrate, a quartz substrate, a plastic substrate, a paper substrate, a cellophane substrate, a stone substrate, a wood substrate, a cloth substrate (including a natural fiber (e.g., silk, cotton, or hemp), a synthetic fiber (e.g., nylon, polyurethane, or polyester), a regenerated fiber (e.g., acetate, cupra, rayon, or regenerated polyester), or the like), a leather substrate, a rubber substrate, a stainless steel substrate, a substrate including a stainless steel foil, or the like can be used as a substrate to which the transistor is transferred. Alternatively, a skin (e.g., epidermis or corium) or hypodermal tissue of an animal such as a human being can be used as a substrate to which the transistor is transferred. Further alternatively, the transistor may be formed using one substrate and the substrate may be thinned by polishing. A single crystalline substrate, an SOI substrate, a glass substrate, a quartz substrate, a plastic substrate, a paper substrate, a cellophane substrate, a stone substrate, a wood substrate, a cloth substrate (including a natural fiber (e.g., silk, cotton, or hemp), a synthetic fiber (e.g., nylon, polyurethane, or polyester), a regenerated fiber (e.g., acetate, cupra, rayon, or regenerated polyester), or the like), a leather substrate, a rubber substrate, a stainless steel substrate, a substrate including a stainless steel foil, or the like can be used as a substrate to be polished. Alternatively, a skin (e.g., epidermis or corium) or hypodermal tissue of an animal such as a human being can be used as a substrate to be polished. By using such a substrate, a transistor with excellent properties or a transistor with low power consumption can be formed, a device with high durability or high heat resistance can be formed, or reduction in weight or thickness can be achieved.
A structure of a transistor can be various modes without limiting to a certain structure. For example, a multi-gate structure having two or more gate electrodes may be used. When the multi-gate structure is used, a structure where a plurality of transistors are connected in series is provided because a structure where channel regions are connected in series is provided. By using the multi-gate structure, off-current can be reduced or the withstand voltage of the transistor can be increased to improve reliability. Alternatively, by using the multi-gate structure, drain-source current does not fluctuate very much even if drain-source voltage fluctuates when the transistor operates in a saturation region, so that a flat slope of voltage-current characteristics can be obtained. By utilizing the flat slope of the voltage-current characteristics, an ideal current source circuit or an active load having a high resistance value can be realized. Accordingly, a differential circuit or a current mirror circuit having excellent properties can be realized. In addition, a structure where gate electrodes are formed above and below a channel may be used. By using the structure where gate electrodes are formed above and below the channel, a channel region is enlarged, so that the amount of current flowing therethrough can be increased or a depletion layer can be easily formed to decrease an S value. When the gate electrodes are formed above and below the channel, a structure where a plurality of transistors are connected in parallel is provided.
Further, a structure where a gate electrode is formed above a channel, a structure where a gate electrode is formed below a channel, a staggered structure, an inversely staggered structure, a structure where a channel region is divided into a plurality of regions, or a structure where channel regions are connected in parallel or in series can be used. In addition, a source electrode or a drain electrode may overlap with a channel region (or part of it). By using the structure where the source electrode or the drain electrode may overlap with the channel region (or part of it), the case can be prevented in which electric charges are accumulated in part of the channel region, which would result in an unstable operation. Further, an LDD region may be provided. By providing the LDD region, off-current can be reduced or the withstand voltage of the transistor can be increased to improve reliability. Alternatively, drain-source current does not fluctuate very much even if drain-source voltage fluctuates when the transistor operates in the saturation region, so that a flat slope of voltage-current characteristics can be obtained.
Note that various types of transistors can be used for a transistor in this document (the specification, the claim, the drawing, and the like) and the transistor can be formed using various types of substrates. Accordingly, all of circuits which are necessary to realize a predetermined function may be formed using the same substrate. For example, all of the circuits which are necessary to realize the predetermined function may be formed using a glass substrate, a plastic substrate, a single crystalline substrate, an SOI substrate, or any other substrate. When all of the circuits which are necessary to realize the predetermined function are formed using the same substrate, cost can be reduced by reduction in the number of component parts or reliability can be improved by reduction in the number of connections to circuit components. Alternatively, part of the circuits which are necessary to realize the predetermined function may be formed using one substrate and another part of the circuits which are necessary to realize the predetermined function may be formed using another substrate. That is, not all of the circuits which are necessary to realize the predetermined function are required to be formed using the same substrate. For example, part of the circuits which are necessary to realize the predetermined function may be formed with transistors using a glass substrate and another part of the circuits which are necessary to realize the predetermined function may be formed using a single crystalline substrate, so that an IC chip formed by a transistor using the single crystalline substrate may be connected to the glass substrate by COG (chip on glass) and the IC chip may be provided over the glass substrate. Alternatively, the IC chip may be connected to the glass substrate by TAB (tape automated bonding) or a printed wiring board. When part of the circuits are formed using the same substrate in this manner, cost can be reduced by reduction in the number of component parts or reliability can be improved by reduction in the number of connections to circuit components. In addition, for example, by forming a portion with high driving voltage or a portion with high driving frequency, which consumes large power, using a single crystalline substrate and using an IC chip formed by the circuit instead of forming such a portion using the same substrate, increase in power consumption can be prevented.
Note also that one pixel corresponds to one element whose brightness can be controlled in this document (the specification, the claim, the drawing, and the like). For example, one pixel corresponds to one color element which expresses brightness. Therefore, in the case of a color display device having color elements of R (Red), G (Green), and B (Blue), a minimum unit of an image is formed of three pixels of an R pixel, a G pixel, and a B pixel. Note that the color elements are not limited to three colors, and color elements of more than three colors may be used or a color other than RGB may be added. For example, RGBW may be used by adding W (white). In addition, RGB plus one or more colors of yellow, cyan, magenta emerald green, vermilion, and the like may be used. Further, a color similar to at least one of R, G, and B may be added to RGB. For example, R, G, B1, and B2 may be used. Although both B1 and B2 are blue, they have slightly different frequency. Similarly, R1, R2, G, and B may be used, for example. By using such color elements, display which is closer to the real object can be performed. Alternatively, by using such color elements, power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, as another example, in the case of controlling brightness of one color element by using a plurality of regions, one region may correspond to one pixel. For example, in the case of performing area ratio gray scale display or in the case of including a subpixel, a plurality of regions which control brightness are provided in each color element and gray scales are expressed with the whole regions. In this case, one region which controls brightness may correspond to one pixel. Thus, in that case, one color element includes a plurality of pixels. Alternatively, even when the plurality of regions which control brightness are provided in one color element, these regions may be collected as one pixel. Thus, in that case, one color element includes one pixel. In that case, one color element includes one pixel. In the case where brightness is controlled in a plurality of regions in each color element, regions which contribute to display have different area dimensions depending on pixels in some cases. In addition, in the plurality of regions which control brightness in each color element, signals supplied to each of the plurality of regions may be slightly varied to widen a viewing angle. That is, potentials of pixel electrodes included in the plurality of regions provided in each color element may be different from each other. Accordingly, voltage applied to liquid crystal molecules are varied depending on the pixel electrodes. Therefore, the viewing angle can be widened.
Note that when it is explicitly described that “one pixel (for three colors)”, it corresponds to the case where three pixels of R, G, and B are considered as one pixel. Meanwhile, when it is explicitly described that “one pixel (for one color)”, it corresponds to the case where the plurality of regions are provided in each color element and collectively considered as one pixel.
Note also that in this document (the specification, the claim, the drawing, and the like), pixels are provided (arranged) in matrix in some cases. Here, description that pixels are provided (arranged) in matrix includes the case where the pixels are arranged in a straight line and the case where the pixels are arranged in a jagged line, in a longitudinal direction or a lateral direction. Therefore, in the case of performing full color display with three color elements (e.g., RGB), the following cases are included therein: the case where the pixels are arranged in stripes and the case where dots of the three color elements are arranged in a delta pattern. In addition, the case is also included therein in which dots of the three color elements are provided in Bayer arrangement. Note that the color elements are not limited to three colors, and color elements of more than three colors may be used. RGBW, RGB plus one or more of yellow, cyan, magenta, and the like, or the like is given as an example. Further, the sizes of display regions may be different between respective dots of color elements. Thus, power consumption can be reduced or the life of a display element can be prolonged.
Note also that in this document (the specification, the claim, the drawing, and the like), an active matrix method in which an active element is included in a pixel or a passive matrix method in which an active element is not included in a pixel can be used.
In the active matrix method, as an active element (a non-linear element), not only a transistor but also various active elements (non-linear elements) can be used. For example, a MIM (metal insulator metal), a TFD (thin film diode), or the like can also be used. Since such an element has few number of manufacturing steps, manufacturing cost can be reduced or yield can be improved. Further, since the size of the element is small, an aperture ratio can be improved, so that power consumption can be reduced or high luminance can be achieved.
As a method other than the active matrix method, the passive matrix method in which an active element (a non-linear element) is not used can also be used. Since an active element (a non-linear element) is not used, manufacturing steps is few, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced or the yield can be improved. Further, since an active element (a non-linear element) is not used, the aperture ratio can be improved, so that power consumption can be reduced or high luminance can be achieved.
Note that a transistor is an element having at least three terminals of a gate, a drain, and a source. The transistor has a channel region between a drain region and a source region, and current can flow through the drain region, the channel region, and the source region. Here, since the source and the drain of the transistor may change depending on the structure, the operating condition, and the like of the transistor, it is difficult to define which is a source or a drain. Therefore, in this document (the specification, the claim, the drawing, and the like), a region functioning as a source and a drain may not be called the source or the drain. In such a case, for example, one of the source and the drain may be referred to as a first terminal and the other thereof may be referred to as a second terminal. Alternatively, one of the source and the drain may be referred to as a first electrode and the other thereof may be referred to as a second electrode. Further alternatively, one of the source and the drain may be referred to as a source region and the other thereof may be called a drain region.
Note also that a transistor may be an element having at least three terminals of a base, an emitter, and a collector. In this case also, one of the emitter and the collector may be similarly called a first terminal and the other terminal may be called a second terminal.
A gate corresponds to all or part of a gate electrode and a gate wiring (also referred to as a gate line, a gate signal line, a scan line, a scan signal line, or the like). A gate electrode corresponds to a conductive film which overlaps with a semiconductor which forms a channel region with a gate insulating film interposed therebetween. Note that part of the gate electrode overlaps with an LDD (lightly doped drain) region, the source region, or the drain region with the gate insulating film interposed therebetween in some cases. A gate wiring corresponds to a wiring for connecting a gate electrode of each transistor to each other, a wiring for connecting a gate electrode of each pixel to each other, or a wiring for connecting a gate electrode to another wiring.
However, there is a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) which functions as both a gate electrode and a gate wiring. Such a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) may be called either a gate electrode or a gate wiring. That is, there is a region where a gate electrode and a gate wiring cannot be clearly distinguished from each other. For example, in the case where a channel region overlaps with part of an extended gate wiring, the overlapped portion (region, conductive film, wiring, or the like) functions as both a gate wiring and a gate electrode. Accordingly, such a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) may be called either a gate electrode or a gate wiring.
In addition, a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) which is formed of the same material as a gate electrode, forms the same island as the gate electrode, and is connected to the gate electrode may also be called a gate electrode. Similarly, a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) which is formed of the same material as a gate wiring, forms the same island as the gate wiring, and is connected to the gate wiring may also be called a gate wiring. In a strict sense, such a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) does not overlap with a channel region or does not have a function of connecting the gate electrode to another gate electrode in some cases. However, there is a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) which is formed of the same material as a gate electrode or a gate wiring, forms the same island as the gate electrode or the gate wiring, and is connected to the gate electrode or the gate wiring because of conditions in a manufacturing step. Thus, such a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) may also be called either a gate electrode or a gate wiring.
In a multi-gate transistor, for example, a gate electrode is often connected to another gate electrode by using a conductive film which is formed of the same material as the gate electrode. Since such a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) is a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) for connecting the gate electrode to another gate electrode, it may be called a gate wiring, and it may also be called a gate electrode because a multi-gate transistor can be considered as one transistor. That is, a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) which is formed of the same material as a gate electrode or a gate wiring, forms the same island as the gate electrode or the gate wiring, and is connected to the gate electrode or the gate wiring may be called either a gate electrode or a gate wiring. In addition, for example, part of a conductive film which connects the gate electrode and the gate wiring and is formed of a material which is different from that of the gate electrode or the gate wiring may also be called either a gate electrode or a gate wiring.
Note that a gate terminal corresponds to part of a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) of a gate electrode or a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) which is electrically connected to the gate electrode.
Note that when a wiring is called a gate wiring, a gate line, a gate signal line, a scan line, a scan signal line, there is the case in which a gate of a transistor is not connected to a wiring. In this case, the gate wiring, the gate line, the gate signal line, the scan line, or the scan signal line corresponds to a wiring formed in the same layer as the gate of the transistor, a wiring formed of the same material of the gate of the transistor, or a wiring formed at the same time as the gate of the transistor in some cases. As examples, a wiring for storage capacitance, a power supply line, a reference potential supply line, and the like can be given.
Note also that a source corresponds to all or part of a source region, a source electrode, and a source wiring (also referred to as a source line, a source signal line, a data line, a data signal line, or the like). A source region corresponds to a semiconductor region including a large amount of p-type impurities (e.g., boron or gallium) or n-type impurities (e.g., phosphorus or arsenic). Therefore, a region including a small amount of p-type impurities or n-type impurities, namely, an LDD (lightly doped drain) region is not included in the source region. A source electrode is part of a conductive layer formed of a material different from that of a source region, and electrically connected to the source region. However, there is the case where a source electrode and a source region are collectively called a source electrode. A source wiring is a wiring for connecting a source electrode of each transistor to each other, a wiring for connecting a source electrode of each pixel to each other, or a wiring for connecting a source electrode to another wiring.
However, there is a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) functioning as both a source electrode and a source wiring. Such a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) may be called either a source electrode or a source wiring. That is, there is a region where a source electrode and a source wiring cannot be clearly distinguished from each other. For example, in the case where a source region overlaps with part of an extended source wiring, the overlapped portion (region, conductive film, wiring, or the like) functions as both a source wiring and a source electrode. Accordingly, such a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) may be called either a source electrode or a source wiring.
In addition, a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) which is formed of the same material as a source electrode, forms the same island as the source electrode, and is connected to the source electrode, or a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) which connects a source electrode and another source electrode may also be called a source electrode. Further, a portion which overlaps with a source region may be called a source electrode. Similarly, a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) which is formed of the same material as a source wiring, forms the same island as the source wiring, and is connected to the source wiring may also be called a source wiring. In a strict sense, such a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) does not have a function of connecting the source electrode to another source electrode in some cases. However, there is a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) which is formed of the same material as a source electrode or a source wiring, forms the same island as the source electrode or the source wiring, and is connected to the source electrode or the source wiring because of conditions in a manufacturing step. Thus, such a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) may also be called either a source electrode or a source wiring.
In addition, for example, part of a conductive film which connects a source electrode and a source wiring and is formed of a material which is different from that of the source electrode or the source wiring may be called either a source electrode or a source wiring.
Note that a source terminal corresponds to part of a source region, a source electrode, or a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) which is electrically connected to the source electrode.
Note that when a wiring is called a source wiring, a source line, a source signal line, a data line, a data signal line, there is the case in which a source (a drain) of a transistor is not connected to a wiring. In this case, the source wiring, the source line, the source signal line, the data line, or the data signal line corresponds to a wiring formed in the same layer as the source (the drain) of the transistor, a wiring formed of the same material of the source (the drain) of the transistor, or a wiring formed at the same time as the source (the drain) of the transistor in some cases. As examples, a wiring for storage capacitance, a power supply line, a reference potential supply line, and the like can be given.
Note also that the same can be said for a drain.
Note also that a semiconductor device corresponds to a device having a circuit including a semiconductor element (e.g., a transistor, a diode, or thyristor). The semiconductor device may also include all devices that can function by utilizing semiconductor characteristics.
Note also that a display element corresponds to an optical modulation element, a liquid crystal element, a light-emitting element, an EL element (an organic EL element, an inorganic EL element, or an EL element including organic and inorganic materials), an electron emitter, an electrophoresis element, a discharging element, a light-reflective element, a light diffraction element, a digital micro device (DMD), or the like. Note that the present invention is not limited to this.
In addition, a display device corresponds to a device having a display element. Note that the display device may also corresponds to a display panel itself where a plurality of pixels including display elements are formed over the same substrate as a peripheral driver circuit for driving the pixels. In addition, the display device may also include a peripheral driver circuit provided over a substrate by wire bonding or bump bonding, namely, an IC chip connected by chip on glass (COG) or an IC chip connected by TAB or the like. Further, the display device may also include a flexible printed circuit (FPC) to which an IC chip, a resistor, a capacitor, an inductor, a transistor, or the like is attached. Note also that the display device includes a printed wiring board (PWB) which is connected through a flexible printed circuit (FPC) and to which an IC chip, a resistor, a capacitor, an inductor, a transistor, or the like is attached. The display device may also include an optical sheet such as a polarizing plate or a retardation plate. The display device may also include a lighting device, a housing, an audio input and output device, a light sensor, or the like. Here, a lighting device such as a backlight unit may include a light guide plate, a prism sheet, a diffusion sheet, a reflective sheet, a light source (e.g., an LED or a cold cathode fluorescent lamp), a cooling device (e.g., a water cooling device or an air cooling device), or the like.
Moreover, a lighting device corresponds to a device having a backlight unit, a light guide plate, a prism sheet, a diffusion sheet, a reflective sheet, or a light source (e.g., an LED, a cold cathode fluorescent lamp, or a hot cathode fluorescent lamp), a cooling device, or the like.
In addition, a light-emitting device corresponds to a device having a light-emitting element and the like. In the case of including a light-emitting element as a display element, the light-emitting device is one of specific examples of a display device.
Note that a reflective device corresponds to a device having a light-reflective element, a light diffraction element, light-reflective electrode, or the like.
A liquid crystal display device corresponds to a display device including a liquid crystal element. Liquid crystal display devices include a direct-view liquid crystal display, a projection liquid crystal display, a transmissive liquid crystal display, a reflective liquid crystal display, a semi-transmissive liquid crystal display, and the like.
Note also that a driving device corresponds to a device having a semiconductor element, an electric circuit, or an electronic circuit. For example, a transistor which controls input of a signal from a source signal line to a pixel (also referred to as a selection transistor, a switching transistor, or the like), a transistor which supplies voltage or current to a pixel electrode, a transistor which supplies voltage or current to a light-emitting element, and the like are examples of the driving device. A circuit which supplies a signal to a gate signal line (also referred to as a gate driver, a gate line driver circuit, or the like), a circuit which supplies a signal to a source signal line (also referred to as a source driver, a source line driver circuit, or the like) are also examples of the driving device.
Note also that a display device, a semiconductor device, a lighting device, a cooling device, a light-emitting device, a reflective device, a driving device, and the like overlap with each other in some cases. For example, a display device includes a semiconductor device and a light-emitting device in some cases. Alternatively, a semiconductor device includes a display device and a driving device in some cases.
In this document (the specification, the claim, the drawing, and the like), when it is explicitly described that “B is formed on A” or “B is formed over A”, it does not necessarily mean that B is formed in direct contact with A. The description includes the case where A and B are not in direct contact with each other, i.e., the case where another object is interposed between A and B. Here, each of A and B corresponds to an object (e.g., a device, an element, a circuit, a wiring, an electrode, a terminal, a conductive film, or a layer).
Accordingly, for example, when it is explicitly described that a layer B is formed on (or over) a layer A, it includes both the case where the layer B is formed in direct contact with the layer A, and the case where another layer (e.g., a layer C or a layer D) is formed in direct contact with the layer A and the layer B is formed in direct contact with the layer C or D. Note that another layer (e.g., a layer C or a layer D) may be a single layer or a plurality of layers.
Similarly, when it is explicitly described that B is formed above A, it does not necessarily mean that B is formed in direct contact with A, and another object may be interposed therebetween. Accordingly, for example, when it is explicitly described that a layer B is formed above a layer A, it includes both the case where the layer B is formed in direct contact with the layer A, and the case where another layer (e.g., a layer C or a layer D) is formed in direct contact with the layer A and the layer B is formed in direct contact with the layer C or D. Note that another layer (e.g., a layer C or a layer D) may be a single layer or a plurality of layers.
Note that when it is explicitly described that B is formed in direct contact with A, it includes not the case where another object is interposed between A and B but the case where B is formed in direct contact with A.
Note that the same can be said when it is explicitly described that B is formed below or under A.
By using the present invention, a hold-type display device without a problem of motion blur and a driving method thereof can be provided. In addition, by using the present invention, a display device with low power consumption and a driving method thereof can be provided. Further, by using the present invention, a display device with improved quality for still images and moving images and a driving method thereof can be provided. Furthermore, by using the present invention, a display device with a wider viewing angle and a driving method thereof can be provided. Moreover, by using the present invention, a display device with improved response speed of a liquid crystal and a driving method thereof can be provided.
In the accompanying drawings:
FIGS. 34A to 34BII are diagrams each illustrating an example of a timing chart of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention;
FIGS. 35A to 35BII are diagrams each illustrating an example of a timing chart of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention;
FIGS. 36A to 36BII are diagrams each illustrating an example of a timing chart of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention;
Hereinafter, the present invention will be described by way of embodiment modes with reference to the drawings. However, the present invention can be implemented in various different ways and it will be easily understood by those skilled in the art that various changes and modifications are possible. Unless such changes and modifications depart from the spirit and the scope of the present invention, they should be construed as being included therein. Therefore, the present invention should not be construed as being limited to the description of the embodiment modes.
Embodiment Mode 1In this embodiment mode, words relating to a driving method of a display device, such as instantaneous luminance, integrated luminance, a lighting ratio, and average luminance used in this document (the specification, the claim, the drawing, and the like), and control modes thereof are described.
First, meanings of words and signs used in this document are described. First, words about time and signs thereof, i.e., t, F, τa, τb, and R are described. The sign t expresses time. The sign F expresses one frame period and the length thereof. One frame period F is divided into a plurality of subframe periods, and each of the subframe periods are classified into an image display period or a blanking interval. Here, the image display period is a period during which original luminance of an image is mainly displayed. The blanking interval is a period during which an image displayed in the image display period can be reset by human eyes. Note that the subframe period may be a period other than the image display period and the blanking interval. The sign τa expresses the image display period and the length thereof. The sign τb expresses the blanking interval and the length thereof. Note also that periods other than the image display period τa in the one frame period F each correspond to the blanking interval τb. The sign R expresses a lighting ratio. Here, the lighting ratio is a value obtained by dividing the image display period τa by the one frame period F. That is, the lighting ratio R is a ratio of the image display period τa in the one frame period F.
Next, words relating to luminance and signs thereof, i.e., I (t), L, and B are described. The sign I (t) shows instantaneous luminance. Here, instantaneous luminance is instantaneous emission intensity of a pixel. The sign L expresses integrated luminance. Here, the integrated luminance is a value obtained by integrating the instantaneous luminance I (t) by time in a range of the one frame period F. The sign B expresses average luminance. Here, the average luminance is a value obtained by dividing the integrated luminance L by the image display period τa. That is, the average luminance B expresses luminance of a pixel when it is assumed that the luminance of the pixel is constant in the image display period τa.
When the above-described relations are represented by formulas, the relations can be represented by Formula 1 to Formula 4.
Hereinafter, when the above-described signs are used without notice in this document, meanings thereof may be considered that they follow the above-described definitions.
Note that an actual relationship between the words which are defined in this document and display conditions of a display device are described. As for the lighting ratio R, driving becomes closer to hold-type driving as R increases, and driving becomes closer to impulsive driving as R decreases. As for the integrated luminance L, luminance perceived by human eyes increases as L increases, and luminance perceived by human eyes decreases as L decreases. As for the instantaneous luminance I (t), either increase or decrease in the integrated luminance I (t) does not have a direct relation that luminance perceived by human eyes increases or decreased. This is because human eyes cannot perceive fluctuation in light, brightness of which fluctuates with high frequency and perceives the light as constant light. At this time, brightness perceived by human eyes is not fluctuation in brightness itself but light having a frequency of a value obtained by integrating brightness by time in a certain range. In addition, limit frequency in which human eyes perceive fluctuation in brightness is approximately 50 Hz to 60 Hz. This frequency is almost the same value as a frame rate of a general display device. Further, the average luminance B is an amount used for convenience to describe control modes in this document; however, the average luminance B is similar to the integrated luminance L in that luminance perceived by human eyes increases as B increases, and luminance perceived by human eyes decreases as B decreases.
Next, the words in this document are described in detail with reference to
In
The lighting ratio R, the integrated luminance L, and the average luminance B, which are values used in this document, are the same between the examples shown in
However, in accordance with the definitions of this document, the lighting ratio R, the integrated luminance L, and the average luminance B can be calculated without a problem even in such a case.
The image display period τa and the blanking interval τb may be determined based on a period during which a signal controlling luminance is input or may be determined based on the instantaneous luminance I (t). When the image display period τa and the blanking interval τb are determined based on the period during which the signal controlling the luminance is input, the time when the signal is updated is a boundary between the periods. When the image display period τa and the blanking interval τb are determined based on the instantaneous luminance I (t), the time at which change in the instantaneous luminance I (t) is drastic is a boundary between the periods. More specifically, the time t at which a primary function is discontinuous is a boundary between the periods. For example, in the case of
The integrated luminance L can be calculated by Formula 3 from conditions of the instantaneous luminance I (t). In this manner, the integrated luminance L can be calculated by Formula 3 even when the instantaneous luminance I (t) is a given function.
The average luminance B can be calculated by Formula 4 from the image display period τa and the instantaneous luminance I (t) calculated by the above-described method.
The blanking interval τb is provided in one frame period so that quality of a moving image displayed by a display device is improved. Therefore, as far as quality of a moving image displayed by a display device is improved in a period, the period can be considered as the blanking interval τb regardless of luminance of a pixel in the period.
Luminance of a pixel in the blanking interval τb is preferably luminance in which luminance of the pixel in the image display period τa can be reset by human eyes. Therefore, the luminance of the pixel in the blanking interval τb is preferably lower than the luminance of the pixel in the image display period τa. More preferably, the luminance of the pixel in the blanking interval τb is the lowest luminance within display capability of the display device.
Next, control modes of the values used in this document are described. In this embodiment mode, change in the integrated luminance L, the lighting ratio R, and the average luminance B by a control parameter P are particularly described.
Although various parameters can be given as the control parameter P, details of the control parameter P is not described in this embodiment mode. Details of the control parameter P is described in another embodiment mode, and this embodiment mode describes how the integrated luminance L, the lighting ratio R, and the average luminance B are changed simply in accordance with increase and decrease in the control parameter P.
Note that when change in the integrated luminance L, the lighting ratio R, and the average luminance B with respect to change in the control parameter P is described, it is assumed that luminance of pixels perceived by human eyes is the same.
First, change in the integrated luminance L with respect to change in the control parameter P is described with reference to
The integrated luminance L is preferably almost constant with respect to increase in the control parameter P. This is because change in the integrated luminance L corresponds to change in luminance, which is perceived by human eyes, and drastic change in the integrated luminance L cannot be allowed under the assumption that luminance of the pixels, which is perceived by human eyes is the same. This condition can be understood with reference to
Here, when the integrated luminance L is considered as a function particularly with respect to the control parameter P, the integrated luminance L is referred to as integrated luminance L (P). That is, when the graph shown in
Note that actually, it is not necessary that L (P)=L0 be strictly satisfied, and there may be a certain range. This condition can also be understood with reference to
In addition, the integrated luminance L may be increased slowly with respect to increase in the control parameter P. This is because when change in the integrated luminance L is small, this change is allowed, and display can be emphasized in accordance with increase in the control parameter P when the integrated luminance increases slowly with respect to increase in the control parameter P. This condition can be understood with reference to
Here, when the graph shown in
Note that it is not necessary that L (P)=αP+L0 be strictly satisfied, and there may be a certain range. This condition can also be understood with reference to
Next, change in the lighting ratio R and the average luminance B with respect to the control parameter P is described with reference to
The fluctuation range of the integrated luminance L with respect to the control parameter P, which can be allowed, is extremely small, which has been already described. Future discussions will be proceeded on a condition that the integrated luminance L is almost constant with respect to the control parameter P.
When Formula 1 and Formula 4 are transformed to be organized, Formula 7 can be obtained.
Here, the integrated luminance L is almost constant with respect to the control parameter P. In addition, when the one frame period F is also almost constant with respect to the control parameter P, the right side of Formula 7 is almost constant with respect to the control parameter P. Therefore, a product of the lighting ratio R and the average luminance B is almost constant with respect to the control parameter P.
Thus, from the fact that the product of the lighting ratio R and the average luminance B is almost constant with respect to the control parameter P, a conclusion that the lighting ratio R is almost constant with respect to increase in the control parameter P when the average luminance B is almost constant with respect to the control parameter P can be obtained.
Change in the lighting ratio R with respect to increase in the control parameter P is described with reference to
Note that actually, it is only necessary that R (P) be in a range of approximately R0/10 setting Ro as a certain value even when R (P)=R0 is not strictly satisfied.
Change in the average luminance B with respect to the control parameter P is described with reference to
Note that actually, it is only necessary that B (P) be in a range of approximately B0/10 setting Bo as a certain value even when B (P)=B0 is not strictly satisfied.
Next, the lighting ratio R can be simply decreased with respect to increase in the control parameter P. This is because when on a condition that the product of the lighting ratio R and the average luminance B is almost constant with respect to the control parameter P, the lighting ratio R monotonously decreases with respect to the control parameter P when the average luminance B monotonously increases with respect to the control parameter P. This condition can be understood with reference to
In each of graphs shown in
When the lighting ratio R decreases linearly with respect to the control parameter P, the average luminance B increases linearly with respect to the control parameter P as in a graph shown in
When the lighting ratio R decreases as shown by an upward curving line with respect to with respect to the control parameter P, the average luminance B increases as shown by a downward curving line with respect to the control parameter P as in a graph shown in
When the lighting ratio R decreases as shown by a downward curving line with respect to with respect to the control parameter P, the average luminance B increases as shown by an upward curving line with respect to the control parameter P as in a graph shown in
When a value of the lighting ratio R is constant, it is not necessary that the control modes be changed precisely with respect to change in the control parameter P. Accordingly, since algorithm which determines a display method and a peripheral circuit which makes many control modes to be selected are not needed, manufacturing cost of the display device can be reduced. In addition, since the size of a circuit and frequency of operation can be reduced, power consumption can be reduced.
When a value of the lighting ratio R decreases linearly, the control modes can be changed precisely with respect to change in the control parameter P. Accordingly, by using algorithm which determines a display method and a peripheral circuit which makes many control modes to be selected, suitable control modes in accordance with the control parameter P can be realized. Therefore, high-quality display with little motion blur and little flicker can be obtained.
When a value of the lighting ratio R decreases as shown by an upward curving line, the control modes can be changed precisely with respect to change in the control parameter P. In addition, the amount of change in the lighting ratio R can be increased as the control parameter P becomes larger. Accordingly, by using algorithm which determines a display method and a peripheral circuit which makes many control modes to be selected, more suitable control modes in accordance with the control parameter P can be realized. Therefore, higher-quality display with little motion blur and little flicker can be obtained.
When a value of the lighting ratio R decreases as shown by a downward curving line, the control modes can be changed finely with respect to change in the control parameter P. In addition, the amount of change in the lighting ratio R can be decreased as the control parameter P becomes larger. Accordingly, by using algorithm which determines a display method and a peripheral circuit which makes many control modes to be selected, more suitable control modes in accordance with the control parameter P can be realized. Therefore, higher-quality display with few motion blur and flicker can be obtained.
Here, change in the lighting ratio R and the average luminance B with respect to the control parameter P is summarized. When a condition that the product of the lighting ratio R and the average luminance B is constant is satisfied, graphs shown in
Each of
The above-described characteristics are briefly described below. For example, the case in which a value of R (PX)/R0 is 10X is considered (X is a real number). At this time, a value of B (PX)/B0 is 1/10X=10−X. Here, R (PX)/R0 and B (PX)/B0 are plotted in a graph of a logarithmic axis. At this time, when it is noted that a location in the logarithmic axis is just a value of an exponent, as for a location at which 10X is plotted and a location at which 10−X is plotted, a distance of both positions from 100=1 is the absolute value of X. That is, a midpoint of line segments combining R (PX)/R0 and B (PX)/B0 is 1. Since this characteristic is applied to all P, it can be concluded that R (P)/R0 and B (P)/B0 have symmetric shapes about the linear line corresponding to 1 in the vertical axis.
From the condition that the product of the lighting ratio R and the average luminance B in this embodiment mode is always constant in this manner, the graph where change in the lighting ratio R and the average luminance B with respect to the control parameter P has a symmetric shape about 1 in a symmetric axis. Thus, fluctuation in the integrated luminance L can be decreased, so that it is not perceived as fluctuation in luminance by human eyes even when the control parameter is greatly changed. Therefore, a display device with little flicker can be obtained.
Next, another control modes of the lighting ratio R and the average luminance B are described with reference to
First, the case where a value of the lighting ratio R is constant in the region 1 is described. In this case, R (P)=R0 is satisfied in the region 1. This is because P=0 and R (0)=R0 is satisfied in the region 1. In addition, in this case, at least four control modes are conceivable in the region 2. That is, the four control modes correspond to the case where R (P) in the region 2 is constant (see
Next, the case where a value of the lighting ratio R decreases linearly in the region 1 is described. In this case, the value of the lighting ratio R decreases linearly from R (0)=R0 as a starting point in the region 1. In addition, in this case, at least four control modes are conceivable in the region 2. That is, the four control modes correspond to the case where R (P) in the region 2 is constant (see
Next, the case where a value of the lighting ratio R decreases as shown by an upward curving line in the region 1 is described. In this case, the value of the lighting ratio R decreases as shown by the upward curving line from R (0)=R0 as a starting point in the region 1. In addition, in this case, at least four control modes are conceivable in the region 2. That is, the four control modes correspond to the case where R (P) in the region 2 is constant (see
Next, the case where a value of the lighting ratio R decreases as shown by a downward curving line in the region 1 is described. In this case, the value of the lighting ratio R decreases as shown by the downward curving line from R (0)=R0 as a starting point in the region 1. In addition, in this case, at least four control modes are conceivable in the region 2. That is, the four control modes correspond to the case where R (P) in the region 2 is constant (see
When a value of the lighting ratio R is constant in each region, it is not necessary that the control modes be changed precisely with respect to change in the control parameter P. Accordingly, since algorithm which determines a display method and a peripheral circuit which makes many control modes to be selected are not needed, manufacturing cost of the display device can be reduced. In addition, since the size of a circuit and frequency of operation can be reduced, power consumption can be reduced.
When a value of the lighting ratio R decreases linearly in each region, the control modes can be changed precisely with respect to change in the control parameter P. Accordingly, by using algorithm which determines a display method and a peripheral circuit which makes many control modes to be selected, suitable control modes in accordance with the control parameter P can be realized. Therefore, high-quality display with little motion blur and little flicker can be obtained.
When a value of the lighting ratio R decreases as shown by an upward curving line in each region, the control modes can changed finely with respect to change in the control parameter P. In addition, the amount of change in the lighting ratio R can be increased as the control parameter P becomes larger. Accordingly, by using algorithm which determines a display method and a peripheral circuit which makes many control modes to be selected, more suitable control modes in accordance with the control parameter P can be realized. Therefore, higher-quality display with little motion blur and flicker can be obtained.
When a value of the lighting ratio R decreases as shown by a downward curving line in each region, the control modes can be changed precisely with respect to change in the control parameter P. In addition, the amount of change in the lighting ratio R can be decreased as the control parameter P becomes larger Accordingly, by using algorithm which determines a display method and a peripheral circuit which makes many control modes to be selected, more suitable control modes in accordance with the control parameter P can be realized. Therefore, higher-quality display with little motion blur and little flicker can be obtained.
In the control mode where the control parameter P is divided into the two regions (the region 1 and the region 2), it is important that R (P) can have discontinuous values at a boundary between different regions. When a difference in values at the boundary between the different regions is small, the control mode has an advantage in that a display defect (e.g., an unnatural contour or a flicker) due to drastic change in the control mode hardly occurs because change in R (P) with respect to change in P at the vicinity of the boundary is small.
When a difference in values at the boundary between the different regions is large, the control mode has an advantage in that an emphatic effect on display due to drastic change in the control mode is large and sharp display can be performed because change in R (P) with respect to change in P in the vicinity of the boundary is large.
Here, the number of regions obtained by dividing the control parameter may be more than two. For example, the control parameter P may be divided into three regions or may be divided into three or more regions. By dividing the control parameter P into three or more regions, more various control modes can be realized. In particular, R (P) can have discontinuous values and the number of boundaries of different regions is increased, which is important. That is, in each region, more various control modes can be realized in the case where R (P) decreases linearly with respect to the control parameter P, the case where R (P) decreases as shown by an upward curving line with respect to the control parameter P, and the case where R (P) decreases as shown by a downward curving line with respect to the control parameter P. In addition to this, even in the case where R (P) is constant with respect to the control parameter P in each region, it is particularly advantageous that a certain number of control modes can be obtained. That is, advantages of a simple circuit (e.g., reduction in manufacturing cost and reduction in power consumption) and advantages of realization of various control modes are compatible.
This mode can be understood with reference to
Here, it is obvious that combinations of modes of R (P) in each region are not limited to the combinations shown in
Note that a mode where the lighting ratio R and the average luminance B are changed with respect to the control parameter P may be a mode which can be selected from a plurality of kinds. That is, a plurality of different R (P) and B (P) may be prepared in advance, and a second control parameter Q which is prepared separately from the control parameter P may determine which R (P) and B (P) to be used. At this time, the lighting ratio R and the average luminance B are denoted by RQ (P) and BQ (P) respectively, and the control parameter P is referred to as a first parameter for convenience. For example, when the second parameter Q is an integer ranging from 1 to n, the lighting ratio R and the average luminance B are referred to as R1 (P), R2 (P), . . . , and Rn (P), and B1 (P), B2 (P), . . . , and Bn (P).
This mode can be understood with reference to
Note that since the mode of the average luminance B can be determined based on the mode of the lighting ratio R in some degree similarly to another description in this embodiment mode, description thereof is omitted here.
In another example in which the modes of the lighting ratio R and the average luminance B are controlled by the first control parameter P and the second control parameter Q, R1 (P) is constant with respect to the first parameter P, R2 (P) decreases linearly with respect to the first control parameter P, and R3 (P) decreases linearly with respect to the first control parameter P. Here, a gradient of linear decrease is preferably changed in accordance with the second control parameter Q. In addition, in each mode of the lighting ratio R with respect to the second control parameter Q, the lighting ratio R can have different values from each other when the first control parameter P is 0.
This mode can be understood with reference to
In another example in which the modes of the lighting ratio R and the average luminance B are controlled by the first control parameter P and the second control parameter Q, R1 (P) is constant with respect to the first parameter P, R2 (P) decreases linearly with respect to the first control parameter P, and R3 (P) decreases as shown by an upward curving line with respect to the first control parameter P. Here, a ratio of decrease is preferably changed in accordance with the second control parameter Q. In addition, in each mode of the lighting ratio R with respect to the second control parameter Q, the lighting ratio R can have different values from each other when the first control parameter P is 0.
This mode can be understood with reference to
In another example in which the modes of the lighting ratio R and the average luminance B are controlled by the first control parameter P and the second control parameter Q, R1 (P) decreases linearly with respect to the first parameter P, R2 (P) decreases linearly with respect to the first control parameter P, and R3 (P) decreases linearly with respect to the first control parameter P. Here, a gradient of linear decrease is preferably changed in accordance with the second control parameter Q. In addition, in each mode of the lighting ratio R with respect to the second control parameter Q, the lighting ratio R can have different values from each other when the first control parameter P is 0.
This mode can be understood with reference to
In another example in which the modes of the lighting ratio R and the average luminance B are controlled by the first control parameter P and the second control parameter Q, R1 (P) decreases as shown by an upward curving line with respect to the first control parameter P, R2 (P) decreases as shown by an upward curving line with respect to the first control parameter P, and R3 (P) decreases as shown by an upward curving line with respect to the first control parameter P. Here, a ratio of decrease is preferably changed in accordance with the second control parameter Q. In addition, in each mode of the lighting ratio R with respect to the second control parameter Q, the lighting ratio R can have different values from each other when the first control parameter P is 0.
This mode can be understood with reference to
In another example in which the modes of the lighting ratio R and the average luminance B are controlled by the first control parameter P and the second control parameter Q, R1 (P) decreases as shown by an upward curving line with respect to the first control parameter P, R2 (P) decreases as shown by an upward curving line with respect to the first control parameter P, and R3 (P) decreases linearly with respect to the first control parameter P. Here, a ratio of decrease is preferably changed in accordance with the second control parameter Q. In addition, in each mode of the lighting ratio R with respect to the second control parameter Q, the lighting ratio R can have different values from each other when the first control parameter P is 0.
This mode can be understood with reference to
Note that only typical combinations are described in description of the method in which the first control parameter P and the second control parameter Q are used. However, various modes described in this embodiment mode can be used for the lighting ratio R and the average luminance B.
For example, as shown in
Although this embodiment mode is described with reference to various drawings, the contents (or may be part of the contents) described in each drawing can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with the contents (or may be part of the contents) described in another drawing. Further, even more drawings can be formed by combining each part with another part in the above-described drawings.
The contents (or may be part of the contents) described in each drawing of this embodiment mode can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with the contents (or may be part of the contents) described in a drawing in another embodiment mode. Further, even more drawings can be formed by combining each part with part of another embodiment mode in the drawings of this embodiment mode.
This embodiment mode shows an example of an embodied case of the contents (or may be part of the contents) described in other embodiment modes, an example of slight transformation thereof, an example of partial modification thereof, an example of improvement thereof, an example of detailed description thereof, an application example thereof, an example of related part thereof, or the like. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiment modes can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment mode.
Embodiment Mode 2In this embodiment mode, among methods in each of which the lighting ratio R is changed under a condition that luminance perceived by human eyes is constant and methods in each of which luminance perceived by human eyes is changed, some typical examples are described.
First, an example of a control method of the lighting ratio R is described. As a control method of the lighting ratio R, (1) a method of directly writing blanking data to each pixel, (2) a method of blinking the whole backlight, and (3) a method of sequentially blinking a backlight which is divided by areas can be mainly given.
The method (1) can be applied to both the case where a display element included in a display device is a self-luminous element typified by an element included in an EL display, a PDP, or an EFD and the case where a display element included in a display device is a non-light emitting element typified by an element included in a liquid crystal display. The methods (2) and (3) can be applied to the case where a display element included in a display device is a non-light emitting element.
Before the control method of the lighting ratio R is described, a structure of pixels included in an active matrix display device is described.
The pixel included in the active matrix display device includes a pixel region, a switching means, a display element, a signal holding means, a signal transmitting means, and a switch controlling means. A pixel region 900, a switching means 901, a display element 902, a signal holding means 904, a signal transmitting means 906, and a switch controlling means 907 are included in the structural example of the pixel shown in
In
In a display portion of the display device, the pixel regions 900 are arranged in matrix. At this time, when the pixel regions 900 arranged in a row sideways are focused, the scan lines 907 thereof are common. Similarly, when the pixel regions 900 arranged in tandem are focused, the data lines 906 thereof are common.
That is, the number of wirings can be reduced when the data lines 906 thereof are common. On the other hand, different signals cannot be written to the pixel regions 900 arranged in tandem concurrently. Here, the data lines 906 are used by being divided in terms of time by sequentially scanning the scan lines 907 which are common in the pixel regions 900 arranged in the row sideways, so that a different data signal can be written to each pixel.
A mode of this sequential scanning can be understood with reference to
The mode of sequential scanning shown in
Next, a mode of sequential scanning when the lighting ratio R is smaller than 1 is described. As for a method of directly writing blanking data to each pixel, after a specific data signal is written to each pixel, it is necessary that the signal written to the pixel be rewritten into a signal in accordance with blanking data at appropriate timing.
A mode of sequential scanning at this time can be understood with reference to
Similarly, when the lighting ratio R=1/3 is realized in this manner, it is only necessary to start blanking writing scanning when time of F/3 passes from timing at which data writing scanning is started. At this time, since the display period τa=F/3, the lighting ratio R at this time is 1/3 from Formula 1. A mode of sequential scanning at this time can be understood with reference to
Similarly, when the lighting ratio R=1/4 is realized in this manner, it is only necessary to start blanking writing scanning when time of F/4 passes from timing at which data writing scanning is started. At this time, since the display period τa=F/4, the lighting ratio R at this time is 1/4 from Formula 1. A mode of sequential scanning at this time can be understood with reference to
Similarly, when the lighting ratio R=2/3 is realized in this manner, it is only necessary to start blanking writing scanning when time of 2F/3 passes from timing at which data writing scanning is started. At this time, since the display period τa=2F/3, the lighting ratio R at this time is 2/3 from Formula 1. A mode of sequential scanning at this time can be understood with reference to
Similarly, when the lighting ratio R=3/4 is realized in this manner, it is only necessary to start blanking writing scanning when time of 3F/4 passes from timing at which data writing scanning is started. At this time, since the display period τa=3F/4, the lighting ratio R at this time is 3/4 from Formula 1. A mode of sequential scanning at this time can be understood with reference to
Values of the lighting ratio R can be set variously in accordance with writing timing of blanking data in this manner.
Here, it should be noted that when the lighting ratio R is controlled by performing blanking writing at specific timing after data writing scanning is performed, there is a period during which data writing scanning and blanking writing scanning are performed at the same time. That is, when certain time of each of the graphs shown in
Even when data writing scanning and blanking writing scanning coincide at different positions in this manner, there are a plurality of methods for accurately writing a signal in each scanning. For example, there is a method in which a period during which one scan line is selected (one gate election period) is further divided into a plurality of periods and data writing scanning and blanking writing scanning are assigned to each period. The structure shown in
As another method, there is a method of adding a signal line and a switching element which are dedicated for blanking writing scanning to the pixel region. By using this method, signals can be written accurately by each scanning without dividing one gate selection period.
The pixel included in the active matrix display device to which the signal line and the switching element which are dedicated for blanking writing scanning are added includes a pixel region, a first switching means, a second switching means, a display element, a signal holding means, a first signal transmitting means, a second signal transmitting means, a first switch controlling means, and a second switch controlling means. A pixel region 910, a first switching means 911, a second switching means 918, a display element 912, a signal holding means 914, a first signal transmitting means 916, a second signal transmitting means 920, a first switch controlling means 917, and a second switch controlling means 919 are included in the structural example of the pixel shown in
In
In addition, a driving method of a display device in accordance with this document can be used for both the case where a liquid crystal element is normally black and the case where a liquid crystal element is normally white. Here, normally black corresponds to a mode where a black image is displayed when voltage is not applied to a liquid crystal element. Normally white is a mode where a white image is displayed when voltage is not applied to a liquid crystal element. Note that a method in accordance with this document can also be applied to a normally-white liquid crystal element by inverting polarity of signal voltage even when the signal voltage is shown as normally black.
By using the pixel structure to which the signal line and a switching element which are dedicated for blanking writing scanning are added in this manner, a signal can be written accurately by each scanning without dividing one gate selection period. Therefore, driving frequency of a peripheral circuit can be suppressed low, so that power consumption can be reduced.
Next, specific operating methods of the method in which one gate election period is further divided into a plurality of periods and data writing scanning and blanking writing scanning are assigned to each period, and the method of adding the signal line and a switching element which are dedicated for blanking writing scanning are described.
First, the method in which one gate election period is divided into a plurality of regions and data writing scanning and blanking writing scanning are assigned to each period is described with reference to
Timing for driving the scan line 1002 by the scan line driver 1004 shown in
The scan line driver 1004 drives the scan line 1001 from the time t2 to time t3. At this time, the data line outputs voltage Vblank. The voltage Vblank is voltage supplying luminance which should be displayed in a blanking interval.
A period from the time t1 to the time t3 in the description heretofore corresponds to one gate selection period under a driving condition of the lighting ratio R=1 without providing a blanking interval. That is, one gate selection period (a period from the time t1 to the time t3) is divided into two periods (a period from the time t1 to the time t2 and a period from the time t2 to the time t3) and data writing scanning and blanking writing scanning are assigned to each period.
The scan line driver 1004 drives a scan line which is next to the scan line 1002 from the time t3 to time t4. At this time, the data line outputs voltage Vdata2. The voltage Vdata2 is voltage which should be written to a pixel selected by the scan line which is next to the scan line 1002 at timing shown in
The scan line driver 1004 drives a scan line which is next to the scan line 1001 from the time t4 to time t5. At this time, the data line outputs voltage Vblank. The voltage Vblank is voltage supplying luminance which should be displayed in the blanking interval.
By repeating driving which is described above, signals can be accurately written in each scanning even when data writing scanning and blanking writing scanning coincide at different positions.
Note that voltage of the data line is an example for describing the driving method, and voltage of Vblank, Vdata1, and Vdata2 is not limited to the voltage shown in
Next, the method of adding a signal line and a switching element which are dedicated for blanking writing scanning to the pixel region is described with reference to
Timing for driving the writing scan line 1012 by the writing scan line driver 1014 shown in
The blanking scan line driver 1015 operates concurrently and drives the blanking scan line 1011 from the time t1 to the time t3. At this time, a signal written to a pixel selected by the blanking scan line 1011 at timing shown in
The writing scan line driver 1014 drives a writing scan line which is next to the writing scan line 1012 from the time t3 to time t5. At this time, the data line outputs voltage Vdata2. The voltage Vdata2 is voltage which should be written to a pixel selected by the writing scan line which is next to the writing scan line 1012 at timing shown in
The blanking scan line driver 1015 operates concurrently and drives a blanking scan line which is next to the blanking scan line 1011 from the time t3 to the time t5. At this time, a signal written to a pixel selected by the blanking scan line which is next to the blanking scan line 1011 at timing shown in
A period from the time t1 to the time t3 in the description heretofore corresponds to one gate selection period under a driving condition of the lighting ratio R=1 without providing a blanking interval. That is, data writing scanning and blanking writing scanning can be performed concurrently without dividing one gate selection period into two periods.
By repeating driving which is described above, a signal can be accurately written in each scanning even when data writing scanning and blanking writing scanning coincide at different positions.
Note that voltage of the data line is an example for describing the driving method, and voltage of Vdata1 and Vdata2 is not limited to the voltage shown in
Next, another mode of sequential driving when the lighting ratio R is smaller than 1 is described. As for a method of directly writing blanking data to each pixel, after a specific data signal is written to each pixel, it is necessary that the signal written to the pixel be rewritten to a signal in accordance with blanking data at appropriate timing. Therefore, in the methods shown in
A method shown below is a method in which writing scanning and blanking scanning are completed in time shorter than one frame period F. By using this method, data writing scanning and blanking writing scanning can be performed without either dividing one gate selection period or adding a signal line and a switching element to a pixel region.
There are a plurality of modes of the method in which writing scanning and blanking scanning are completed in time shorter than the one frame period F. One mode is a mode in which a period during which writing scanning and blanking scanning are completed is changed in accordance with a value of the lighting ratio R. Here, a period during which writing scanning and blanking scanning are completed is referred to as τw.
In the mode in which τw is changed in accordance with a value of the lighting ratio R, τw is conformed to a period having a smaller value between the image display period τa and the blanking interval τb, which lead the lighting ratio R. A mode of sequential scanning in this method can be understood with reference to
When the blanking interval τb is 0, blanking scanning is not performed. A mode of sequential scanning at this time can be understood with reference to
When τa=τb=F/2, sequential scanning is performed by setting τw as F/2. A mode of sequential scanning at this time can be understood with reference to
When τa=F/3 and τb=2F/3, sequential scanning is performed by setting τw as F/3. A mode of sequential scanning at this time can be understood with reference to
When τa=2F/3 and τb=F/3, sequential scanning is performed by setting τw as F/3. A mode of sequential scanning at this time can be understood with reference to
When τa=F/4 and b=3F/4, sequential scanning is performed by setting τw as F/4. A mode of sequential scanning at this time can be understood with reference to
When τa=3F/4 and τb=F/4, sequential scanning is performed by setting τw as F/3. A mode of sequential scanning at this time can be understood with reference to
The mode in which τw is changed in accordance with a value of the lighting ratio R can be realized by conforming τw to a period having a smaller value between the image display period τa and the blanking interval τb, which lead the lighting ratio R in this manner. Since τw can be set to a suitable period in accordance with the value of the lighting ratio R in this manner, operating frequency of a peripheral circuit such as a scan line driver or a data line driver can also be set to a suitable value which is in accordance with the value of the lighting ratio R. Accordingly, power consumption can be reduced.
Among the plurality of modes of the method in which writing scanning and blanking scanning are completed in time shorter than the one frame period F, a mode which is different from the above-described mode is a mode in which the period τw during which writing scanning and blanking scanning are completed is completed rapidly without depending on the value of the lighting ratio R.
In the mode in which the period τw during which writing scanning and blanking scanning are completed is completed earlier without depending on the value of the lighting ratio R, τw is shortened as much as possible. For example, τw is set to F/4 which is 1/4 of the one frame period F. A mode of sequential scanning at this time can be understood with reference to
When the blanking interval τb is 0, blanking scanning is not performed. A mode of sequential scanning at this time can be understood with reference to
When τa=τb=F/2, sequential scanning is performed also by setting τw as F/4. A mode of sequential scanning at this time can be understood with reference to FIG. 11D. That is, blanking scanning is started at the time F/2 in the period of F/4 after writing scanning is completed in the period of F/4. Then, blanking scanning is completed at the time 3F/4. At this time, the lighting ratio R is 1/2.
When τa =F/3 and τb=2F/3, sequential scanning is performed also by setting τw as F/4. A mode of sequential scanning at this time can be understood with reference to
When τa=2F/3 and τb=F/3, sequential scanning is performed also by setting τw as F/4. A mode of sequential scanning at this time can be understood with reference to
When τa=F/4 and τb=3F/4, sequential scanning is performed also by setting τw as F/4. The mode of sequential scanning at this time can be understood with reference to
When τa=3F/4 and τb=F/4, sequential scanning is performed also by setting τw as F/3. The mode of sequential scanning at this time can be understood with reference to
Here, in the mode in which τw is completed earlier without depending on the value of the lighting ratio R, a mode with a lighting ratio other than those shown in
Note that the mode in which the period τw during which writing scanning and blanking scanning are completed is changed in accordance with the value of the lighting ratio R and the mode in which τw is completed earlier without depending on the value of the lighting ratio R can be combined. For example, when the lighting ratio R can be freely selected in a range of equal to or greater than 1/3 and equal to or less than 2/3, τw is set as F/3. Then, when the lighting ratio R is needed to be selected in a range of greater than that, τw is set to be smaller than F/3. For example, when τw is set as F/4, the lighting ratio R in a range of equal to or greater than 1/4 and equal to or less than 1/3 and the lighting ratio R in a range of equal to or greater than 2/3 and equal to or less than 3/4, which cannot be selected when τw is set as F/3, can be selected. Since the value of the lighting ratio R can be selected in a certain range in this manner and operating frequency of the peripheral circuit such as a scan line driver or a data line driver can be set to a suitable value which is in accordance with the range of the value of the lighting ratio R, power consumption can be reduced, which is extremely advantageous.
(1) a method of directly writing blanking data to each pixel, (2) a method of blinking the whole backlight, and (3) a method of sequentially blinking a backlight which is divided by areas can be mainly given as a control method of the lighting ratio R, which has been described at the beginning of this embodiment mode. The driving method which is described heretofore is a method which can be used for the method (1).
The method (1) can be applied to both of the case where a display element included in a display device is a self-luminous element typified by an element included in an EL display, a PDP, or an EFD and the case where a display element included in a display device is a non-light emitting element typified by an element included in a liquid crystal display. Next, driving methods of the methods (2) and (3) are described.
The method (2) where the whole backlight is blinked can be used when a display device includes a member called a backlight. A backlight corresponds to a light source provided on the back of a display portion of a display device. In particular, a backlight is advantageous when a display portion of a display device includes a non-light emitting display element. As such a display element, a transmissive liquid crystal element and a semi-transmissive liquid crystal element can be given, for example. Note that a display device may include a front light projector, a rear and front projector, or a light source for a projector without limiting to a backlight.
In the case of a non-light emitting display element, a light source is necessary in addition to the display element because the display element does not emit light by itself. At this time, a backlight is used in some cases. A backlight is usually a surface light source which uniformly illuminates a display portion of a display device. At this time, the display element has a function of determining how much light of this light source transmits. Accordingly, increase and decrease in luminance of the backlight corresponds to increase and decrease in brightness of the whole image.
That is, in a display device which includes a backlight, a blanking interval can be provided by changing luminance of the backlight without writing a blanking signal to a display element. Further, the lighting ratio R can be controlled by controlling the length of a period during which the luminance of the backlight is changed.
In the method in which the lighting ratio R is controlled by controlling the luminance of the backlight, switching of the luminance of the backlight and writing scanning are preferably controlled at timing which is different in terms of time. This is because by controlling switching of the luminance of the backlight and writing scanning at timing which is different in terms of time, all the pixels are classified into pixels which do not emit light before data is written and do not emit light right after data is written or pixels which emit light before data is written and continuously emit light when data is written. Therefore, since pixels in different conditions are not displayed concurrently in the display portion, a problem such as display unevenness can be reduced. This mode can be understood with reference to the graph shown in
In addition, the length of the period during which the luminance of the backlight is changed may be changed.
When the lighting ratio R is controlled by the method of blinking the whole backlight, the backlight is turned out or light of the backlight is reduced in the blanking interval, so that there is an advantage in that power consumption can be reduced to a corresponding extent. In addition, since a structure of a circuit is simple, manufacturing cost can be reduced.
Next, among the control methods of the lighting ratio R, the method (3) in which a backlight which is divided by areas is sequentially blinked is described. Here, an example in which the backlight is divided by areas in a direction which is parallel to a scan line is described.
In the method in which the lighting ratio R is controlled by controlling the luminance of the backlight which is divided by areas, switching of the luminance of the backlight and writing scanning are preferably controlled at timing which is different in terms of time. This is because by controlling switching of the luminance of the backlight and writing scanning at timing which is different in terms of time, all the pixels are classified into pixels which do not emit light before data is written and do not emit light right after data is written or pixels which emit light before data is written and continuously emit light when data is written. Therefore, since pixels in different conditions are not displayed at the same time in the display portion, a problem such as display unevenness can be reduced. This mode can be understood with reference to the graphs shown in
In
By using the backlight which is divided by areas, a period during which the luminance of the backlight is changed in each area can be varied. In
In addition, the length of the period during which the luminance of the backlight which is divided by areas is changed may be changed.
In addition, when the backlight which is divided by areas is used, control can be performed such that switching of the luminance of the backlight and writing scanning do not overlap with each other in terms of time without increasing scan speed of writing scanning. For example, in
Note that even when the backlight which is divided by areas is used, scan speed of writing scanning may be increased. Thus, a display trouble caused by variation in light-emitting time between areas can be reduced. This point can be understood with reference to the graph shown in
As a display trouble caused by variation in light-emitting time between areas, increase of false light emission caused by light leakage from the areas, increase of visibility of a boundary between the areas, or the like can be given, for example.
When the lighting ratio R is controlled by the method of controlling the luminance of the backlight which is divided by areas, the backlight is turned out or light of the backlight is reduced in the blanking interval, so that there is an advantage in that power consumption can be reduced to a corresponding extent.
Heretofore, a method of controlling the lighting ratio R is described under a condition that luminance perceived by human eyes (L/F) is constant. A method for changing luminance perceived by human eyes is described below.
In order to change luminance perceived by human eyes, there are a method of changing the integrated luminance L and a method of changing the lighting ratio R. Here, when it is assumed that the lighting ratio R is constant, the integrated luminance L should be changed in order to change the luminance perceived by human eyes.
The integrated luminance L is luminance obtained by time integrating the instantaneous luminance I (t) as shown in Formula 3. That is, it is necessary that the instantaneous luminance I (t) be changed in order to change the integrated luminance L.
Here, in the case where a display element included in a display device is a self-luminous element such as an element included in an EL display, a PDP, or an EFD, luminance of the display element itself changes the instantaneous luminance I (t). That is, the instantaneous luminance I (t) can be changed by writing a predetermined signal to each display element.
On the other hand, luminance of a display element itself changes the instantaneous luminance I (t) even in the case where the display element included in a display device is a non-light emitting element; however, the luminance of the display element itself can be divided into a plurality of elements in the case where the display element is a non-light emitting element. That is, the plurality of factors correspond to backlight luminance BL and transmittance T of the display element. Therefore, the luminance of the display element is a product of the backlight luminance BL and the transmittance T. The luminance of the display element also corresponds to the instantaneous luminance I (t). When the description is summarized, it can be represented as Formula 8.
I(t)=BL(t)T(t) Formula 8]
Here, Formula 8 is assigned to Formula 3 which leads the integrated luminance L. Note that when the backlight luminance BL and the transmittance T are not dependent on the time t for simplification, Formula 9 is obtained.
A left-hand side of Formula 9 shows the luminance perceived by human eyes (L/F). Therefore, when the backlight luminance BL and the transmittance T are constant, the product of BL and T represents the luminance perceived by human eyes.
In a display device using a liquid crystal element, the transmittance T is usually controlled by voltage written to a pixel and the luminance perceived by human eyes is controlled. A numeric value in which a degree of the luminance perceived by human eyes is represented by a positive integer is called a gray scale. In addition, G is used as a sign which represents the gray scale. For example, when brightness between the darkest brightness and the brightest brightness is classified into 256 stages, a gray scale 0expresses the darkest brightness and a gray scale 255 expresses the brightest brightness. An intermediate gray scale expresses intermediate brightness of the two gray scales.
It should be noted that when a gray scale is dealt, brightness expressed by the gray scale dose not necessarily have a linear relation with physical luminance. That is, when a relation between a gray scale and luminance is expressed by a graph, the gray scale and the luminance can be in connection with each other by a curve having various shapes. This curve showing a relationship between a gray scale and luminance is called a gamma curve.
A Typical gamma curve is described with reference to
When luminance BLT is changed by changing a gray scale G transmittance T is usually changed. This is because although the transmittance T can be individually controlled by changing voltage written to each pixel, it is difficult to individually control the backlight luminance BL because the backlight luminance BL is shared with a plurality of pixels.
Next, a method of displaying an image normally even when the backlight luminance BL decreases by controlling the transmittance T and the backlight luminance BL is described. Since the luminance BLT is the product of the transmittance T and the backlight luminance BL, various gamma curves can be realized by changing the transmittance T and the backlight luminance BL.
A curve 1401 shown in
A curve 1402 shown in
Note that an advantage of the method in this document is that the backlight luminance BL can be decreased by controlling the lighting ratio R. Thus, power consumption of a backlight can be reduced and a blanking interval can be provided, so that motion blur can be reduced.
Here, an adverse effect on image display at the time when display is performed in accordance with a gamma curve in which luminance is saturated as in the curve 1402 shown in
However, not all the images cause blown-out highlights. In a graph shown in
On the other hand, a histogram 1404 shown in
In this manner, the method in this document analyzes a histogram of an image and determines whether the number of data of an image included in a gray scale region in which luminance is saturated is equal to or less than 1/10 of the total number of data. When the number of data of the image included in the gray scale region in which the luminance is saturated is equal to or less than 1/10 of the total number of data, the transmittance T increases such that the graph has a gamma curve which is in accordance with the function T1 (G), and the backlight luminance BL decreases. In addition, the backlight luminance BL is preferably decreased by controlling the lighting ratio R. Thus, power consumption of a backlight can be reduced and a blanking interval can be provided, so that motion blur can be reduced.
Next, the case is described in which the histogram of the image is analyzed and the number of data of the image included in the gray scale region in which the luminance is saturated is equal to or greater than 1/10 of the total number of data.
In the case where the histogram of the image is analyzed and the number of data of the image included in the gray scale region in which the luminance is saturated is equal to or greater than 1/10 of the total number of data, the curve 1400 is not a curve represented by the function T1 (G) but a curve represented by another function when the transmittance T of the curve 1400 increases in each of the gray scales C
A curve 1405 shown in
A curve 1406 shown in
As for the gamma curve 1406 in which the transmittance T is changed in accordance with not the function T1 (G) but the function T2 (G) and the luminance is made to be a2 by decreasing the backlight luminance BL, the luminance is saturated in a certain gray scale region similarly to the gamma curve 1402. However, the size of a gray scale region in which luminance is saturated is different between the gray scale region G1406 in which the luminance is saturated in the gamma curve 1406 and the gray scale region G1402 in which the luminance is saturated in the gamma curve 1402. In addition, luminance in a gray scale region in which the luminance is saturated is different from each other. That is, G1402>G1406 and a1<a2 are satisfied.
An advantageous effect on a displayed image due to a difference in the size of the gray scale regions is described. Although the histogram 1404 shown in
Therefore, if the number of data included in the gray scale region G1402 is equal to or greater than 1/10 of the total number of data in the image displayed by the histogram 1404, a degree of blown-out highlights in image display can be made not to be perceived by changing a gamma curve used for display from the gamma curve represented by the curve 1402 to the curve represented by the curve 1406.
In this manner, the method in this document analyzes a histogram of an image and determines whether the number of data of an image included in a gray scale region in which luminance is saturated is equal to or less than 1/10 of the total number of data. When the number of data of the image included in the gray scale region in which the luminance is saturated is equal to or greater than 1/10 of the total number of data, the transmittance T increases such that the graph has a gamma curve which is in accordance with the function T2 (G) supplying luminance which is lower than that of the function T1 (G), and the backlight luminance BL decreases. In addition, the backlight luminance BL is preferably decreased by controlling the lighting ratio R. Thus, power consumption of a backlight can be reduced and a blanking interval can be provided, so that motion blur can be reduced.
Note that even in the case of the gamma curve which is in accordance with the function T2 (G) supplying the luminance which is lower than that of the function T1 (G), display with a lower degree of blown-out highlights can be performed by not using the function T2 (G) but separately preparing a function supplying luminance which is lower than that of the function T2 (G) in the case of an image having a histogram in which the number of data included in the gray scale region G1406 in which the luminance is saturated is equal to or greater than 1/10 of the total number of data (e.g., a histogram shown in
Next, a method in which peak luminance can be improved by controlling the transmittance T and the backlight luminance BL is described. Peak luminance corresponds to the highest luminance which can be displayed by a display device. When peak luminance is high, expressive power of an image is improved. For example, an image where stars twinkle in the night sky, an image where light is reflected by a car body, or the like can be displayed as expression which is closer to real objects.
The highest luminance can be simply increased by just increasing the backlight luminance. However, luminance on a lower gray scale side is also increased at the same time when the backlight luminance is just increased, and a condition where luminance of a portion displaying black increases (i.e., black blurring) is caused. Thus, expressive power of an image is not improved. In order to improve expressive power of an image, it is important to increase the highest luminance without causing black blurring. In this document, description “peak luminance is improved” may mean that the highest luminance increases without causing black blurring.
A curve 1501 shown in
A curve 1502 shown in
When image display is performed by using the curve 1502 as a gamma curve, the highest luminance can be increased without causing black blurring in a low gray scale region. That is, peak luminance can be improved. Thus, expressive power of an image can be improved.
Note that an advantage of the method in this document is that the backlight luminance BL can be decreased by controlling the lighting ratio R. Thus, a suitable blanking interval can be set, so that a flicker can be reduced and motion blur can be reduced optimally.
Here, when a curve represented by the curve 1502 shown in
Next, another method of displaying an image normally even when the backlight luminance BL decreases by controlling the transmittance T and the backlight luminance BL is described. Since the luminance BLT is the product of the transmittance T and the backlight luminance BL, various gamma curves can be realized by changing the transmittance T and the backlight luminance BL.
A curve 1601 shown in
A curve 1602 shown in
A curve 1603 shown in
A curve 1604 shown in
Note that an advantage of the method in this document is that the backlight luminance BL can be decreased by controlling the lighting ratio R. Thus, power consumption of a backlight can be reduced and a blanking interval can be provided, so that motion blur can be reduced.
Although this embodiment mode is described with reference to various drawings, the contents (or may be part of the contents) described in each drawing can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with the contents (or may be part of the contents) described in another drawing. Further, even more drawings can be formed by combining each part with another part in the above-described drawings.
The contents (or may be part of the contents) described in each drawing of this embodiment mode can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with the contents (or may be part of the contents) described in a drawing in another embodiment mode. Further, even more drawings can be formed by combining each part with part of another embodiment mode in the drawings of this embodiment mode.
This embodiment mode shows an example of an embodied case of the contents (or may be part of the contents) described in other embodiment modes, an example of slight transformation thereof, an example of partial modification thereof, an example of improvement thereof, an example of detailed description thereof, an application example thereof, an example of related part thereof, or the like. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiment modes can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment mode.
Embodiment Mode 3In this embodiment mode, specific examples of the control parameter P or Q described in Embodiment Mode 1 are described. In addition, in this embodiment mode, P is used as a sign showing a control parameter.
Here, in this document, there is not a particular distinction between the case where the sign showing the control parameter is P, the case where the sign showing the control parameter is Q, and the case where the sign showing the control parameter is other than P and Q. The sign showing the control parameter is just determined for convenience. Therefore, among a plurality of specific examples of the control parameter, which are described below, any of the specific examples may be used as the control parameter P, or any of the specific examples may be used as the control parameter Q. In addition, the number of the control parameters is not particularly limited.
First, the case is described in which the control parameter P is determined by numerically analyzing image data which is displayed on a display device.
The displayed image is divided into an object and a background by analyzing image data which is input to the display device. Here, the object corresponds to a portion of the image where the control parameter P is determined. In addition, the background corresponds to portions other than the object.
In each of
In each of
In each of
In this manner, a difference in luminance between an object and a background is analyzed by a histogram, and the control parameter P increases (the lighting ratio R decreases) as a difference between luminance distribution of the object and luminance distribution of the background becomes larger. Therefore, motion blur can be reduced.
Note that the control parameter P can be determined by not only the difference in luminance between the object and the background, but also sharpness of change in luminance at a boundary between the object and the background. That is, the control parameter P may be determined by a value obtained by secondarily differentiating a function which corresponds to luminance with respect to a position in a display portion of a display device on a line including the boundary between the object and the background. Here, as the secondary differential value at the boundary between the object and the background becomes larger, a degree of motion blur increases because an image is an image where the boundary between the object and the background stands out. Therefore, as the secondary differential value at the boundary between the object and the background becomes larger, the control parameter P is preferably increased. This is because the lighting ratio R is controlled such that motion blur is further reduced as the control parameter P becomes larger in Embodiment Mode 1.
Next, the case is described in which the control parameter P is determined by a method other than the method of numerically analyzing image data which is displayed on a display device.
As a method of determining the control parameter P other than the method of numerically analyzing image data which is displayed on a display device, a method of collecting data on environment where a display device is set can be given.
For example, a display device 1900 described in this document is set in a room as shown in
In the environment where the display device 1900 is set, some change in temperature due to various factors always occurs. For example, when some kind of electronic and electric device is put inside the board 1901 or the board 1901 itself is some kind of electronic and electric device, change in temperature in the display device 1900 due to heat from a lower part is inevitable. In addition, when air delivered from the temperature and humidity control device 1902 directly or indirectly flows to the display device 1900, change in temperature in the display device 1900 due to heat or cool air from an upper part is inevitable. The same can be said for the window 1903 and the entrance 1905.
When temperature of the environment where the display device 1900 is set is changed, characteristics of a display element is changed. For example, in the case of a liquid crystal element, response speed is quickened when temperature is high and the response speed decreases when the temperature is low. Therefore, as the temperature of the environment becomes lower, the control parameter P is preferably increased.
In this manner, the control parameter P which determines a control condition of the display device 1900 may be determined in accordance with change in the temperature of the environment where the display device 1900 is set. Therefore, the display device 1900 may include a temperature sensor.
In addition, light which shines on a display portion of the display device 1900 greatly affects a display condition of the display device 1900. As light which shines on a display portion of the display device 1900, light from the lighting device 1904 or penetration of external light from the window 1903 can be given in environment shown in
When light shines on the display portion of the display device 1900, contrast of an image decreases by reflected light of the light. That is, when the contrast of the image decreases by increase in the reflected light, a degree of motion blur decreases. Therefore, as reflected light by the light which shines on the display portion of the display device 1900 becomes less, the control parameter P is preferably increased.
In this manner, the control parameter P which determines the control condition of the display device 1900 may be determined in accordance with change in brightness of the environment where the display device 1900 is set. Therefore, the display device 1900 may include a photo sensor.
Next, as a method of determining the control parameter P other than the method of numerically analyzing image data which is displayed on a display device, a method of determining the control parameter P by contents displayed by a display device can be given.
A view shown in
When the display device 1900 displays a baseball game, an object which is used for determining the control parameter P is a baseball ball 1910, a bat 1911 of a batter, or the like. When the display device 1900 displays a soccer game, an object which is used for determining the control parameter P is a soccer ball 1920, a movement of the whole image by a pan operation on a imaging device side, or the like. In each case, a kind of the object is extremely limited.
In addition, conditions such as speed of a movement when the object is displayed, the shape, the size, the position, density, the difference in luminance of the background, and the sharpness of change in the luminance at the boundary between the object and the background are hardly changed during which the contents are displayed. That is, when a value of the control parameter P, which should be set, is determined in advance depending on kinds of the contents, a suitable control parameter P can be determined without analyzing data on an image which is displayed on the display device every frame.
As kinds of the contents other than those shown in
In this manner, when a suitable control parameter P can be set in advance depending on kinds of the contents, a suitable control parameter P can be determined without analyzing data on an image which is displayed on the display device every frame.
Note that as a method for determining kinds of the contents, information from an electronic program guide (an EPG) may be used as well as analyzing data on the image which is displayed on the display device.
Next, as a method of determining the control parameter P other than the method of numerically analyzing image data which is displayed on a display device, a method of determining the control parameter P by age of the user can be given.
When the control parameter P is determined by age of the user of the display device, the control parameter P can be determined by setting a tendency of kinds of contents displayed very often depending on age in advance.
In addition, when the control parameter P is determined by age of the user of the display device, luminance of a backlight can be set suitably by age of the user of the display device in order to reduce burden on eyes of the user. At this time, luminance of the backlight may be controlled by controlling the lighting ratio R. Thus, burden on eyes can be reduced and motion blur can be reduced.
Further, all the methods for determining the control parameter P, which are described in this embodiment mode, may be means which can be set by the user of the display device.
Although this embodiment mode is described with reference to various drawings, the contents (or may be part of the contents) described in each drawing can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with the contents (or may be part of the contents) described in another drawing. Further, even more drawings can be formed by combining each part with another part in the above-described drawings.
The contents (or may be part of the contents) described in each drawing of this embodiment mode can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with the contents (or may be part of the contents) described in a drawing in another embodiment mode. Further, even more drawings can be formed by combining each part with part of another embodiment mode in the drawings of this embodiment mode.
This embodiment mode shows an example of an embodied case of the contents (or may be part of the contents) described in other embodiment modes, an example of slight transformation thereof, an example of partial modification thereof, an example of improvement thereof, an example of detailed description thereof, an application example thereof, an example of related part thereof, or the like. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiment modes can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment mode.
Embodiment Mode 4In this embodiment mode, a method for increasing response speed of a display element when a display element in which response to a signal input (response speed) is low, such as a liquid crystal element and an electrophoretic element, is used as a display element provided in a display device is described. In particular, a method effective for the case where a lighting ratio R is changed is described.
There are various kinds of methods for a display element using a liquid crystal element. A method which is most widely used is a method in which a liquid crystal element is controlled by analog voltage, such as a TN mode, a VA mode, and an IPS mode. In these methods, response time (also referred to as response speed) of a liquid crystal element is several to several tens of ms. One frame period in the NTSC system is 16.7 ms, and response time of a liquid crystal element in these modes is often longer than one frame period. Since one of causes of motion blur is that response time of a display element is longer than one frame period, the response time of the display element is preferably at least shorter than one frame period. Accordingly, for a display element using a liquid crystal element, a method is used in which voltage VOD (voltage providing desired transmittance at or around the time when predetermined time has passed) which is different from original voltage VS (voltage providing desired transmittance after enough time passes) is applied to the liquid crystal element in order to reduce response time of the liquid crystal element. This method is referred to as overdrive in this document. Note that the voltage VOD is referred to as overdrive voltage.
Here, in at least one of driving methods of a display device according to this document, a blanking interval is provided in one frame period. Accordingly, response time of a display element is preferably shorter than an image display period τa and a blanking interval τb. Note that when a liquid crystal element or the like is used as the display element, response time is not always shorter than the image display period τa and the blanking interval τb. In this embodiment mode, a method is described in which response time of a liquid crystal element or the like in accordance with the length of the image display period τa and the blanking interval τb is obtained by using overdrive.
In this document, there are several methods of providing the blanking interval τb (methods of controlling the lighting ratio R) as described above, that is, (1) the method where blanking data is directly written to each pixel, (2) the method where the whole backlight blinks, and (3) the method where a backlight divided into areas sequentially blinks. First, in (1) the method where blanking data is directly written to each pixel, a method where response time of a liquid crystal element or the like in accordance with the length of the image display period τa and the blanking interval τb is obtained is described with reference to
The length of the blanking interval τb can be changed as appropriate in order to directly write blanking data to each pixel, as shown in Embodiment Modes 1 and 2. Further, when the length of the blanking interval τb is changed in accordance with the control parameters P and Q described in Embodiment Mode 3, driving in accordance with a state of an image and an environment can be realized. For example, in the case such that movement of an object displayed in an image is large or where luminance difference between a background and an object displayed in an image is large, motion blur is likely to be seen. Motion blur can be reduced by increasing the length of the blanking interval τb. In addition, in the case such that movement of an object displayed in an image is small or where luminance difference between a background and an object displayed in an image is small, motion blur is not likely to be seen. A flicker can be reduced by reducing the length of the blanking interval τb.
In each graph shown in
A value of the voltage applied to the liquid crystal element is described. Voltage VS1 and voltage VS2 are original voltages which should be applied in the first frame period and the second frame period, respectively. Note that the voltages VS1 and VS2 have the same value in all graphs in
Overdrive intensity refers to difference (an absolute value) between overdrive voltage and original voltage. First overdrive intensity refers to overdrive intensity in the first frame period. Second overdrive intensity refers to overdrive intensity in the second frame period.
First, with reference to
In the image display period in the first frame period, the overdrive voltage VOD2001 is applied at or around the end of the image display period in the first frame period so that transmittance of the liquid crystal element becomes transmittance Ta2001 corresponding to the original voltage VS1. Thus, the transmittance of the liquid crystal element becomes the transmittance Ta2001 at or around the end of the image display period in the first frame period. At this time, the first overdrive intensity is V2001, and V2001=VOD2001−VS1 is satisfied.
In the blanking interval in the first frame period, it is preferable that the transmittance of the liquid crystal element become transmittance for providing luminance in the blanking interval, at or around the end of the blanking interval in the first frame period at the latest. However, because of characteristics of the liquid crystal element, it is difficult to apply overdrive voltage in a shorter time, which is for reaching transmittance corresponding to voltage applied to the liquid crystal element of approximately 0 V. Thus, at or around the end of the blanking interval in the first frame period, the transmittance of the liquid crystal element is not necessary to be transmittance for providing the luminance in the blanking interval. Instead, it is preferable that transmittance Tb2001 at the end of the blanking interval in the first frame period can be estimated from the transmittance Ta2001 at the end of the image display period in the first frame period and the length of the blanking interval τb, which can be estimated from a plurality of experiments performed in advance. When the data is stored in a memory such as a lookup table, the data can be utilized for adjusting a value of voltage applied to the liquid crystal element.
In the image display period in the second frame period, the overdrive voltage VOD2002 is applied at or around the end of the image display period in the second frame period so that the transmittance of the liquid crystal element becomes transmittance Ta2002 corresponding to the original voltage VS2. Thus, the transmittance of the liquid crystal element becomes the transmittance Ta2002 at or around the end of the image display period in the second frame period. At this time, the second overdrive intensity is V2002, and V2002=VOD2002−VS2 is satisfied.
The image display period in the first frame period is different from the image display period in the second frame period in the following ways: the transmittance of the liquid crystal element is the transmittance for providing the luminance in the blanking interval at or around the start of the image display period in the first frame period, whereas the transmittance of the liquid crystal element is not always the transmittance for providing the luminance in the blanking interval at or around the start of the image display period in the second frame period. In that case, the transmittance Ta2002 depends on not only the voltage VOD2002 applied in the image display period in the second frame period but also the transmittance Tb2001 at the end of the blanking interval in the first frame period, so that appropriate transmittance cannot be obtained.
In this case, it is extremely useful in the first frame period that the transmittance Tb2001 at the end of the blanking interval in the first frame period can be estimated from the transmittance Ta2001 at the end of the image display period in the first frame period and the length of the blanking interval τb. This is because even when the transmittance of the liquid crystal element is not the transmittance for providing the luminance in the blanking interval at or around the start of the image display period in the second frame period, the transmittance Tb2001 at that time is estimated; thus, the voltage VOD2002 applied in the image display period in the second frame period can be adjusted in accordance with the level of the transmittance Tb2001.
In the blanking interval in the second frame period, similar to the blanking interval in the first frame period, it is preferable that transmittance Tb2002 at the end of the blanking interval in the second frame period can be estimated from the transmittance Ta2002 at the end of the image display period in the second frame period and the length of the blanking interval τb. Accordingly, desired transmittance can be accurately obtained also at the end of an image display period in a frame period next to the second frame period.
The length of the blanking interval τb can be changed as appropriate in accordance with the control parameters P and Q described in Embodiment Mode 3. With reference to
In the image display period in the first frame period, the overdrive voltage VOD2011 is applied at or around the end of the image display period in the first frame period so that the transmittance of the liquid crystal element becomes transmittance Ta2011 corresponding to the original voltage VS1. Thus, the transmittance of the liquid crystal element becomes the transmittance Ta2011 at or around the end of the image display period in the first frame period. At this time, the first overdrive intensity is V2011, and V2011=VOD2011−VS1 is satisfied.
In the driving method of a display device according to this document, it is extremely useful that the first overdrive intensity V2001 in the case where τa=τb=F/2 is satisfied shown in
In the blanking interval in the first frame period, it is preferable that the transmittance of the liquid crystal element become transmittance for providing luminance in the blanking interval, at the end of the blanking interval in the first frame period at the latest or at the time close thereto. However, because of characteristics of the liquid crystal element, it is difficult to apply overdrive voltage in a shorter time, which is for reaching transmittance corresponding to voltage applied to the liquid crystal element of approximately 0 V. Thus, at or around the end of the blanking interval in the first frame period, the transmittance of the liquid crystal element is not necessary to be transmittance for providing the luminance in the blanking interval. Instead, it is preferable that transmittance Tb2011 at the end of the blanking interval in the first frame period can be estimated from the transmittance Ta2011 at the end of the image display period in the first frame period and the length of the blanking interval τb, which can be estimated from a plurality of experiments performed in advance. When the data is stored in a memory such as a lookup table, the data can be utilized for adjusting a value of voltage applied to the liquid crystal element.
Note that as shown in
In the image display period in the second frame period, the overdrive voltage VOD2012 is applied at or around the end of the image display period in the second frame period so that the transmittance of the liquid crystal element becomes transmittance Ta2012 corresponding to the original voltage VS2. Thus, the transmittance of the liquid crystal element becomes the transmittance Ta2012 at or around the end of the image display period in the second frame period. At this time, the second overdrive intensity is V2012, and V2012=VOD2012−VS2 is satisfied.
The image display period in the first frame period is different from the image display period in the second frame period in the following ways: the transmittance of the liquid crystal element is the transmittance for providing the luminance in the blanking interval at or around the start of the image display period in the first frame period, whereas the transmittance of the liquid crystal element is not always the transmittance for providing the luminance in the blanking interval at or around the start of the image display period in the second frame period. In that case, the transmittance Ta2012 depends on not only the voltage VOD2012 applied in the image display period in the second frame period but also the transmittance Tb2011 at the end of the blanking interval in the first frame period, so that appropriate transmittance cannot be obtained.
In this case, it is extremely useful in the first frame period that the transmittance Tb2011 at the end of the blanking interval in the first frame period can be estimated from the transmittance Ta2011 at the end of the image display period in the first frame period and the length of the blanking interval τb. This is because even when the transmittance of the liquid crystal element is not the transmittance for providing the luminance in the blanking interval at or around the start of the image display period in the second frame period, the transmittance Tb2011 at that time is estimated; thus, the voltage VOD2012 applied in the image display period in the second frame period can be adjusted in accordance with the level of the transmittance Tb2011.
In the driving method of a display device according to this document, it is extremely useful that the second overdrive intensity V2002 in the case where τa=τb=F/2 is satisfied shown in
In addition, the second overdrive intensity V2012 is preferably further reduced in the case where τa>τb is satisfied because the transmittance Tb2011 at the start of the second frame period is larger than the transmittance Tb2001 at the start of the second frame period in the case where τa=τb is satisfied. That is, the second overdrive intensity V2012 in the case where τa>τb is satisfied is preferably smaller than the second overdrive intensity V2002 in the case where τa=τb is satisfied not only because of increase in the image display period τa but also because of increase in the transmittance Tb2011 at the start of the second frame period.
In the blanking interval in the second frame period, similar to the blanking interval in the first frame period, it is preferable that transmittance Tb2012 at the end of the blanking interval in the second frame period can be estimated from the transmittance Ta2012 at the end of the image display period in the second frame period and the length of the blanking interval τb. Accordingly, desired transmittance can be accurately obtained also at the end of an image display period in a frame period next to the second frame period.
Next, with reference to
In the image display period in the first frame period, the overdrive voltage VOD2021 is applied at or around the end of the image display period in the first frame period so that the transmittance of the liquid crystal element becomes transmittance Ta2021 corresponding to the original voltage VS1. Thus, the transmittance of the liquid crystal element becomes the transmittance Ta2021 at or around the end of the image display period in the first frame period. At this time, the first overdrive intensity is V2021, and V2021=VOD2021−VS1 is satisfied.
In the driving method of a display device according to this document, it is extremely useful that the first overdrive intensity V2001 in the case where τa=τb=F/2 is satisfied shown in
In the blanking interval in the first frame period, it is preferable that the transmittance of the liquid crystal element become transmittance for providing luminance in the blanking interval, at the end of the blanking interval in the first frame period at the latest or at the time close thereto. However, because of characteristics of the liquid crystal element, it is difficult to apply overdrive voltage in a shorter time, which is for reaching transmittance corresponding to voltage applied to the liquid crystal element of approximately 0 V. Thus, at or around the end of the blanking interval in the first frame period, the transmittance of the liquid crystal element is not necessary to be transmittance for providing the luminance in the blanking interval. Instead, it is preferable that transmittance Tb2021 at the end of the blanking interval in the first frame period can be estimated from the transmittance Ta2021 at the end of the image display period in the first frame period and the length of the blanking interval τb.
Note that as shown in
In the image display period in the second frame period, the overdrive voltage VOD2022 is applied at or around the end of the image display period in the second frame period so that the transmittance of the liquid crystal element becomes transmittance Ta2022 corresponding to the original voltage VS2. Thus, the transmittance of the liquid crystal element becomes the transmittance Ta2022 at or around the end of the image display period in the second frame period. At this time, the second overdrive intensity is V2022, and V2022=VOD2022−VS2 is satisfied.
The image display period in the first frame period is different from the image display period in the second frame period in the following ways: the transmittance of the liquid crystal element is the transmittance for providing the luminance in the blanking interval at or around the start of the image display period in the first frame period, whereas the transmittance of the liquid crystal element is not always the transmittance for providing the luminance in the blanking interval at or around the start of the image display period in the second frame period. In that case, the transmittance Ta2022 depends on not only the voltage VOD2022 applied in the image display period in the second frame period but also the transmittance Tb2021 at the end of the blanking interval in the first frame period, so that appropriate transmittance cannot be obtained.
In this case, in the first frame period, the transmittance Tb2021 at the end of the blanking interval in the first frame period may be estimated from the transmittance Ta2021 at the end of the image display period in the first frame period and the length of the blanking interval τb. This is because even when the transmittance of the liquid crystal element is not the transmittance for providing the luminance in the blanking interval at or around the start of the image display period in the second frame period, the transmittance Tb2021 at that time is estimated; thus, the voltage VOD2022 applied in the image display period in the second frame period can be adjusted in accordance with the level of the transmittance Tb2021.
In the driving method of a display device according to this document, it is extremely useful that the second overdrive intensity V2002 in the case where τa=τb=F/2 is satisfied shown in
In addition, the second overdrive intensity V2022 is preferably further increased in the case where τa<τb is satisfied because the transmittance Tb2021 at the start of the second frame period is smaller than the transmittance Tb2001 at the start of the second frame period in the case where τa=τb is satisfied. That is, the second overdrive intensity V2022 in the case where τa<τb is satisfied is preferably larger than the second overdrive intensity V2002 in the case where τa=τb is satisfied not only because of reduction in the image display period τa but also because of reduction in the transmittance Tb202l at the start of the second frame period.
In the blanking interval in the second frame period, similar to the blanking interval in the first frame period, it is preferable that transmittance Tb2022 at the end of the blanking interval in the second frame period can be estimated from the transmittance Ta2022 at the end of the image display period in the second frame period and the length of the blanking interval τb. Accordingly, desired transmittance can be accurately obtained also at the end of an image display period in a frame period next to the second frame period.
Note that in the case where τa<τb is satisfied, difference between the transmittance Tb2022 at the end of the blanking interval in the second frame period and transmittance providing the luminance in the blanking interval is smaller. Accordingly, the transmittance Tb2022 at the end of the blanking interval in the second frame period may be estimated or the estimate may be omitted.
In the method where blanking data is directly written to each pixel, backlight luminance may be changed. For example, when the level of a data signal written to a pixel is the same, luminance which human eyes perceive becomes lower as the image display period τa becomes shorter and the blanking interval τb becomes longer. Accordingly, in accordance with the length of the image display period τa and the length of the blanking interval τb (i.e., the lighting ratio R), the backlight luminance is reduced when the lighting ratio R is high, whereas the backlight luminance is increased when the lighting ratio R is low. Thus, luminance which human eyes perceive can be constant. Further, the lighting ratio R preferably depends on the control parameters P and Q described in Embodiment Mode 3. This is because the lighting ratio R can be controlled as appropriate by perceivability of motion blur in an image to be displayed.
Next, in (2) the method where the whole backlight blinks among the methods of controlling the lighting ratio R, a method where response time of a liquid crystal element is increased is described.
In (2) the method where the whole backlight blinks, a period when data written to a pixel is updated is referred to as one frame period. At this time, in the case where overdrive is used to increase response speed of a liquid crystal element, the overdrive voltage VOD is applied to the liquid crystal element so that the liquid crystal element has desired transmittance at or around the time when one frame period passes after voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element.
However, in (2) the method where the whole backlight blinks, timing when voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element in a backlight lighting period varies depending on a scan position. Accordingly, even when the same overdrive voltage VOD is applied to the liquid crystal element, luminance varies depending on a position of a scan line to which the liquid crystal element is connected. Accordingly, in (2) the method where the whole backlight blinks, it is effective to determine the overdrive, voltage VOD in consideration of this point. Further, luminance can be corrected by correcting a gray scale to be displayed depending on a position of a scan line, other than by a method of controlling the overdrive voltage VOD.
This is described with reference to
In the method shown in
In the first frame period, the transmittance in the graph of
In the second frame period, the transmittance in the graph of
Desired luminance for display is the same in the first frame period and the second frame period. However, the area of the oblique line portion L2101 and the area of the oblique line portion L2102 are different from each other, so that luminance which human eyes perceive is different in the first frame period and the second frame period.
In (2) the method where the whole backlight blinks, the original voltage VS2101 in the first frame period may be changed to correct luminance difference between frames. That is, luminance difference between frames can be corrected by correcting gray scale data itself to be written to each pixel. Luminance difference between frames which may cause color shading in displaying a moving image and motion blur can be reduced by the method according to this document.
As a method for correcting data, a method shown in
Description is made with reference to the graph of
As a method for correcting overdrive voltage, a method shown in
Next, change in voltage applied to a liquid crystal element and transmittance in a pixel connected to the scan line near the center (a position described as (C) in
In the first frame period, the transmittance in the graph of
Here, since timing when writing starts is different depending on a position of the scan line, it should be noted that the area of the oblique line portion L2111 in the first frame period is different from the area of an oblique line portion in the first frame period in another scan line. This is why luminance varies depending on a position of a scan line to which the liquid crystal element is connected even when the same overdrive voltage VOD is applied to the liquid crystal element.
Variation in luminance depending on a scan position is perceived as luminance unevenness in a display portion as it is, so that it is a significant image defect and should be improved with priority. Accordingly, in (2) the method where the whole backlight blinks, the original voltage VS2111 in the first frame period may be changed in order to correct luminance difference depending on a scan position. That is, luminance difference depending on a scan position can be corrected by correcting gray scale data itself to be written to each pixel.
As a method for correcting data, a method shown in
Description is made with reference to the graph of
As a method for correcting overdrive voltage, a method shown in
Description is made with reference to the graph of
Desired luminance for display is the same in the first frame period and the second frame period. However, the area of the oblique line portion L2111 and the area of the oblique line portion L2112 are different from each other, so that luminance which human eyes perceive is different in the first frame period and the second frame period.
In (2) the method where the whole backlight blinks, the original voltage VS2111 in the first frame period may be changed to correct luminance difference between frames. That is, luminance difference between frames can be corrected by correcting gray scale data itself to be written to each pixel. Luminance difference between frames which may cause color shading in displaying a moving image and motion blur can be reduced by the method according to this document. As a method for correcting data, the method shown in
In addition, in (2) the method where the whole backlight blinks, the overdrive voltage VOD2111 in the first frame period may be changed in order to correct luminance difference between frames. In general, overdrive voltage is only for making transmittance when next writing starts in a pixel closer to desired transmittance. In the method according to this document, overdrive voltage can also be used for correcting luminance difference between frames. Luminance difference between frames which may cause color shading in displaying a moving image and motion blur can be reduced by the method according to this document. As a method for correcting overdrive voltage, the method shown in
Next, change in voltage applied to a liquid crystal element and transmittance in a pixel connected to the scan line at the bottom (a position described as (D) in
In the first frame period, the transmittance in the graph of
Here, since timing when writing starts is different depending on a position of the scan line, it should be noted that the area of the oblique line portion L2111 in the first frame period is different from the area of an oblique line portion in another scan line. This is why luminance varies depending on a position of a scan line to which the liquid crystal element is connected even when the same overdrive voltage VOD is applied to the liquid crystal element.
Variation in luminance depending on a scan position is perceived as luminance unevenness in a display portion as it is, so that it is a significant image defect and should be improved with priority. Therefore, in (2) the method where the whole backlight blinks, the original voltage VS2121 in the first frame period may be changed in order to correct luminance difference depending on a scan position. That is, luminance difference depending on a scan position can be corrected by correcting gray scale data itself to be written to each pixel. As a method for correcting data, the method shown in
In addition, in (2) the method where the whole backlight blinks, the overdrive voltage VOD2121 in the first frame period may be changed in order to correct luminance difference depending on a scan position. In general, overdrive voltage is only for making transmittance when next writing starts in a pixel closer to desired transmittance. In the method according to this document, overdrive voltage can also be used for correcting luminance difference depending on a scan position. Accordingly, luminance difference depending on a scan position can be corrected by correcting overdrive voltage for a gray scale to be written to each pixel. As a method for correcting overdrive voltage, the method shown in
Luminance difference depending on a scan position increases as positions of scan lines are distant from each other. Accordingly, both in a method of changing original voltage VS and in a method of changing overdrive voltage VOD, it is effective to increase the amount of change in voltage as the positions of scan lines are distant from each other.
In the second frame period, the transmittance in the graph of
Desired luminance for display is the same in the first frame period and the second frame period. However, the area of the oblique line portion L2121 and the area of the oblique line portion L2122 are different from each other, so that luminance which human eyes perceive is different in the first frame period and the second frame period.
In (2) the method where the whole backlight blinks, the original voltage VS2121 in the first frame period may be changed to correct luminance difference between frames. That is, luminance difference between frames can be corrected by correcting gray scale data itself to be written to each pixel. Luminance difference between frames which may cause color shading in displaying a moving image and motion blur can be reduced by the method according to this document. As a method for correcting data, the method shown in
In addition, in (2) the method where the whole backlight blinks, the overdrive voltage VOD2121 in the first frame period may be changed in order to correct luminance difference between frames. In general, overdrive voltage is only for making transmittance when next writing starts in a pixel closer to desired transmittance. In the method according to this document, overdrive voltage can also be used for correcting luminance difference between frames. Luminance difference between frames which may cause color shading in displaying a moving image and motion blur can be reduced by the method according to this document. As a method for correcting overdrive voltage, the method shown in
Luminance difference depending on a scan position increases as positions of scan lines are distant from each other. Accordingly, both in a method of changing the original voltage VS and in a method of changing the overdrive voltage VOD, it is effective to increase the amount of change in voltage as the positions of scan lines are distant from each other.
Note that the method of changing the original voltage VS can be realized by the flow of data processing shown in
Note that the method of changing the overdrive voltage VOD can be realized by the flow of data processing shown in
Next, in (3) the method where a backlight divided into areas sequentially blinks among the methods of controlling the lighting ratio R, a method where response time of a liquid crystal element or the like is increased is described. Note that areas of a backlight in this embodiment mode may be one-dimensionally or two-dimensionally divided. When a backlight is one-dimensionally divided, a linear light source such as a cold cathode fluorescent lamp (CCFL) or a hot cathode fluorescent lamp (HSFL) can be used, and the backlight can be arranged in parallel or perpendicular to a scan line. When a backlight is two-dimensionally divided, a point light source such as an LED or a sheet light source such as EL can be used, and the light source can be arranged in matrix, honeycomb arrangement, Bayer arrangement, or the like. Further, a structure may be employed in which light sources for respective colors such as RGB are provided and the backlight can be controlled for each color.
In the (3) the method where a backlight divided into areas sequentially blinks, a period when data written to a pixel is updated is referred to as one frame period. At this time, in the case where overdrive is used to increase response speed of a liquid. crystal element, the overdrive voltage VOD is applied to the liquid crystal element so that the liquid crystal element has desired transmittance at or around the time when one frame period passes after voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element.
However, in (3) the method where a backlight divided into areas sequentially blinks, timing when voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element in a backlight lighting period in the areas varies depending on a scan position. Accordingly, even when the same overdrive voltage VOD is applied to the liquid crystal element, luminance varies depending on a position of a scan line to which the liquid crystal element is connected. Accordingly, in (3) the method where a backlight divided into areas sequentially blinks, it is effective to determine the overdrive voltage VOD in consideration of this point. Further, luminance can be corrected by correcting a gray scale to be displayed depending on a position of a scan line, other than by the method of controlling the overdrive voltage VOD.
Large difference between (3) the method where a backlight divided into areas sequentially blinks and (2) the method where the whole backlight blinks is whether there are a plurality of areas with different luminance in a display portion. That is, in (3) the method where a backlight divided into areas sequentially blinks, pixels with different luminance are adjacent to each other at a boundary between a certain area and an area adjacent thereto. Thus, luminance difference in the display portion is extremely easily perceived. That is, luminance difference depending on a scan position in (3) the method where a backlight divided into areas sequentially blinks causes more serious image quality degradation than luminance difference depending on a scan position in (2) the method where the whole backlight blinks. Accordingly, the method according to this document in (3) the method where a backlight divided into areas sequentially blinks is very effective in improving image quality.
This is described with reference to
In a method shown in
In the first frame period, the transmittance in the graph of
In the second frame period, the transmittance in the graph of
Desired luminance for display is the same in the first frame period and the second frame period. However, the area of the oblique line portion L2201 and the area of the oblique line portion L2202 are different from each other, so that luminance which human eyes perceive is different in the first frame period and the second frame period.
In (3) the method where a backlight divided into areas sequentially blinks, the original voltage VS2201 in the first frame period may be changed to correct luminance difference between frames. That is, luminance difference between frames can be corrected by correcting gray scale data itself to be written to each pixel. Luminance difference between frames which may cause color shading in displaying a moving image and motion blur can be reduced by the method according to this document. As a method for correcting data, the method shown in
In addition, in (3) the method where a backlight divided into areas sequentially blinks, the overdrive voltage VOD2201 in the first frame period may be changed in order to correct luminance difference between frames. In general, overdrive voltage is only for making transmittance when next writing starts in a pixel closer to desired transmittance. In the method according to this document, overdrive voltage can also be used for correcting luminance difference between frames. Luminance difference between frames which may cause color shading in displaying a moving image and motion blur can be reduced by the method according to this document. As a method for correcting overdrive voltage, the method shown in
Next, change in voltage applied to a liquid crystal element and transmittance in a pixel connected to the scan line at the bottom (a position described as (C) in
In the first frame period, the transmittance in the graph of
Here, since timing when writing starts is different depending on a position of the scan line, it should be noted that the area of the oblique line portion L2211 in the first frame period is different from the area of an oblique line portion in another scan line belonging to the same area. This is why luminance varies depending on a position of a scan line to which the liquid crystal element is connected even when the same overdrive voltage VOD is applied to the liquid crystal element.
Variation in luminance depending on a scan position is perceived as luminance unevenness in a display portion as it is, so that it is a significant image defect and should be improved with priority. Accordingly, in (3) the method where a backlight divided into areas sequentially blinks, the original voltage VS2211 in the first frame period may be changed in order to correct luminance difference depending on a scan position. That is, luminance difference depending on a scan position can be corrected by correcting gray scale data itself to be written to each pixel. As a method for correcting data, the method shown in
In addition, in (3) the method where a backlight divided into areas sequentially blinks, the overdrive voltage VOD2211 in the first frame period may be changed in order to correct luminance difference depending on a scan position. In general, overdrive voltage is only for making transmittance when next writing starts in a pixel closer to desired transmittance. In the method according to this document, overdrive voltage can also be used for correcting luminance difference depending on a scan position. Accordingly, luminance difference depending on a scan position can be corrected by correcting gray scale data itself to be written to each pixel. As a method for correcting overdrive voltage, the method shown in
In the second frame period, the transmittance in the graph of
Desired luminance for display is the same in the first frame period and the second frame period. However, the area of the oblique line portion L2211 and the area of the oblique line portion L2212 are different from each other, so that luminance which human eyes perceive is different in the first frame period and the second frame period.
In (3) the method where a backlight divided into areas sequentially blinks, the original voltage VS2211 in the first frame period may be changed to correct luminance difference between frames. That is, luminance difference between frames can be corrected by correcting gray scale data itself to be written to each pixel. Luminance difference between frames which may cause color shading in displaying a moving image and motion blur can be reduced by the method according to this document. As a method for correcting data, the method shown in
In addition, in (3) the method where a backlight divided into areas sequentially blinks, the overdrive voltage VOD2211 in the first frame period may be changed in order to correct luminance difference between frames. In general, overdrive voltage is only for making transmittance when next writing starts in a pixel closer to desired transmittance. In the method according to this document, overdrive voltage can also be used for correcting luminance difference between frames. Luminance difference between frames which may cause color shading in displaying a moving image and motion blur can be reduced by the method according to this document. As a method for correcting overdrive voltage, the method shown in
Next, change in voltage applied to a liquid crystal element and transmittance in a pixel connected to the scan line in the first row (a position described as (D) in
In the first frame period, the transmittance in the graph of
In the second frame period, the transmittance in the graph of
Desired luminance for display is the same in the first frame period and the second frame period. However, the area of the oblique line portion L2221 and the area of the oblique line portion L2222 are different from each other, so that luminance which human eyes perceive is different in the first frame period and the second frame period.
In (3) the method where a backlight divided into areas sequentially blinks, the original voltage VS2221 in the first frame period may be changed to correct luminance difference between frames. That is, luminance difference between frames can be corrected by correcting gray scale data itself to be written to each pixel. Luminance difference between frames which may cause color shading in displaying a moving image and motion blur can be reduced by the method according to this document. As a method for correcting data, the method shown in
In addition, in (3) the method where a backlight divided into areas sequentially blinks, the overdrive voltage VOD2221 in the first frame period may be changed in order to correct luminance difference between frames. In general, overdrive voltage is only for making transmittance when next writing starts in a pixel closer to desired transmittance. In the method according to this document, overdrive voltage can also be used for correcting luminance difference between frames. Luminance difference between frames which may cause color shading in displaying a moving image and motion blur can be reduced by the method according to this document. As a method for correcting overdrive voltage, the method shown in
As described above, in the pixel shown in
That is, it can be said that luminance which human eyes perceive is determined by the time from when voltage is written to when a backlight lighting period starts. The luminance which human eyes perceive is increased as time from when voltage is written to when a backlight lighting period starts is longer, whereas the luminance which human eyes perceive is decreased as the time from when voltage is written to when a backlight lighting period starts is shorter.
Here, in the example of
On the other hand, in the example of
Accordingly, when the lighting ratio R is the same in (2) the method where the whole backlight blinks and (3) the method where a backlight divided into areas sequentially blinks, (3) the method where a backlight divided into areas sequentially blinks has a smaller maximum value of luminance difference depending on a scan position.
However, as a factor in deciding image quality of a display device, not only the maximum value of luminance difference depending on a scan position but also a distribution of luminance difference is important. In the example of
On the other hand, in the example of
By the method according to this document, a problem of reduction in image quality in (3) the method where a backlight divided into areas sequentially blinks can be reduced. The original voltage VS may be changed in order to correct luminance difference depending on a scan position. That is, luminance difference depending on a scan position can be corrected by correcting gray scale data itself to be written to each pixel. In particular, the amount of correction of original voltage in a pixel to which data is written at the end of each area is made to be the largest in the area to which the pixel belongs, so that sharp luminance difference at a boundary of areas can be corrected.
In addition, the overdrive voltage VOD may be changed in order to correct luminance difference depending on a scan position. In general, overdrive voltage is only for making transmittance when next writing starts in a pixel closer to desired transmittance. In the method according to this document, overdrive voltage can also be used for correcting luminance difference depending on a scan position. Accordingly, luminance difference depending on a scan position can be corrected by correcting gray scale data itself to be written to each pixel. In particular, the amount of correction of overdrive voltage in a pixel to which data is written at the end of each area is made to be the largest in the area to which the pixel belongs, so that sharp luminance difference at a boundary of areas can be corrected.
Next, in a method of changing the lighting ratio R which is one of methods of controlling a display device according to this document, a method of controlling a display device in frame periods before and after the lighting ratio R is changed is described in detail. Here, as described in Embodiment Modes 1 and 2, changing the lighting ratio R refers to changing the length of the blanking interval τb as appropriate. Further, driving in accordance with a state of an image and an environment can be realized by changing the length of the blanking interval τb in accordance with the control parameters P and Q described in Embodiment Mode 3. For example, in the case such that movement of an object displayed in an image is large or where luminance difference between a background and an object displayed in an image is large, motion blur is likely to be seen. Motion blur can be reduced by increasing the length of the blanking interval τb. In addition, in the case such that movement of an object displayed in an image is small or where luminance difference between a background and an object displayed in an image is small, motion blur is not likely to be seen. Accordingly, a flicker can be reduced by reducing the length of the blanking interval τb. Note that here described is a purpose of preventing luminance which human eyes perceive from being changed in frame periods before and after the lighting ratio R is changed, even when the lighting ratio R is changed.
Methods for preventing luminance which human eyes perceive from being changed in frame periods before and after the lighting ratio R is changed are broadly classified into two methods: a method where voltage written to a pixel is controlled under a condition that backlight luminance is constant when a backlight is lit; and a method where backlight luminance is changed.
In each method, a controlling method of a display device is different depending on a method for providing the blanking interval τb (a method of controlling the lighting ratio R). Accordingly, in this document, the case where a method of controlling the lighting ratio R is different in each method is also individually described in detail.
Note that as the method for providing the blanking interval τb (the method of controlling the lighting ratio R), (1) a method where blanking data is directly written to each pixel, (2) a method where the whole backlight blinks, (3) a method where a backlight divided into areas sequentially blinks, and a combination of these methods can be used.
First, the case of using (1) the method where blanking data is directly written to each pixel among the methods where voltage written to a pixel is controlled under a condition that backlight luminance is constant when a backlight is lit is described with reference to
In the case of using (1) the method where blanking data is directly written to each pixel among the methods where voltage written to a pixel is controlled under a condition that backlight luminance when the backlight is lit is constant before and after the lighting ratio R is changed, driving can be realized by changing timing of writing blanking data in the first frame period and the second frame period, as shown in
When the overdrive voltage VOD2401 is applied to each pixel at or around the start of the image display period in the first frame period, transmittance of a display element becomes transmittance corresponding to the original voltage VS2401 at the time when the image display period in the first frame period ends or at the time close thereto. Thereafter, blanking writing is performed. Thus, integrated luminance in the first frame period is represented by the area of the oblique line region L2401.
Then, when the overdrive voltage VOD2402 is applied to each pixel at or around the start of the image display period in the second frame period, the transmittance of the display element becomes transmittance corresponding to the original voltage VS2402 at the time when the image display period in the second frame period ends or at the time close thereto. Thereafter, blanking writing is performed. Thus, integrated luminance in the second frame period is represented by the area of the oblique line region L2402.
At this time, it is important that values of the voltages applied to a pixel vary in the first frame period and the second frame period. That is, in the case where the lighting ratio R is changed under a condition that backlight luminance is constant when a backlight is lit, it is preferable to write different voltage in the first frame period and the second frame period, not the same voltage, if luminance of the pixel which human eyes perceive is not desired to be changed.
Accordingly, in one of methods according to this document, the original voltage and the overdrive voltage are changed in accordance with the lighting ratio R in order that the area of the oblique line region L2401 in the first frame period and the area of the oblique line region L2402 in the second frame period are approximately the same. Specifically, it is preferable to reduce the original voltage and the overdrive voltage as the lighting ratio R increases. In addition, in one of the methods according to this document, the overdrive intensity V2401 in the first frame period and the overdrive intensity V2402 in the second frame period may be changed in accordance with the lighting ratio R. Specifically, it is preferable to reduce the overdrive intensity as the lighting ratio R increases. This is because increase in the lighting ratio R means increase in length of the image display period τa, and increase in length of the image display period τa can be allowed to have a longer period of time for reaching intended transmittance of a liquid crystal element. Moreover, when the length of the image display period τa is increased, intended transmittance of a liquid crystal element itself can be reduced, so that the original voltage VS is reduced, and further, the overdrive intensity can be reduced.
By driving a display device in such a manner, backlight luminance can be constant even in the case where luminance of the pixel which human eyes perceive is not desired to be changed when the lighting ratio R is changed. Thus, a structure of a circuit for driving a backlight is simplified, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, luminance unevenness and a flicker in displaying an image can be reduced. Moreover, provision of the blanking interval τb can reduce motion blur, and image quality of a moving image can be improved.
Next, the case of using (2) the method where the whole backlight blinks among the methods where voltage written to a pixel is controlled under a condition that backlight luminance is constant when the backlight is lit is described with reference to
In the case of using (2) the method where the whole backlight blinks among the methods where voltage written to a pixel is controlled under a condition that backlight luminance is constant when the backlight is lit before and after the lighting ratio R is changed, driving can be realized by changing the length and timing of the backlight lighting period in the first frame period and the second frame period, as shown in
When the overdrive voltage VOD2501 is written to a pixel by data writing scanning in the first frame period, transmittance of a display element becomes transmittance corresponding to the original voltage VS2501 at the time when the next data is written by data writing scanning in the second frame period or at the time close thereto. In that period, a backlight lighting period is provided in all pixels all at once. Thus, integrated luminance in the first frame period is represented by the area of the oblique line region L2501, which is surrounded by the backlight lighting period and the transmittance.
Then, when the overdrive voltage VOD2502 is written to the pixel by data writing scanning in the second frame period, the transmittance of the display element becomes transmittance corresponding to the original voltage VS2502 at the time when the next data is written by data writing scanning in the next frame period or at the time close thereto. In that period, a backlight lighting period is provided in all the pixels all at once. Thus, integrated luminance in the second frame period is represented by the area of the oblique line region L2502, which is surrounded by the backlight lighting period and the transmittance.
At this time, it is important that values of the voltages applied to a pixel vary in the first frame period and the second frame period. That is, in the case where the lighting ratio R is changed under a condition that backlight luminance is constant when a backlight is lit, it is preferable to write different voltage in the first frame period and the second frame period, not the same voltage, if luminance of the pixel which human eyes perceive is not desired to be changed.
Accordingly, in one of methods according to this document, the original voltage and the overdrive voltage are changed in accordance with the lighting ratio R in order that the area of the oblique line region L2501 in the first frame period and the area of the oblique line region L2502 in the second frame period are approximately the same. Specifically, it is preferable to reduce the original voltage and the overdrive voltage as the lighting ratio R increases. In addition, in one of the methods according to this document, the overdrive intensity V2501 in the first frame period and the overdrive intensity V2502 in the second frame period may be changed in accordance with the lighting ratio R. Specifically, it is preferable to reduce the overdrive intensity as the lighting ratio R increases. This is because increase in the lighting ratio R means increase in length of the image display period τa, and increase in length of the image display period τa can be allowed to have a longer period of time for reaching intended transmittance of a liquid crystal element. Moreover, when the length of the image display period τa is increased, intended transmittance of a liquid crystal element itself can be reduced, so that the original voltage VS is reduced, and further, the overdrive intensity can be reduced.
By driving a display device in such a manner, backlight luminance can be constant even in the case where luminance of the pixel which human eyes perceive is not desired to be changed when the lighting ratio R is changed. Thus, a structure of a circuit for driving a backlight is simplified, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, luminance unevenness and a flicker in displaying an image can be reduced. Moreover, provision of the blanking interval τb can reduce motion blur, and image quality of a moving image can be improved.
Although details of a controlling method shown in
Next, the case of using (3) the method where a backlight divided into areas sequentially blinks among the methods where voltage written to a pixel is controlled under a condition that backlight luminance is constant when the backlight is lit is described with reference to
In the case of using (3) the method where a backlight divided into areas sequentially blinks among the methods where voltage written to a pixel is controlled under a condition that backlight luminance is constant when the backlight is lit before and after the lighting ratio R is changed, driving can be realized by changing the length and timing of the backlight lighting period in the first frame period and the second frame period, as shown in
When the overdrive voltage VOD2601 is written to a pixel by data writing scanning in the first frame period, transmittance of a display element becomes transmittance corresponding to the original voltage VS2601 at the time when the next data is written by data writing scanning in the second frame period or at the time close thereto. In that period, a backlight lighting period is sequentially provided for each area. Thus, integrated luminance in the top area in the first frame period is represented by the area of the oblique line region L2601, which is surrounded by the backlight lighting period and the transmittance.
Then, when the overdrive voltage VOD2602 is written to the pixel by data writing scanning in the second frame period, the transmittance of the display element becomes transmittance corresponding to the original voltage VS2602 at the time when the next data is written by data writing scanning in the next frame period or at the time close thereto. In that period, a backlight lighting period is sequentially provided for each area. Thus, integrated luminance in the top area in the second frame period is represented by the area of the oblique line region L2602 which is surrounded by the backlight lighting period and the transmittance.
At this time, it is important that values of the voltages applied to a pixel vary in the first frame period and the second frame period. That is, in the case where the lighting ratio R is changed under a condition that backlight luminance is constant when a backlight is lit, it is preferable to write different voltage in the first frame period and the second frame period, not the same voltage, if luminance of the pixel which human eyes perceive is not desired to be changed.
Accordingly, in one of methods according to this document, the original voltage and the overdrive voltage are changed in accordance with the lighting ratio R in order that the area of the oblique line region L2601 in the first frame period and the area of the oblique line region L2602 in the second frame period are approximately the same. Specifically, it is preferable to reduce the original voltage and the overdrive voltage as the lighting ratio R increases. In addition, in one of the methods according to this document, the overdrive intensity V2601 in the first frame period and the overdrive intensity V2602 in the second frame period may be changed in accordance with the lighting ratio R. Specifically, it is preferable to reduce the overdrive intensity as the lighting ratio R increases. This is because increase in the lighting ratio R means increase in length of the image display period τa, and increase in length of the image display period τa can be allowed to have a longer period of time for reaching intended transmittance of a liquid crystal element. Moreover, when the length of the image display period τa is increased, intended transmittance of a liquid crystal element itself can be reduced, so that the original voltage VS is reduced, and further, the overdrive intensity can be reduced.
By driving a display device in such a manner, backlight luminance can be constant even in the case where luminance of the pixel which human eyes perceive is not desired to be changed when the lighting ratio R is changed. Thus, a structure of a circuit for driving a backlight is simplified, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, luminance unevenness and a flicker in displaying an image can be reduced. Moreover, provision of the blanking interval τb can reduce motion blur, and image quality of a moving image can be improved.
Although details of a controlling method shown in
Note that the driving methods shown in
Next, the case of a combination of (2) the method where the whole backlight blinks and (1) the method where blanking data is directly written to each pixel among the methods where voltage written to a pixel is controlled under a condition that backlight luminance is constant when the backlight is lit is described with reference to
In the case of the combination of (2) the method where the whole backlight blinks and (1) the method where blanking data is directly written to each pixel among the methods where voltage written to a pixel is controlled under a condition that backlight luminance is constant when the backlight is lit before and after the lighting ratio R is changed, driving can be realized by changing the length and timing of the backlight lighting period in the first frame period and the second frame period and performing blanking writing scanning in addition to data writing scanning, as shown in
When the overdrive voltage VOD2701 is written to a pixel by data writing scanning in the first frame period, transmittance of a display element becomes transmittance corresponding to the original voltage VS2701 at the time when the next data is written by blanking writing scanning in the second frame period or at the time close thereto. In that period, a backlight lighting period is provided in all pixels all at once. Thus, integrated luminance in the first frame period is represented by the area of the oblique line region L2701, which is surrounded by the backlight lighting period and the transmittance.
Then, when the overdrive voltage VOD2702 is written to the pixel by data writing scanning in the second frame period after blanking writing scanning in the second frame period, the transmittance of the display element becomes transmittance corresponding to the original voltage VS2702 at the time when the next data is written by blanking writing scanning in the next frame period or at the time close thereto. In that period, a backlight lighting period is provided in all the pixels all at once. Thus, integrated luminance in the second frame period is represented by the area of the oblique line region L2702, which is surrounded by the backlight lighting period and the transmittance.
At this time, it is important that values of the voltages applied to a pixel vary in the first frame period and the second frame period. That is, in the case where the lighting ratio R is changed under a condition that backlight luminance is constant when a backlight is lit, it is preferable to write different voltage in the first frame period and the second frame period, not the same voltage, if luminance of the pixel which human eyes perceive is not desired to be changed.
Accordingly, in one of methods according to this document, the original voltage and the overdrive voltage are changed in accordance with the lighting ratio R in order that the area of the oblique line region L2701 in the first frame period and the area of the oblique line region L2702 in the second frame period are approximately the same. Specifically, it is preferable to reduce the original voltage and the overdrive voltage as the lighting ratio R increases. In addition, in one of the methods according to this document, the overdrive intensity V2701 in the first frame period and the overdrive intensity V2702 in the second frame period may be changed in accordance with the lighting ratio R. Specifically, it is preferable to reduce the overdrive intensity as the lighting ratio R increases. This is because increase in the lighting ratio R means increase in length of the image display period τa, and increase in length of the image display period τa can be allowed to have a longer period of time for reaching intended transmittance of a liquid crystal element. Moreover, when the length of the image display period τa is increased, intended transmittance of a liquid crystal element itself can be reduced, so that the original voltage VS is reduced, and further, the overdrive intensity can be reduced.
By driving a display device in such a manner, backlight luminance can be constant even in the case where luminance of the pixel which human eyes perceive is not desired to be changed when the lighting ratio R is changed. Thus, a structure of a circuit for driving a backlight is simplified, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, luminance unevenness and a flicker in displaying an image can be reduced. Moreover, provision of the blanking interval τb can reduce motion blur, and image quality of a moving image can be improved. Furthermore, since blanking writing is performed in a period other than the backlight lighting period, light leakage can be reduced. Thus, black blurring in displaying an image can be reduced, so that a contrast ratio of the display device can be improved.
Although details of a controlling method shown in
Next, the case of a combination of (3) the method where a backlight divided into areas sequentially blinks and (1) the method where blanking data is directly written to each pixel among the methods where voltage written to a pixel is controlled under a condition that backlight luminance is constant when the backlight is lit is described with reference to
In the case of the combination of (3) the method where a backlight divided into areas sequentially blinks and (1) the method where blanking data is directly written to each pixel among the methods where voltage written to a pixel is controlled under a condition that backlight luminance is constant when the backlight is lit before and after the lighting ratio R is changed, driving can be realized by changing the length and timing of the backlight lighting period in the first frame period and the second frame period and performing blanking writing scanning in addition to data writing scanning, as shown in
When the overdrive voltage VOD2801 is written to a pixel by data writing scanning in the first frame period, transmittance of a display element becomes transmittance corresponding to the original voltage VS2801 at the time when the next data is written by blanking writing scanning in the second frame period or at the time close thereto. In that period, a backlight lighting period is sequentially provided for each area. Thus, integrated luminance in the top area in the first frame period is represented by the area of the oblique line region L2801, which is surrounded by the backlight lighting period and the transmittance.
Then, when the overdrive voltage VOD2802 is written to the pixel by data writing scanning in the second frame period after blanking writing scanning in the second frame period, the transmittance of the display element becomes transmittance corresponding to the original voltage VS2802 at the time when the next data is written by data writing scanning in the next frame period or at the time close thereto. In that period, a backlight lighting period is sequentially provided for each area. Thus, integrated luminance in the top area in the second frame period is represented by the area of the oblique line region L2802, which is surrounded by the backlight lighting period and the transmittance.
At this time, it is important that values of the voltages applied to a pixel vary in the first frame period and the second frame period. That is, in the case where the lighting ratio R is changed under a condition that backlight luminance is constant when a backlight is lit, it is preferable to write different voltage in the first frame period and the second frame period, not the same voltage, if luminance of the pixel which human eyes perceive is not desired to be changed.
Accordingly, in one of methods according to this document, the original voltage and the overdrive voltage are changed in accordance with the lighting ratio R in order that the area of the oblique line region L2801 in the first frame period and the area of the oblique line region L2802 in the second frame period are approximately the same. Specifically, it is preferable to reduce the original voltage and the overdrive voltage as the lighting ratio R increases. In addition, in one of the methods according to this document, the overdrive intensity V2801 in the first frame period and the overdrive intensity V2802 in the second frame period may be changed in accordance with the lighting ratio R. Specifically, it is preferable to reduce the overdrive intensity as the lighting ratio R increases. This is because increase in the lighting ratio R means increase in length of the image display period τa, and increase in length of the image display period τa can be allowed to have a longer period of time for reaching intended transmittance of a liquid crystal element. Moreover, when the length of the image display period τa is increased, intended transmittance of a liquid crystal element itself can be reduced, so that the original voltage VS is reduced, and further, the overdrive intensity can be reduced.
By driving a display device in such a manner, backlight luminance can be constant even in the case where luminance of the pixel which human eyes perceive is not desired to be changed when the lighting ratio R is changed. Thus, a structure of a circuit for driving a backlight is simplified, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, luminance unevenness and a flicker in displaying an image can be reduced. Moreover, provision of the blanking interval τb can reduce motion blur, and image quality of a moving image can be improved. Furthermore, since blanking writing is performed in a period other than the backlight lighting period, light leakage in a non-lighting period of the backlight can be reduced. Thus, black blurring in displaying an image can be reduced, so that a contrast ratio of the display device can be improved.
Although details of a controlling method shown in
Note that the driving methods shown in
Next, in a method of changing backlight luminance, the case where the method for providing the blanking interval τb (the method of controlling the lighting ratio R) is different is individually described in detail. Note that in the method of changing backlight luminance, by controlling transmittance of a display element, backlight luminance can have extremely various values in order to prevent change in luminance which human eyes perceive in frame periods before and after the lighting ratio R is changed. Here, the case where voltage written to each pixel is not changed when the lighting ratio R is changed is described. This is because this can provide a beneficial effect in driving a display device.
First, the case of using (2) the method where the whole backlight blinks among the methods of changing backlight luminance is described with reference to
In the case of using (2) the method where the whole backlight blinks among the methods of changing backlight luminance before and after the lighting ratio R is changed, driving can be realized by changing backlight luminance and the length and timing of the backlight lighting period, as shown in
When the overdrive voltage VOD2901 is written to a pixel by data writing scanning in the first frame period, transmittance of a display element becomes transmittance corresponding to the original voltage VS2901 at the time when the next data is written by data writing scanning in the second frame period or at the time close thereto. In that period, a backlight lighting period is provided in all pixels all at once. Thus, integrated luminance in the first frame period is represented by the area of the oblique line region L2901, which is surrounded by the backlight lighting period and the transmittance.
In the second frame period, the transmittance in the graph of
At this time, it is important that luminance in the backlight lighting periods varies in the first frame period and the second frame period. That is, when the lighting ratio R is changed, display can be performed without change in luminance of a pixel which human eyes perceive by changing backlight luminance even in the case where luminance of the pixel is not desired to be changed.
Accordingly, in one of methods according to this document, backlight luminance in the backlight lighting period is determined by difference between the area of the oblique line region L2901 in the first frame period and the area of the oblique line region L2902 in the second frame period. Specifically, when the lighting ratio R is changed and the backlight lighting period in the second frame period is 1/X (X is a positive number) of the backlight lighting period in the first frame period, it is preferable that backlight luminance be X times as high as that in the first frame period. Then, in one of the methods according to this document, it is preferable that the original voltage VS2901 in the first frame period be approximately the same in the first frame period and the second frame period.
By driving a display device in such a manner, when the lighting ratio R is changed, the original voltage VS2901 can be approximately the same in the first frame period and the second frame period even in the case where luminance of the pixel which human eyes perceive is not desired to be changed. Thus, a structure of a circuit which processes image data and is included in the display device is simplified, so that manufacturing cost and power consumption of the display device can be reduced. Further, in the case where the same luminance is desired to be displayed when the lighting ratio R is changed, voltage written to each pixel does not have to be changed from that in the previous frame; thus, power consumption in writing data can be reduced.
Note that overdrive voltage and overdrive intensity do not have to be approximately the same in the first frame period and the second frame period. This is because overdrive voltage and overdrive intensity are obtained from original voltages and transmittance in one frame and the previous frame; thus, when original voltage and transmittance in each previous frame are different in the first frame period and the second frame period, various values are obtained as a matter of course.
Although details of a controlling method shown in
Next, the case of using (3) the method where a backlight divided into areas sequentially blinks among the methods of changing backlight luminance is described with reference to
In the case of using (3) the method where a backlight divided into areas sequentially blinks among the methods of changing backlight luminance before and after the lighting ratio R is changed, driving can be realized by changing backlight luminance and the length and timing of the backlight lighting period, as shown in
When the overdrive voltage VOD3001 is written to a pixel by data writing scanning in the first frame period, transmittance of a display element becomes transmittance corresponding to the original voltage VS3001 at the time when the next data is written by data writing scanning in the second frame period or at the time close thereto. In that period, a backlight lighting period is sequentially provided for each area. Thus, integrated luminance in the top area in the first frame period is represented by the area of the oblique line region L3001, which is surrounded by the backlight lighting period and the transmittance.
In the second frame period, the transmittance in the graph of
At this time, it is important that luminance in the backlight lighting periods varies in the first frame period and the second frame period. That is, when the lighting ratio R is changed, display can be performed without change in luminance of a pixel which human eyes perceive by changing backlight luminance even in the case where luminance of the pixel is not desired to be changed.
Accordingly, in one of methods according to this document, backlight luminance in the backlight lighting period is determined by difference between the area of the oblique line region L3001 in the first frame period and the area of the oblique line region L3002 in the second frame period. Specifically, when the lighting ratio R is changed and the backlight lighting period in the second frame period is 1/X (X is a positive number) of the backlight lighting period in the first frame period, it is preferable that backlight luminance be X times as high as that in the first frame period. Then, in one of the methods according to this document, it is preferable that the original voltage VS3001 in the first frame period be approximately the same in the first frame period and the second frame period.
By driving a display device in such a manner, when the lighting ratio R is changed, the original voltage VS3001 can be approximately the same in the first frame period and the second frame period even in the case where luminance of the pixel which human eyes perceive is not desired to be changed. Thus, a structure of a circuit which processes image data and is included in the display device is simplified, so that manufacturing cost and power consumption of the display device can be reduced. Further, in the case where the same luminance is desired to be displayed when the lighting ratio R is changed, voltage written to each pixel does not have to be changed from that in the previous frame; thus, power consumption in writing data can be reduced.
Note that overdrive voltage and overdrive intensity do not have to be approximately the same in the first frame period and the second frame period. This is because overdrive voltage and overdrive intensity are obtained from original voltages and transmittance in one frame and the previous frame; thus, when original voltage and transmittance in each previous frame are different in the first frame period and the second frame period, various values are obtained as a matter of course.
Although details of a controlling method shown in
Note that the driving methods shown in
Next, the case of a combination of (2) the method where the whole backlight blinks and (1) the method where blanking data is directly written to each pixel among the methods of changing backlight luminance is described with reference to
In the case of the combination of (2) the method where the whole backlight blinks and (1) the method where blanking data is directly written to each pixel among the methods of changing backlight luminance before and after the lighting ratio R is changed, driving can be realized by changing backlight luminance and the length and timing of the backlight lighting period, and performing blanking writing scanning in addition to data writing scanning, as shown in
When the overdrive voltage VOD3101 is written to a pixel by data writing scanning in the first frame period, transmittance of a display element becomes transmittance corresponding to the original voltage VS3101 at the time when the next data is written by blanking writing scanning in the second frame period or at the time close thereto. In that period, a backlight lighting period is provided in all pixels all at once. Thus, integrated luminance in the first frame period is represented by the area of the oblique line region L3101, which is surrounded by the backlight lighting period and the transmittance.
Then, when the overdrive voltage VOD3102 is written to the pixel by data writing scanning in the second frame period after blanking writing scanning in the second frame period, the transmittance of the display element becomes transmittance corresponding to the original voltage VS3101 at the time when the next data is written by blanking writing scanning in the next frame period or at the time close thereto. In that period, a backlight lighting period is provided in all the pixel all at once. Thus, integrated luminance in the second frame period is represented by the area of the oblique line region L3102, which is surrounded by the backlight lighting period and the transmittance.
At this time, it is important that luminance in the backlight lighting periods varies in the first frame period and the second frame period. That is, when the lighting ratio R is changed, display can be performed without change in luminance of a pixel which human eyes perceive by changing backlight luminance even in the case where luminance of the pixel is not desired to be changed.
Accordingly, in one of methods according to this document, backlight luminance in the backlight lighting period is determined by difference between the area of the oblique line region L3101 in the first frame period and the area of the oblique line region L3102 in the second frame period. Specifically, when the lighting ratio R is changed and the backlight lighting period in the second frame period is 1/X (X is a positive number) of the backlight lighting period in the first frame period, it is preferable that backlight luminance be X times as high as that in the first frame period. Then, in one of the methods according to this document, it is preferable that the original voltage VS3101 in the first frame period be approximately the same in the first frame period and the second frame period.
By driving a display device in such a manner, the original voltage VS3101 can be the same in the first frame period and the second frame period even in the case where luminance of the pixel which human eyes perceive is not desired to be changed when the lighting ratio R is changed. Thus, a structure of a circuit which processes image data, which is included in the display device, is simplified, so that manufacturing cost and power consumption of the display device can be reduced. Further, since blanking writing is performed in a period other than the backlight lighting period, light leakage in a non-lighting period of the backlight can be reduced. Thus, black blurring in displaying an image can be reduced, so that a contrast ratio of the display device can be improved.
Note that overdrive voltage and overdrive intensity do not have to be approximately the same in the first frame period and the second frame period. This is because overdrive voltage and overdrive intensity are obtained from original voltages and transmittance in one frame and the previous frame; thus, when original voltage and transmittance in each previous frame are different in the first frame period and the second frame period, various values are obtained as a matter of course.
Although details of a controlling method shown in
Next, the case of a combination of (3) the method where a backlight divided into areas sequentially blinks and (1) the method where blanking data is directly written to each pixel among the methods of changing backlight luminance is described with reference to
In the case of the combination of (3) the method where a backlight divided into areas sequentially blinks and (1) the method where blanking data is directly written to each pixel among the methods of changing backlight luminance before and after the lighting ratio R is changed, driving can be realized by changing backlight luminance and the length and timing of the backlight lighting period, and performing blanking writing scanning in addition to data writing scanning, as shown in
When the overdrive voltage VOD3201 is written to a pixel by data writing scanning in the first frame period, transmittance of a display element becomes transmittance corresponding to the original voltage VS3201 at the time when the next data is written by blanking writing scanning in the second frame period or at the time close thereto. In that period, a backlight lighting period is sequentially provided for each area. Thus, integrated luminance in the top area in the first frame period is represented by the area of the oblique line region L3201, which is surrounded by the backlight lighting period and the transmittance.
Then, when the overdrive voltage VOD3202 is written to the pixel by data writing scanning in the second frame period after blanking writing scanning in the second frame period, the transmittance of the display element becomes transmittance corresponding to the original voltage VS3201 at the time when the next data is written by blanking writing scanning in the next frame period or at the time close thereto. In that period, a backlight lighting period is sequentially provided for each area. Thus, integrated luminance in the top area in the second frame period is represented by the area of the oblique line region L3202, which is surrounded by the backlight lighting period and the transmittance.
At this time, it is important that luminance in the backlight lighting periods varies in the first frame period and the second frame period. That is, when the lighting ratio R is changed, display can be performed without change in luminance of a pixel which human eyes perceive by changing backlight luminance even in the case where luminance of the pixel is not desired to be changed.
Accordingly, in one of methods according to this document, backlight luminance in a backlight lighting period is determined by difference between the area of the oblique line region L3201 in the first frame period and the area of the oblique line region L3202 in the second frame period. Specifically, when the lighting ratio R is changed and the backlight lighting period in the second frame period is 1/X (X is a positive number) of the backlight lighting period in the first frame period, it is preferable that backlight luminance be X times as high as that in the first frame period. Then, in one of the methods according to this document, it is preferable that the original voltage VS3201 in the first frame period be approximately the same in the first frame period and the second frame period.
By driving a display device in such a manner, the original voltage VS3201 can be the same in the first frame period and the second frame period even in the case where luminance of the pixel which human eyes perceive is not desired to be changed when the lighting ratio R is changed. Thus, a structure of a circuit which processes image data, which is included in the display device, is simplified, so that manufacturing cost and power consumption of the display device can be reduced. Further, since blanking writing is performed in a period other than the backlight lighting period, light leakage in a non-lighting period of the backlight can be reduced. Thus, black blurring in displaying an image can be reduced, so that a contrast ratio of the display device can be improved.
Note that overdrive voltage and overdrive intensity do not have to be approximately the same in the first frame period and the second frame period. This is because overdrive voltage and overdrive intensity are obtained from original voltages and transmittance in one frame and the previous frame; thus, when original voltage and transmittance in each previous frame are different in the first frame period and the second frame period, various values are obtained as a matter of course.
Although details of a controlling method shown in
Note that the driving methods shown in
At least one of the methods of driving a display device according to this document can be used when a pixel provided in the display device includes a plurality of subpixels. At this time, reduction in display quality, such as motion blur, can be further reduced by driving with the lighting ratio R different in each subpixel.
When a pixel includes a plurality of subpixels, a function of the pixel can be extended, and properties of a display device can be improved. For example, the number of gray scales which the pixel can display can be increased by changing luminance in each subpixel and combining such luminance (i.e., area gray scale). In addition, when a display element is a liquid crystal element, there are problems such as reduction in contrast of display, color shift, and luminance inversion depending on an angle at which a display portion of the display device is seen (i.e., a narrow viewing angle). When the pixel includes a plurality of subpixels and voltages slightly different from each other are applied to each subpixel, a viewing angle of the display device can be increased. Accordingly, various beneficial effects can be obtained by a structure where each pixel provided in the display device includes a plurality of subpixels, and properties of the display device can be further improved by using the method described in this embodiment mode.
An example of a pixel including a plurality of subpixels is described with reference to
A plurality of wirings are connected to the first subpixel 3351 and the second subpixel 3352, and various connection methods can be used. As a structure example of wirings connected to a plurality of subpixels, a structure shown in
For a pixel structure, various structures other than the structure shown in
Note that the structures shown in
As a method where a data signal is written to each subpixel, sequential scanning is usually performed. That is, GATEI1, GATEII1, GATEI2, and GATEII2 are sequentially selected, GATEIX and GATEIIX are selected, and scanning finishes. Here, X represents the number of pixels in a perpendicular direction. This sequential scanning may be performed when writing scanning and blanking scanning are performed.
When writing scanning and blanking scanning are performed by a scanning method shown in
In the scanning method shown in
Specifically, after a data signal is written to GATEII1 a data signal is written to GATEII1 in the first half of the next gate selection period. Next, GATEI2 and GATEII2 are sequentially selected and scanned. Then, at the time when an image display period of GATEI1 ends, blanking data is written to GATEI1 in the latter half of the gate selection period. Then, at the time when an image display period of GATEII1 ends, blanking data is written to GATEII1 in the latter half of the gate selection period. In such a manner, writing scanning is sequentially performed and temporally-discrete blanking scanning is performed on each subpixel, so that driving with the lighting ratio R different in each subpixel can be realized. Further, an image display period τa3301 of the scan line GATEIn at this time is a period from writing scanning to blanking scanning, and a blanking interval τb3301 is a period from blanking scanning to writing scanning in the next frame. Similarly, an image display period τa3311 of the scan line GATEIIn is a period from writing scanning to blanking scanning, and a blanking interval τb3311 is a period from blanking scanning to writing scanning in the next frame.
Here, a data signal is written to a pixel in the first half of one gate selection period, and blanking data is written to the pixel in the latter half thereof; on the contrary, blanking data may be written to a pixel in the first half of one gate selection period and a data signal may be written to the pixel in the latter half thereof.
Voltage Vblank of blanking data may vary in a period when blanking data is written to the subpixel I and a period when blanking data is written to the subpixel II. Accordingly, luminance of a pixel in the blanking interval may freely vary in each subpixel.
In particular, a method where the lighting ratio R can vary in each subpixel is beneficial to a display device in which a viewing angle is increased by displaying a bright image in one of subpixels and a dark image in the other of the subpixels. This is because an effect of reducing motion blur can be obtained in a bright pixel in which motion blur is likely to be seen and a gray scale on the lower gray scale level can be sufficiently displayed in a dark pixel in which a gray scale on the lower gray scale level is likely to be damaged, by reducing the lighting ratio R in a subpixel for displaying a bright image and increasing the lighting ratio R in a subpixel for displaying a dark image.
As an example where the lighting ratio R freely varies in each subpixel, the length of image display periods τa3401 and τa3402 of the subpixel I can be different from the length of image display periods τa3411 and τa3412 of the subpixel II, as shown in
FIG. 34BI is a graph showing original voltage VS3401 and overdrive voltages VOD3401 and VOD3402 written to each pixel, and transmittance with respect to each voltage in the first frame period and the second frame period on the same time axis. Here, the image display periods and the blanking intervals in the first frame period and the second frame period are similar to those in
FIG. 34BII is a graph showing original voltage VS3411 and overdrive voltages VOD3411 and VOD3412 written to each pixel, and transmittance with respect to each voltage in the first frame period and the second frame period on the same time axis. Here, the image display periods and the blanking intervals in the first frame period and the second frame period are similar to those in
As shown in
Note that transmittance at or around the time when each frame ends changes depending on the length of the blanking interval. Specifically, the transmittance at or around the time when each frame ends increases as the blanking interval is reduced. Thus, it is preferable to further reduce overdrive intensity of one frame as the blanking interval of the previous frame is shorter.
In addition, difference in the lighting ratio R of the subpixels I and II is preferably determined in accordance with the control parameter P. Specifically, it is preferable to increase difference in the lighting ratio R of the subpixels I and II as the control parameter P increases. This is because an effect of reducing motion blur can be obtained in a bright pixel in which motion blur is likely to be seen, whereas a gray scale on the lower gray scale level can be sufficiently displayed in a dark pixel in which a gray scale on the lower gray scale level is likely to be damaged.
Other examples of a method where the lighting ratio R can vary between subpixels include a method where the lighting ratio R is changed in one of subpixels and not changed in the other of the subpixels in accordance with the magnitude of the control parameters P and Q (see
Note that optimal driving can also be realized by changing backlight luminance at this time. For example, when the level of a data signal written to a pixel is the same, luminance which human eyes perceive becomes lower as the image display period τa becomes shorter and the blanking interval τb becomes longer Accordingly, in accordance with the length of the image display period τa and the length of the blanking interval τb (i.e., the lighting ratio R), the backlight luminance is reduced when the lighting ratio R is high, whereas the backlight luminance is increased when the lighting ratio R is low; thus, luminance which human eyes perceive can be constant. Further, the lighting ratio R preferably depends on the control parameters P and Q described in Embodiment Mode 3. This is because the lighting ratio R can be controlled as appropriate by perceivability of motion blur in an image to be displayed.
FIG. 35BI is a graph showing original voltages VS3501 and VS3502 and overdrive voltages VOD3501 and VOD3502 written to each pixel, and transmittance with respect to each voltage on the same time axis when the lighting ratio R is different in the first frame period and the second frame period. Here, image display periods and blanking intervals in the first frame period and the second frame period are similar to those in
FIG. 35BII is a graph showing original voltage VS3511 and overdrive voltages VOD3511 and VOD3512 written to each pixel, and transmittance with respect to each voltage in the first frame period and the second frame period on the same time axis. Here, image display periods and blanking intervals in the first frame period and the second frame period are similar to those in
In FIG. 35BI, the area of the oblique line region L3501 and the area of the oblique line region L3502 are made approximately the same by controlling the original voltage and the overdrive voltage as appropriate, so that luminance which human eyes perceive can be approximately the same even when the lighting ratio R is different.
FIG. 36BI is a graph showing original voltages VS3601 and VS3602 and overdrive voltages VOD3601 and VOD3602 written to each pixel, and transmittance with respect to each voltage on the same time axis when the lighting ratio R is different in the first frame period and the second frame period. Here, image display periods and blanking intervals in the first frame period and the second frame period are similar to those in
FIG. 36BII is a graph showing original voltages VS3611 and VS3612 and overdrive voltages VOD3611 and VOD3612 written to each pixel, and transmittance with respect to each voltage on the same time axis when the lighting ratio R is different in the first frame period and the second frame period. Here, backlight lighting periods and blanking intervals in the first frame period and the second frame period are similar to those in
In FIG. 36BI, the area of the oblique line region L3601 and the area of the oblique line region L3602 are made approximately the same by controlling the original voltage and the overdrive voltage as appropriate, so that luminance which human eyes perceive can be approximately the same even when the lighting ratio R is different.
In FIG. 36BII also, the area of the oblique line region L3611 and the area of the oblique line region L3612 are made approximately the same by controlling the original voltage and the overdrive voltage as appropriate, so that luminance which human eyes perceive can be approximately the same even when the lighting ratio R is different.
Note that the methods shown in
Although this embodiment mode is described with reference to various drawings, the contents (or part of the contents) described in each drawing can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with the contents (or part of the contents) described in another drawing. Further, much more drawings can be formed by combining each part with another part in the above-described drawings.
The contents (or part of the contents) described in each drawing in this embodiment mode can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with the contents (or part of the contents) described in a drawing in another embodiment mode. Further, much more drawings can be formed by combining each part in each drawing in this embodiment mode with part of another embodiment mode.
This embodiment mode shows examples of embodying, slightly transforming, partially modifying, improving, describing in detail, or applying the contents (or part of the contents) described in other embodiment modes, an example of related part thereof, or the like. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiment modes can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment mode.
Embodiment Mode 5In this embodiment mode, a pixel structure of a display device is described. In particular, a pixel structure of a liquid crystal display device is described.
A pixel structure in the case where each liquid crystal mode and a transistor are combined is described with reference to cross-sectional views of a pixel.
Note that as the transistor, a thin film transistor (a TFT) or the like including a non-single crystalline semiconductor layer typified by amorphous silicon, polycrystalline silicon, micro crystalline (also referred to as semi-amorphous) silicon, or the like can be used.
As a structure of the transistor, a top-gate structure, a bottom-gate structure, or the like can be used. Note that a channel-etched transistor, a channel-protective transistor, or the like can be used as a bottom-gate transistor.
Features of the pixel structure shown in
Here, the case is described in which a bottom-gate transistor using an amorphous semiconductor is used as the transistor In the case where a transistor using an amorphous semiconductor is used, a liquid crystal display device can be formed at low cost by using a large substrate.
A liquid crystal display device includes a basic portion displaying images, which is called a liquid crystal panel. The liquid crystal panel is manufactured as follows: two processed substrates are attached to each other with a gap of several μm therebetween, and a liquid crystal material is injected into a space between the two substrates. In
The light-shielding film 10114 is not necessarily formed on the second substrate 10116. When the light-shielding film 10114 is not formed, the number of steps is reduced, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since a structure is simple, yield can be improved. On the other hand, when the light-shielding film 10114 is formed, a display device with little light leakage at the time of black display can be obtained.
The color filter 10115 is not necessarily formed on the second substrate 10116. When the color filter 10115 is not formed, the number of steps is reduced, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since a structure is simple, yield can be improved. Note that even when the color filter 10115 is not formed, a display device which can perform color display can be obtained by field sequential driving. On the other hand, needless to say, when the color filter 10115 is formed, a display device which can perform color display can be obtained.
Spherical spacers may be dispersed on the second substrate 10116 instead of forming the spacer 10117. When the spherical spacers are dispersed, the number of steps is reduced, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since a structure is simple, yield can be improved. On the other hand, when the spacer 10117 is formed, a distance between the two substrates can be uniform because a position of the spacer is not varied, so that a display device with little display unevenness can be obtained.
Subsequently, a process to be performed to the first substrate 10101 is described.
First, a first insulating film 10102 is formed over the first substrate 10101 by sputtering, a printing method, a coating method, or the like. The first insulating film 10102 has a function of preventing change in characteristics of the transistor due to an impurity from the substrate which affects a semiconductor layer. Note that the first insulating film 10102 is not necessarily formed.
Next, a first conductive layer 10103 is formed over the first insulating film 10102 by photolithography, a laser direct writing method, an inkjet method, or the like.
Next, a second insulating film 10104 is formed over the entire surface by sputtering, a printing method, a coating method, or the like. The second insulating film 10104 has a function of preventing change in characteristics of the transistor due to an impurity from the substrate which affects the semiconductor layer.
Next, a first semiconductor layer 10105 and a second semiconductor layer 10106 are formed. Note that the first semiconductor layer 10105 and the second semiconductor layer 10106 are formed sequentially and shapes thereof are processed at the same time.
Next, a second conductive layer 10107 is formed by photolithography, a laser direct writing method, an inkjet method, or the like. Note that as a method for etching which processes a shape of the second conductive layer 10107, dry etching is preferable. Note that as the second conductive layer 10107, a light-transmitting material may be used or a reflective material may be used.
Next, a channel region of the transistor is formed. Here, an example of a step thereof is described. The second semiconductor layer 10106 is etched by using the second conductive layer 10107 as a mask. Alternatively, the second semiconductor layer 10106 is etched by using a mask for processing the shape of the second conductive layer 10107. Then, the first conductive layer 10103 at a position where the second semiconductor layer 10106 is removed serves as the channel region of the transistor. Thus, the number of masks can be reduced, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced.
Next, a third insulating film 10108 is formed and a contact hole is selectively formed in the third insulating film 10108. Note that a contact hole may be formed also in the second insulating film 10104 at the same time as forming the contact hole in the third insulating film 10108. Note also that a surface of the third insulating film 10108 is preferably as even as possible. This is because alignment of the liquid crystal molecules are affected by unevenness of a surface with which the liquid crystal is in contact.
Next, a third conductive layer 10109 is formed by photolithography, a laser direct writing method, an inkjet method, or the like.
Next, a first alignment film 10110 is formed. Note that after the first alignment film 10110 is formed, rubbing may be performed so as to control the alignment of the liquid crystal molecules. Rubbing is a step of forming stripes on an alignment film by rubbing the alignment film with a cloth. By performing rubbing, the alignment film can have alignment properties.
The first substrate 10101 which is manufactured as described above and the second substrate 10116 on which the light-shielding film 10114, the color filter 10115, the fourth conductive layer 10113, the spacer 10117, and the second alignment film 10112 are formed are attached to each other by a sealant with a gap of several μm therebetween. Then, liquid crystals 10111 which include the liquid crystal molecules 10118 are injected into a space between the two substrates. Note that in the TN mode, the fourth conductive layer 10113 is formed over the entire surface of the second substrate 10116.
Features of the pixel structure of an MVA-mode liquid crystal panel shown in
Here, the case is described in which a bottom-gate transistor using an amorphous semiconductor is used as the transistor. In the case where a transistor using an amorphous semiconductor is used, a liquid crystal display device can be formed at low cost by using a large substrate.
A liquid crystal display device includes a basic portion displaying images, which is called a liquid crystal panel. The liquid crystal panel is manufactured as follows: two processed substrates are attached to each other with a gap of several μm therebetween, and a liquid crystal material is injected into a space between the two substrates. In
The light-shielding film 10214 is not necessarily formed on the second substrate 10216. When the light-shielding film 10214 is not formed, the number of steps is reduced, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since a structure is simple, yield can be improved. On the other hand, when the light-shielding film 10214 is formed, a display device with little light leakage at the time of black display can be obtained.
The color filter 10215 is not necessarily formed on the second substrate 10216. When the color filter 10215 is not formed, the number of steps is reduced, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since a structure is simple, yield can be improved. Note that even when the color filter 10215 is not formed, a display device which can perform color display can be obtained by field sequential driving. On the other hand, needless to say, when the color filter 10215 is formed, a display device which can perform color display can be obtained.
Spherical spacers may be dispersed on the second substrate 10216 instead of forming the spacer 10217. When the spherical spacers are dispersed, the number of steps is reduced, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since a structure is simple, yield can be improved. On the other hand, when the spacer 10217 is formed, a distance between the two substrates can be uniform because a position of the spacer is not varied, so that a display device with little display unevenness can be obtained.
Subsequently, a process to be performed to the first substrate 10201 is described.
First, a first insulating film 10202 is formed over the first substrate 10201 by sputtering, a printing method, a coating method, or the like. The first insulating film 10202 has a function of preventing change in characteristics of the transistor due to an impurity from the substrate which affects a semiconductor layer Note that the first insulating film 10202 is not necessarily formed.
Next, a first conductive layer 10203 is formed over the first insulating film 10202 by photolithography, a laser direct writing method, an inkjet method, or the like.
Next, a second insulating film 10204 is formed over the entire surface by sputtering, a printing method, a coating method, or the like. The second insulating film 10204 has a function of preventing change in characteristics of the transistor due to an impurity from the substrate which affects the semiconductor layer.
Next, a first semiconductor layer 10205 and a second semiconductor layer 10206 are formed. Note that the first semiconductor layer 10205 and the second semiconductor layer 10206 are formed sequentially and shapes thereof are processed at the same time.
Next, a second conductive layer 10207 is formed by photolithography, a laser direct writing method, an inkjet method, or the like. Note that as a method for etching which processes a shape of the second conductive layer 10207, dry etching is preferable. Note that as the second conductive layer 10207, a light-transmitting material may be used or a reflective material may be used.
Next, a channel region of the transistor is formed. Here, an example of a step thereof is described. The second semiconductor layer 10206 is etched by using the second conductive layer 10207 as a mask. Alternatively, the second semiconductor layer 10206 is etched by using a mask for processing the shape of the second conductive layer 10207. Then, the first conductive layer 10203 at a position where the second semiconductor layer 10206 is removed serves as the channel region of the transistor Thus, the number of masks can be reduced, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced.
Next, a third insulating film 10208 is formed and a contact hole is selectively formed in the third insulating film 10208. Note that a contact hole may be formed also in the second insulating film 10204 at the same time as forming the contact hole in the third insulating film 10208.
Next, a third conductive layer 10209 is formed by photolithography, a laser direct writing method, an inkjet method, or the like.
Next, a first alignment film 10210 is formed. Note that after the first alignment film 10210 is formed, rubbing may be performed so as to control the alignment of the liquid crystal molecules. Rubbing is a step of forming stripes on an alignment film by rubbing the alignment film with a cloth. By performing rubbing, the alignment film can have alignment properties.
The first substrate 10201 which is manufactured as described above and the second substrate 10216 on which the light-shielding film 10214, the color filter 10215, the fourth conductive layer 10213, the spacer 10217, and the second alignment film 10212 are manufactured are attached to each other by a sealant with a gap of several μm therebetween. Then, liquid crystals 10211 which include the liquid crystal molecules 10218 are injected into a space between the two substrates. Note that in the MVA mode, the fourth conductive layer 10213 is formed over the entire surface of the second substrate 10216. In addition, the alignment control projection 10219 is formed so as to be in contact with the fourth conductive layer 10213. The alignment control projection 10219 preferably has a shape with a smooth curved surface. Thus, since alignment of the adjacent liquid crystal molecules 10218 is extremely similar, an alignment defect can be reduced. Further, a defect of the alignment film caused by breaking of the alignment film can be reduced.
Features of the pixel structure shown in
Here, the case is described in which a bottom-gate transistor using an amorphous semiconductor is used as the transistor. In the case where a transistor using an amorphous semiconductor is used, a liquid crystal display device can be formed at low cost by using a large substrate.
A liquid crystal display device includes a basic portion displaying images, which is called a liquid crystal panel. The liquid crystal panel is manufactured as follows: two processed substrates are attached to each other with a gap of several μm therebetween, and a liquid crystal material is injected into a space between the two substrates. In
The light-shielding film 10244 is not necessarily formed on the second substrate 10246. When the light-shielding film 10244 is not formed, the number of steps is reduced, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since a structure is simple, yield can be improved. On the other hand, when the light-shielding film 10244 is formed, a display device with little light leakage at the time of black display can be obtained.
The color filter 10245 is not necessarily formed on the second substrate 10246. When the color filter 10245 is not formed, the number of steps is reduced, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since a structure is simple, yield can be improved. Note that even when the color filter 10245 is not formed, a display device which can perform color display can be obtained by field sequential driving. On the other hand, needless to say, when the color filter 10245 is formed, a display device which can perform color display can be obtained.
Spherical spacers may be dispersed on the second substrate 10246 instead of forming the spacer 10247. When the spherical spacers are dispersed, the number of steps is reduced, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since a structure is simple, yield can be improved. On the other hand, when the spacer 10247 is formed, a distance between the two substrates can be uniform because a position of the spacer is not varied, so that a display device with little display unevenness can be obtained.
Subsequently, a process to be performed to the first substrate 10231 is described.
First, a first insulating film 10232 is formed over the first substrate 10231 by sputtering, a printing method, a coating method, or the like. The first insulating film 10232 has a function of preventing change in characteristics of the transistor due to an impurity from the substrate which affects a semiconductor layer Note that the first insulating film 10232 is not necessarily formed.
Next, a first conductive layer 10233 is formed over the first insulating film 10232 by photolithography, a laser direct writing method, an inkjet method, or the like.
Next, a second insulating film 10234 is formed over the entire surface by sputtering, a printing method, a coating method, or the like. The second insulating film 10234 has a function of preventing change in characteristics of the transistor due to an impurity from the substrate which affects the semiconductor layer.
Next, a first semiconductor layer 10235 and a second semiconductor layer 10236 are formed. Note that the first semiconductor layer 10235 and the second semiconductor layer 10236 are formed sequentially and shapes thereof are processed at the same time.
Next, a second conductive layer 10237 is formed by photolithography, a laser direct writing method, an inkjet method, or the like. Note that as a method for etching which processes a shape of the second conductive layer 10237, dry etching is preferable. Note that as the second conductive layer 10237, a light-transmitting material may be used or a reflective material may be used.
Next, a channel region of the transistor is formed. Here, an example of a step thereof is described. The second semiconductor layer 10236 is etched by using the second conductive layer 10237 as a mask. Alternatively, the second semiconductor layer 10236 is etched by using a mask for processing the shape of the second conductive layer 10237. Then, the first conductive layer 10233 at a position where the second semiconductor layer 10236 is removed serves as the channel region of the transistor. Thus, the number of masks can be reduced, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced.
Next, a third insulating film 10238 is formed and a contact hole is selectively formed in the third insulating film 10238. Note that a contact hole may be formed also in the second insulating film 10234 at the same time as forming the contact hole in the third insulating film 10238. Note also that a surface of the third insulating film 10238 is preferably as even as possible. This is because alignment of the liquid crystal molecules are affected by unevenness of a surface with which the liquid crystal is in contact.
Next, a third conductive layer 10239 is formed by photolithography, a laser direct writing method, an inkjet method, or the like.
Next, a first alignment film 10240 is formed. Note that after the first alignment film 10240 is formed, rubbing may be performed so as to control the alignment of the liquid crystal molecules. Rubbing is a step of forming stripes on an alignment film by rubbing the alignment film with a cloth. By performing rubbing, the alignment film can have alignment properties.
The first substrate 10231 which is manufactured as described above and the second substrate 10246 on which the light-shielding film 10244, the color filter 10245, the fourth conductive layer 10243, the spacer 10247, and the second alignment film 10242 are manufactured are attached to each other by a sealant with a gap of several μm therebetween. Then, liquid crystals 10241 which include the liquid crystal molecules 10248 are injected into a space between the two substrates. Note that in the PVA mode, the fourth conductive layer 10243 is patterned and is provided with the electrode cutout portion 10249. Although a shape of the electrode cutout portion 10249 is not particularly limited, the electrode cutout portion 10249 preferably has a shape in which a plurality of rectangles having different directions are combined. Thus, since a plurality of regions having different alignment can be formed, a liquid crystal display device having a wide viewing angle can be obtained. Note that the fourth conductive layer 10243 at the boundary between the electrode cutout portion 10249 and the fourth conductive layer 10243 preferably has a shape with a smooth curved surface. Thus, since alignment of the adjacent liquid crystal molecules 10248 is extremely similar, an alignment defect is reduced. Further, a defect of the alignment film caused by breaking of the second alignment film 10242 by the electrode cutout portion 10249 can be prevented.
Features of the pixel structure shown in
Here, the case is described in which a bottom-gate transistor using an amorphous semiconductor is used as the transistor. In the case where a transistor using an amorphous semiconductor is used, a liquid crystal display device can be formed at low cost by using a large substrate.
A liquid crystal display device includes a basic portion displaying images, which is called a liquid crystal panel. The liquid crystal panel is manufactured as follows: two processed substrates are attached to each other with a gap of several μm therebetween, and a liquid crystal material is injected into a space between the two substrates. In
The light-shielding film 10314 is not necessarily formed on the second substrate 10316. When the light-shielding film 10314 is not formed, the number of steps is reduced, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since a structure is simple, yield can be improved. On the other hand, when the light-shielding film 10314 is formed, a display device with little light leakage at the time of black display can be obtained.
The color filter 10315 is not necessarily formed on the second substrate 10316. When the color filter 10315 is not formed, the number of steps is reduced, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since a structure is simple, yield can be improved. Note that even when the color filter 10315 is not formed, a display device which can perform color display can be obtained by field sequential driving. On the other hand, needless to say, when the color filter 10315 is formed, a display device which can perform color display can be obtained.
Spherical spacers may be dispersed on the second substrate 10316 instead of forming the spacer 10317. When the spherical spacers are dispersed, the number of steps is reduced, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since a structure is simple, yield can be improved. On the other hand, when the spacer 10317 is formed, a distance between the two substrates can be uniform because a position of the spacer is not varied, so that a display device with little display unevenness can be obtained.
Subsequently, a process to be performed to the first substrate 10301 is described.
First, a first insulating film 10302 is formed over the first substrate 10301 by sputtering, a printing method, a coating method, or the like. The first insulating film 10302 has a function of preventing change in characteristics of the transistor due to an impurity from the substrate which affects a semiconductor layer. Note that the first insulating film 10302 is not necessarily formed.
Next, a first conductive layer 10303 is formed over the first insulating film 10302 by photolithography, a laser direct writing method, an inkjet method, or the like.
Next, a second insulating film 10304 is formed over the entire surface by sputtering, a printing method, a coating method, or the like. The second insulating film 10304 has a function of preventing change in characteristics of the transistor due to an impurity from the substrate which affects the semiconductor layer.
Next, a first semiconductor layer 10305 and a second semiconductor layer 10306 are formed. Note that the first semiconductor layer 10305 and the second semiconductor layer 10306 are formed sequentially and shapes thereof are processed at the same time.
Next, a second conductive layer 10307 is formed by photolithography, a laser direct writing method, an inkjet method, or the like. Note that as a method for etching which processes a shape of the second conductive layer 10307, dry etching is preferable. Note that as the second conductive layer 10307, a light-transmitting material may be used or a reflective material may be used.
Next, a channel region of the transistor is formed. Here, an example of a step thereof is described. The second semiconductor layer 10306 is etched by using the second conductive layer 10307 as a mask. Alternatively, the second semiconductor layer 10306 is etched by using a mask for processing the shape of the second conductive layer 10307. Then, the first conductive layer 10303 at a position where the second semiconductor layer 10306 is removed serves as the channel region of the transistor. Thus, the number of masks can be reduced, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced.
Next, a third insulating film 10308 is formed and a contact hole is selectively formed in the third insulating film 10308. Note that a contact hole may be formed also in the second insulating film 10304 at the same time as forming the contact hole in the third insulating film 10308.
Next, a third conductive layer 10309 is formed by photolithography, a laser direct writing method, an inkjet method, or the like. Here, the third conductive layer 10309 has a shape in which two comb-shaped electrodes engage with each other. One of the comb-shaped electrodes is electrically connected to one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the transistor, and the other of the comb-shaped electrodes is electrically connected to a common electrode. Thus, a lateral electric field can be effectively applied to the liquid crystal molecules 10318.
Next, a first alignment film 10310 is formed. Note that after the first alignment film 10310 is formed, rubbing may be performed so as to control the alignment of the liquid crystal molecules. Rubbing is a step of forming stripes on an alignment film by rubbing the alignment film with a cloth. By performing rubbing, the alignment film can have alignment properties.
The first substrate 10301 which is manufactured as described above and the second substrate 10316 on which the light-shielding film 10314, the color filter 10315, the spacer 10317, and the second alignment film 10312 are formed are attached to each other by a sealant with a gap of several tm therebetween. Then, liquid crystals 10311 which include the liquid crystal molecules 10318 are injected into a space between the two substrates.
Features of the pixel structure shown in
Here, the case is described in which a bottom-gate transistor using an amorphous semiconductor is used as the transistor. In the case where a transistor using an amorphous semiconductor is used, a liquid crystal display device can be formed at low cost by using a large substrate.
A liquid crystal display device includes a basic portion displaying images, which is called a liquid crystal panel. The liquid crystal panel is manufactured as follows: two processed substrates are attached to each other with a gap of several μm therebetween, and a liquid crystal material is injected into a space between the two substrates. In
The light-shielding film 10344 is not necessarily formed on the second substrate 10346. When the light-shielding film 10344 is not formed, the number of steps is reduced, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since a structure is simple, yield can be improved. On the other hand, when the light-shielding film 10344 is formed, a display device with little light leakage at the time of black display can be obtained.
The color filter 10345 is not necessarily formed on the second substrate 10346. When the color filter 10345 is not formed, the number of steps is reduced, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since a structure is simple, yield can be improved. Note that even when the color filter 10345 is not formed, a display device which can perform color display can be obtained by field sequential driving. On the other hand, needless to say, when the color filter 10345 is formed, a display device which can perform color display can be obtained.
Spherical spacers may be dispersed on the second substrate 10346 instead of forming the spacer 10347. When the spherical spacers are dispersed, the number of steps is reduced, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since a structure is simple, yield can be improved. On the other hand, when the spacer 10347 is formed, a distance between the two substrates can be uniform because a position of the spacer is not varied, so that a display device with little display unevenness can be obtained.
Subsequently, a process to be performed to the first substrate 10331 is described.
First, a first insulating film 10332 is formed over the first substrate 10331 by sputtering, a printing method, a coating method, or the like. The first insulating film 10332 has a function of preventing change in characteristics of the transistor due to an impurity from the substrate which affects a semiconductor layer. Note that the first insulating film 10332 is not necessarily formed.
Next, a first conductive layer 10333 is formed over the first insulating film 10332 by photolithography, a laser direct writing method, an inkjet method, or the like.
Next, a second insulating film 10334 is formed over the entire surface by sputtering, a printing method, a coating method, or the like. The second insulating film 10334 has a function of preventing change in characteristics of the transistor due to an impurity from the substrate which affects the semiconductor layer.
Next, a first semiconductor layer 10335 and a second semiconductor layer 10336 are formed. Note that the first semiconductor layer 10335 and the second semiconductor layer 10336 are formed sequentially and shapes thereof are processed at the same time.
Next, a second conductive layer 10337 is formed by photolithography, a laser direct writing method, an inkjet method, or the like. Note that as a method for etching which processes a shape of the second conductive layer 10337, dry etching is preferable. Note that as the second conductive layer 10337, a light-transmitting material may be used or a reflective material may be used.
Next, a channel region of the transistor is formed. Here, an example of a step thereof is described. The second semiconductor layer 10336 is etched by using the second conductive layer 10337 as a mask. Alternatively, the second semiconductor layer 10336 is etched by using a mask for processing the shape of the second conductive layer 10337. Then, the first conductive layer 10333 at a position where the second semiconductor layer 10336 is removed serves as the channel region of the transistor. Thus, the number of masks can be reduced, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced.
Next, a third insulating film 10338 is formed and a contact hole is selectively formed in the third insulating film 10338.
Next, a fourth conductive layer 10343 is formed by photolithography, a laser direct writing method, an inkjet method, or the like.
Next, a fourth insulating film 10349 is formed and a contact hole is selectively formed in the fourth insulating film 10349. Note that a surface of the fourth insulating film 10349 is preferably as even as possible. This is because alignment of the liquid crystal molecules are affected by unevenness of a surface with which the liquid crystal is in contact.
Next, a third conductive layer 10339 is formed by photolithography, a laser direct writing method, an inkjet method, or the like. Here, the third conductive layer 10339 is comb-shaped.
Next, a first alignment film 10340 is formed. Note that after the first alignment film 10340 is formed, rubbing may be performed so as to control the alignment of the liquid crystal molecules. Rubbing is a step of forming stripes on an alignment film by rubbing the alignment film with a cloth. By performing rubbing, the alignment film can have alignment properties.
The first substrate 10331 which is manufactured as described above and the second substrate 10346 on which the light-shielding film 10344, the color filter 10345, the spacer 10347, and the second alignment film 10342 are formed are attached to each other by a sealant with a gap of several μm therebetween. Then, liquid crystals 10341 which include the liquid crystal molecules 10348 are injected into a space between the two substrates. Therefore, a liquid crystal panel can be manufactured.
Here, materials which can be used for conductive layers or insulating films are described.
As the first insulating film 10102 in
As the first conductive layer 10103 in
As the second insulating film 10104 in
As the first semiconductor layer 10105 in
As the second semiconductor layer 10106 in
As a light-transmitting material of the second conductive layer 10107 and the third conductive layer 10109 in
As a reflective material of the second conductive layer 10107 and the third conductive layer 10109 in
As the third insulating film 10108 in
As the first alignment film 10110 in
Next, the pixel structure in the case where each liquid crystal mode and the transistor are combined is described with reference to a top plan view (a layout diagram) of the pixel.
Note that as a liquid crystal mode, a TN (twisted nematic) mode, an IPS (in-plane-switching) mode, an FFS (fringe field switching) mode, an MVA (multi-domain vertical alignment) mode, a PVA (patterned vertical alignment) mode, an ASM (axially symmetric aligned micro-cell) mode, an OCB (optical compensated birefringence) mode, an FLC (ferroelectric liquid crystal) mode, an AFLC (antiferroelectric liquid crystal) mode, or the like can be used.
As the transistor, a thin film transistor (a TFT) including a non-single crystalline semiconductor film typified by amorphous silicon, polycrystalline silicon, microcrystalline (also referred to as semi-amorphous) silicon, or the like can be used.
As a structure of the transistor, a top-gate structure, a bottom-gate structure, or the like can be used. A channel-etched transistor, a channel-protective transistor, or the like can be used as a bottom-gate transistor.
The pixel shown in
The scan line 10401 has a function of transmitting a signal (a scan signal) to the pixel. The image signal line 10402 has a function for transmitting a signal (an image signal) to the pixel. Note that since the scan line 10401 and the image signal line 10402 are arranged in matrix, they are formed of conductive layers in different layers. Note also that a semiconductor layer may be provided at an intersection of the scan line 10401 and the image signal line 10402. Thus, intersection capacitance between the scan line 10401 and the image signal line 10402 can be reduced.
The capacitor line 10403 is provided in parallel to the pixel electrode 10405. A portion where the capacitor line 10403 and the pixel electrode 10405 overlap with each other corresponds to the pixel capacitor 10406. Note that part of the capacitor line 10403 is extended along the image signal line 10402 so as to surround the image signal line 10402. Thus, crosstalk can be reduced. Crosstalk is a phenomenon in which a potential of an electrode, which should hold the potential, is changed in accordance with change in potential of the image signal line 10402. Note also that intersection capacitance can be reduced by providing a semiconductor layer between the capacitor line 10403 and the image signal line 10402. Note also that the capacitor line 10403 is formed of a material which is similar to that of the scan line 10401.
The transistor 10404 has a function as a switch which turns on the image signal line 10402 and the pixel electrode 10405. Note that one of a source region and a drain region of the transistor 10404 is provided so as to be surrounded by the other of the source region and the drain region of the transistor 10404. Thus, the channel width of the transistor 10404 increases, so that switching capability can be improved. Note also that a gate electrode of the transistor 10404 is provided so as to surround the semiconductor layer.
The pixel electrode 10405 is electrically connected to one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the transistor 10404. The pixel electrode 10405 is an electrode for applying signal voltage which is transmitted by the image signal line 10402 to a liquid crystal element. Note that the pixel electrode 10405 is rectangular. Thus, an aperture ratio can be improved. Note also that as the pixel electrode 10405, a light-transmitting material may be used or a reflective material may be used. Alternatively, the pixel electrode 10405 may be formed by combining a light-transmitting material and a reflective material.
The pixel shown in
The scan line 10501 has a function of transmitting a signal (a scan signal) to the pixel. The image signal line 10502 has a function for transmitting a signal (an image signal) to the pixel. Note that since the scan line 10501 and the image signal line 10502 are arranged in matrix, they are formed of conductive layers in different layers. Note also that a semiconductor layer may be provided at an intersection of the scan line 10501 and the image signal line 10502. Thus, intersection capacitance between the scan line 10501 and the image signal line 10502 can be reduced.
The capacitor line 10503 is provided in parallel to the pixel electrode 10505. A portion where the capacitor line 10503 and the pixel electrode 10505 overlap with each other corresponds to the pixel capacitor 10506. Note that part of the capacitor line 10503 is extended along the image signal line 10502 so as to surround the image signal line 10502. Thus, crosstalk can be reduced. Crosstalk is a phenomenon in which a potential of an electrode, which should hold the potential, is changed in accordance with change in potential of the image signal line 10502. Note also that intersection capacitance can be reduced by providing a semiconductor layer between the capacitor line 10503 and the image signal line 10502. Note also that the capacitor line 10503 is formed of a material which is similar to that of the scan line 10501.
The transistor 10504 has a function as a switch which turns on the image signal line 10502 and the pixel electrode 10505. Note that one of a source region and a drain region of the transistor 10504 is provided so as to be surrounded by the other of the source region and the drain region of the transistor 10504. Thus, the channel width of the transistor 10504 increases, so that switching capability can be improved. Note also that a gate electrode of the transistor 10504 is provided so as to surround the semiconductor layer.
The pixel electrode 10505 is electrically connected to one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the transistor 10504. The pixel electrode 10505 is an electrode for applying signal voltage which is transmitted by the image signal line 10502 to a liquid crystal element. Note that the pixel electrode 10505 is rectangular. Thus, an aperture ratio can be improved. Note also that as the pixel electrode 10505, a light-transmitting material may be used or a reflective material may be used. Alternatively, the pixel electrode 10505 may be formed by combining a light-transmitting material and a reflective material.
The alignment control projection 10507 is formed on a counter substrate. The alignment control projection 10507 has a function of aligning liquid crystal molecules radially. Note that a shape of the alignment control projection 10507 is not particularly limited. For example, the alignment control projection 10507 may be a dogleg shape. Thus, a plurality of regions having different alignment of the liquid crystal molecules can be formed, so that a viewing angle can be improved.
The pixel shown in
The scan line 10511 has a function of transmitting a signal (a scan signal) to the pixel. The image signal line 10512 has a function for transmitting a signal (an image signal) to the pixel. Note that since the scan line 10511 and the image signal line 10512 are arranged in matrix, they are formed of conductive layers in different layers. Note also that a semiconductor layer may be provided at an intersection of the scan line 10511 and the image signal line 10512. Thus, intersection capacitance between the scan line 10511 and the image signal line 10512 can be reduced.
The capacitor line 10513 is provided in parallel to the pixel electrode 10515. A portion where the capacitor line 10513 and the pixel electrode 10515 overlap with each other corresponds to the pixel capacitor 10516. Note that part of the capacitor line 10513 is extended along the image signal line 10512 so as to surround the image signal line 10512. Thus, crosstalk can be reduced. Crosstalk is a phenomenon in which a potential of an electrode, which should hold the potential, is changed in accordance with change in potential of the image signal line 10512. Note also that intersection capacitance can be reduced by providing a semiconductor layer between the capacitor line 10513 and the image signal line 10512. Note also that the capacitor line 10513 is formed of a material which is similar to that of the scan line 10511.
The transistor 10514 has a function as a switch which turns on the image signal line 10512 and the pixel electrode 10515. Note that one of a source region and a drain region of the transistor 10514 is provided so as to be surrounded by the other of the source region and the drain region of the transistor 10514. Thus, the channel width of the transistor 10514 increases, so that switching capability can be improved. Note also that a gate electrode of the transistor 10514 is provided so as to surround the semiconductor layer.
The pixel electrode 10515 is electrically connected to one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the transistor 10514. The pixel electrode 10515 is an electrode for applying signal voltage which is transmitted by the image signal line 10512 to a liquid crystal element. Note that the pixel electrode 10515 has a shape which is formed in accordance with a shape of the electrode cutout portion 10517. Specifically, the pixel electrode 10515 has a shape in which a portion where the pixel electrode 10515 is cut is formed in a portion where the electrode cutout portion 10517 is not formed. Thus, since a plurality of regions having different alignment of the liquid crystal molecules can be formed, a viewing angle can be improved. Note also that as the pixel electrode 10515, a light-transmitting material or a reflective material may be used. Alternatively, the pixel electrode 10515 may be formed by combining a light-transmitting material and a reflective material.
The pixel shown in
The scan line 10601 has a function of transmitting a signal (a scan signal) to the pixel. The image signal line 10602 has a function of transmitting a signal (an image signal) to the pixel. Note that since the scan line 10601 and the image signal line 10602 are arranged in matrix, they are formed of conductive layers in different layers. Note also that a semiconductor layer may be provided at an intersection of the scan line 10601 and the image signal line 10602. Thus, intersection capacitance between the scan line 10601 and the image signal line 10602 can be reduced. Note also that the image signal line 10602 is formed in accordance with a shape of the pixel electrode 10605.
The common electrode 10603 is provided in parallel to the pixel electrode 10605. The common electrode 10603 is an electrode for generating a lateral electric field. Note that the common electrode 10603 is bent comb-shaped. Note also that part of the common electrode 10603 is extended along the image signal line 10602 so as to surround the image signal line 10602. Thus, crosstalk can be reduced. Crosstalk is a phenomenon in which a potential of an electrode, which should hold the potential, is changed in accordance with change in potential of the image signal line 10602. Note also that intersection capacitance can be reduced by providing a semiconductor layer between the common electrode 10603 and the image signal line 10602. Part of the common electrode 10603, which is provided in parallel to the scan line 10601, is formed of a material which is similar to that of the scan line 10601. Part of the common electrode 10603, which is provided in parallel to the pixel electrode 10605, is formed of a material which is similar to that of the pixel electrode 10605.
The transistor 10604 has a function as a switch which turns on the image signal line 10602 and the pixel electrode 10605. Note that one of a source region and a drain region of the transistor 10604 is provided so as to be surrounded by the other of the source region and the drain region of the transistor 10604. Thus, the channel width of the transistor 10604 increases, so that switching capability can be improved. Note also that a gate electrode of the transistor 10604 is provided so as to surround the semiconductor layer.
The pixel electrode 10605 is electrically connected to one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the transistor 10604. The pixel electrode 10605 is an electrode for applying signal voltage which is transmitted by the image signal line 10602 to a liquid crystal element. Note that the pixel electrode 10605 is bent comb-shaped. Thus, a lateral electric field can be applied to liquid crystal molecules. In addition, since a plurality of regions having different alignment of the liquid crystal molecules can be formed, a viewing angle can be improved. Note also that as the pixel electrode 10605, a light-transmitting material or a reflective material may be used. Alternatively, the pixel electrode 10605 may be formed by combining a light-transmitting material and a reflective material.
Note that a comb-shaped portion in the common electrode 10603 and the pixel electrode 10605 may be formed of different conductive layers. For example, the comb-shaped portion in the common electrode 10603 may be formed of a conductive layer which is the same as that of the scan line 10601 or the image signal line 10602. Similarly, the pixel electrode 10605 may be formed of a conductive layer which is the same as that of the scan line 10601 or the image signal line 10602.
The pixel shown in
The scan line 10611 has a function of transmitting a signal (a scan signal) to the pixel. The image signal line 10612 has a function of transmitting a signal (an image signal) to the pixel. Note that since the scan line 10611 and the image signal line 10612 are arranged in matrix, they are formed of conductive layers in different layers. Note also that a semiconductor layer may be provided at an intersection of the scan line 10611 and the image signal line 10612. Thus, intersection capacitance between the scan line 10611 and the image signal line 10612 can be reduced. Note also that the image signal line 10612 is formed in accordance with a shape of the pixel electrode 10615.
The common electrode 10613 is formed uniformly below the pixel electrode 10615 and below and between the pixel electrodes 10615. Note that as the common electrode 10613, a light-transmitting material or a reflective material may be used. Alternatively, the common electrode 10613 may be formed by combining a material in which a light-transmitting material and a reflective material.
The transistor 10614 has a function as a switch which turns on the image signal line 10612 and the pixel electrode 10615. Note that one of a source region and a drain region of the transistor 10614 is provided so as to be surrounded by the other of the source region and the drain region of the transistor 10614. Thus, the channel width of the transistor 10614 increases, so that switching capability can be improved. Note also that a gate electrode of the transistor 10614 is provided so as to surround the semiconductor layer.
The pixel electrode 10615 is electrically connected to one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the transistor 10614. The pixel electrode 10615 is an electrode for applying signal voltage which is transmitted by the image signal line 10612 to a liquid crystal element. Note that the pixel electrode 10615 is bent comb-shaped. The comb-shaped pixel electrode 10615 is provided to be closer to a liquid crystal layer than a uniform portion of the common electrode 10613. Thus, a lateral electric field can be applied to liquid crystal molecules. In addition, a plurality of regions having different alignment of the liquid crystal molecules can be formed, so that a viewing angle can be improved. Note also that as the pixel electrode 10615, a light-transmitting material or a reflective material may be used. Alternatively, the pixel electrode 10615 may be formed by combining a light-transmitting material and a reflective material.
Although this embodiment mode is described with reference to various drawings, the contents (or may be part of the contents) described in each drawing can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with the contents (or may be part of the contents) described in another drawing. Further, even more drawings can be formed by combining each part with another part in the above-described drawings.
The contents (or may be part of the contents) described in each drawing of this embodiment mode can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with the contents (or may be part of the contents) described in a drawing in another embodiment mode. Further, even more drawings can be formed by combining each part with part of another embodiment mode in the drawings of this embodiment mode.
This embodiment mode shows an example of an embodied case of the contents (or may be part of the contents) described in other embodiment modes, an example of slight transformation thereof, an example of partial modification thereof, an example of improvement thereof, an example of detailed description thereof, an application example thereof, an example of related part thereof, or the like. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiment modes can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment mode.
Embodiment Mode 6In this embodiment mode, a peripheral portion of a liquid crystal panel is described.
The backlight unit 20101 includes a diffusion plate 20102, a light guide plate 20103, a reflection plate 20104, a lamp reflector 20105, and a light source 20106.
The light source 20106 has a function of emitting light as necessary. For example, as the light source 20106, a cold cathode fluorescent lamp, a hot cathode fluorescent lamp, a light-emitting diode, an inorganic EL element, an organic EL element, or the like is used. The lamp reflector 20105 has a function of efficiently guiding fluorescence from the light source 20106 to the light guide plate 20103. The light guide plate 20103 has a function of guiding light to the entire surface by total reflection of fluorescence. The diffusion plate 20102 has a function of reducing variations in brightness. The reflection plate 20104 has a function of reflecting light which is leaked from the light guide plate 20103 downward (a direction which is opposite to the liquid crystal panel 20107) to be reused.
A control circuit for controlling luminance of the light source 20106 is connected to the backlight unit 20101. By using this control circuit, luminance of the light source 20106 can be controlled.
A backlight unit 20201 shown in
A backlight unit 20211 shown in
Since luminance of light-emitting diodes is high, a structure using light-emitting diodes is suitable for a large display device. In addition, since light-emitting diodes are excellent in color reproductivity, an arrangement area can be reduced. Therefore, a frame of a display device can be narrowed.
Note that in the case where light-emitting diodes are mounted on a large display device, the light-emitting diodes can be provided on a back side of the substrate. The light-emitting diodes of R, G, and B are sequentially provided at a predetermined interval. By providing the light-emitting diodes, color reproductivity can be improved.
A backlight unit 20221 shown in
Since luminance of light-emitting diodes is high, a structure using light-emitting diodes is suitable for a large display device. In addition, since light-emitting diodes are excellent in color reproductivity, an arrangement area can be reduced. Therefore, a frame of a display device can be narrowed.
By sequentially making the light-emitting diodes of R, G, and B emit light in accordance with time, color display can be performed. This is a so-called field sequential mode.
In addition, a light-emitting diode which emits white light can be combined with the light-emitting diodes (LEDs) 20223, the light-emitting diodes (LEDs) 20224, and the light-emitting diodes (LEDs) 20225 of R, G, and B.
Note that in the case where light-emitting diodes are mounted on a large display device, the light-emitting diodes can be provided on a back side of the substrate. The light-emitting diodes of R, G, and B are sequentially provided at a predetermined interval. By providing the light-emitting diodes, color reproductivity can be improved.
A backlight unit 20231 shown in
Since luminance of light-emitting diodes is high, a structure using light-emitting diodes is suitable for a large display device. In addition, since light-emitting diodes are excellent in color reproductivity, an arrangement area can be reduced. Therefore, a frame of a display device can be narrowed.
By sequentially making the light-emitting diodes of R, G, and B emit light in accordance with time, color display can be performed. This is a so-called field sequential mode.
In addition, a light-emitting diode which emits white light can be combined with the light-emitting diodes (LEDs) 20233, the light-emitting diodes (LEDs) 20234, and the light-emitting diodes (LEDs) 20235 of R, G, and B.
Note that in the case where light-emitting diodes are mounted on a large display device, the light-emitting diodes can be provided on a back side of the substrate. The light-emitting diodes of R, G, and B are sequentially provided at a predetermined interval. By providing the light-emitting diodes, color reproductivity can be improved.
A backlight unit 20500 includes a diffusion plate 20501, a light-shielding plate 20502, a lamp reflector 20503, and a light source 20504. In addition, a reference numeral 20505 denotes a liquid crystal panel.
The light source 20504 has a function of emitting light as necessary. For example, as the light source 20505, a cold cathode fluorescent lamp, a hot cathode fluorescent lamp, a light-emitting diode, an inorganic EL element, an organic EL element, or the like is used. The lamp reflector 20503 has a function of efficiently guiding fluorescence from the light source 20504 to the diffusion plate 20501 and the light-shielding plate 20502. The light-shielding plate 20502 has a function of reducing variations in brightness by shielding much light as light becomes intense in accordance with provision of the light source 20504. The diffusion plate 20501 also has a function of reducing variations in brightness.
A control circuit for controlling luminance of the light source 20504 is connected to the backlight unit 20501. By using this control circuit, luminance of the light source 20504 can be controlled.
A backlight unit 20510 includes a diffusion plate 20511; a light-shielding plate 20512; a lamp reflector 20513; and a light source (R) 20514a, a light source (G) 20514b, and a light source (B) 20514c of R, G, and B. In addition, a reference numeral 20515 denotes a liquid crystal panel.
Each of the light source (R) 20514a, the light source (G) 20514b, and the light source (B) 20514c of R, G, and B has a function of emitting light as necessary. For example, as each of the light source (R) 20514a, the light source (G) 20514b, and the light source (B) 20514c, a cold cathode fluorescent lamp, a hot cathode fluorescent lamp, a light-emitting diode, an inorganic EL element, an organic EL element, or the like is used. The lamp reflector 20513 has a function of efficiently guiding fluorescence from the light sources 20514a to 20514c to the diffusion plate 20511 and the light-shielding plate 20512. The light-shielding plate 20512 has a function of reducing variations in brightness by shielding much light as light becomes intense in accordance with provision of the light sources 20514a to 20514c. The diffusion plate 20511 also has a function of reducing variations in brightness.
A control circuit for controlling luminance of the light source (R) 20514a, the light source (G) 20514b, and the light source (B) 20514c of R, G, and B is connected to the backlight unit 20511. By using this control circuit, luminance of the light source (R) 20514a, the light source (G) 20514b, and the light source (B) 20514c of R, G, and B can be controlled.
A polarizing film 20300 includes a protective film 20301, a substrate film 20302, a PVA polarizing film 20303, a substrate film 20304, an adhesive layer 20305, and a mold release film 20306.
The PVA polarizing film 20303 has a function of generating light in only a certain vibration direction (linear polarized light). Specifically, the PVA polarizing film 20303 includes molecules (polarizers) in which lengthwise electron density and widthwise electron density are greatly different from each other. The PVA polarizing film 20303 can generate linear polarized light by uniforming directions of the molecules in which lengthwise electron density and widthwise electron density are greatly different from each other.
For example, a high molecular film of polyvinyl alcohol is doped with an iodine compound and a PVA film is pulled in a certain direction, so that a film in which iodine molecules are aligned in a certain direction can be obtained as the PVA polarizing film 20303. In this film, light which is parallel to a major axis of the iodine molecule is absorbed by the iodine molecule. Note that a dichroism dye may be used instead of iodine for high durability use and high heat resistance use. Note also that it is preferable that the dye be used for a liquid crystal display device which needs to have durability and heat resistance, such as an in-car LCD or an LCD for a projector.
When the PVA polarizing film 20303 is sandwiched by films to be base materials (the substrate film 20302 and the substrate film 20304) from both sides, reliability can be improved. Note that the PVA polarizing film 20303 may be sandwiched by triacetylcellulose (TAC) films with high transparency and high durability. Note also that each of the substrate films and the TAC films function as protective films of polarizer included in the PVA polarizing film 20303.
The adhesive layer 20305 which is to be attached to a glass substrate of the liquid crystal panel is attached to one of the substrate films (the substrate film 20304). Note that the adhesive layer 20305 is formed by applying an adhesive to one of the substrate films (the substrate film 20304). The mold release film 20306 (a separate film) is provided to the adhesive layer 20305.
The protective film 20301 is provided to the other one of the substrates films (the substrate film 20302).
A hard coating scattering layer (an anti-glare layer) may be provided on a surface of the polarizing film 20300. Since the surface of the hard coating scattering layer has minute unevenness formed by AG treatment and has an anti-glare function which scatters external light, reflection of external light in the liquid crystal panel can be prevented. Surface reflection can also be prevented.
Note also that a treatment in which plurality of optical thin film layers having different refractive indexes are layered (also referred to as anti-reflection treatment or AR treatment) may be performed on the surface of the polarizing film 20300. The plurality of layered optical thin film layers having different refractive indexes can reduce reflectivity on the surface by an interference effect of light.
In a pixel portion 20405, signal lines 20412 which are extended from a signal line driver circuit 20403 are provided. In addition, in the pixel portion 20405, scan lines 20410 which are extended from a scan line driver circuit 20404 are also provided. In addition, a plurality of pixels are arranged in matrix in cross regions of the signal lines 20412 and the scan lines 20410. Note that each of the plurality of pixels includes a switching element. Therefore, voltage for controlling inclination of liquid crystal molecules can be separately input to each of the plurality of pixels. A structure in which a switching element is provided in each cross region in this manner is referred to as an active matrix type. Note also that the present invention is not limited to such an active matrix type and a structure of a passive matrix type may be used. Since the passive matrix type does not have a switching element in each pixel, a process is simple.
A driver circuit portion 20408 includes a control circuit 20402, the signal line driver circuit 20403, and the scan line driver circuit 20404. An image signal 20401 is input to the control circuit 20402. The signal line driver circuit 20403 and the scan line driver circuit 20404 are controlled by the control circuit 20402 in accordance with this image signal 20401. That is, the control circuit 20402 inputs a control signal to each of the signal line driver circuit 20403 and the scan line driver circuit 20404. Then, in accordance with this control signal, the signal line driver circuit 20403 inputs a video signal to each of the signal lines 20412 and the scan line driver circuit 20404 inputs a scan signal to each of the scan lines 20410. Then, the switching element included in the pixel is selected in accordance with the scan signal and the video signal is input to a pixel electrode of the pixel.
Note that the control circuit 20402 also controls a power source 20407 in accordance with the image signal 20401. The power source 20407 includes a unit for supplying power to a lighting unit 20406. As the lighting unit 20406, an edge-light type backlight unit or a direct-type backlight unit can be used. Note also that a front light may be used as the lighting unit 20406. A front light corresponds to a plate-like lighting unit including a luminous body and a light conducting body, which is attached to the front surface side of a pixel portion and illuminates the whole area. By using such a lighting unit, the pixel portion can be uniformly illuminated at low power consumption.
As shown in
As shown in
Note that in this embodiment mode, a known liquid crystal panel can be used for the liquid crystal panel. For example, a structure in which a liquid crystal layer is sealed between two substrates can be used as the liquid crystal panel. A transistor, a capacitor, a pixel electrode, an alignment film, or the like is formed over one of the substrates. A polarizing plate, a retardation plate, or a prism sheet may be provided on the surface opposite to a top surface of the one of the substrates. A color filter, a black matrix, a counter electrode, an alignment film, or the like is provided on the other one of the substrates. A polarizing plate or a retardation plate may be provided on the surface opposite to a top surface of the other one of the substrates. The color filter and the black matrix may be formed over the top surface of the one of the substrates. Note also that three-dimensional display can be performed by providing a slit (a grid) on the top surface side of the one of the substrates or the surface opposite to the top surface side of the one of the substrates.
Each of the polarizing plate, the retardation plate, and the prism sheet can be provided between the two substrates. Alternatively, each of the polarizing plate, the retardation plate, and the prism sheet can be integrated with one of the two substrates.
Although this embodiment mode is described with reference to various drawings, the contents (or may be part of the contents) described in each drawing can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with the contents (or may be part of the contents) described in another drawing. Further, even more drawings can be formed by combining each part with another part in the above-described drawings.
The contents (or may be part of the contents) described in each drawing of this embodiment mode can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with the contents (or may be part of the contents) described in a drawing in another embodiment mode. Further, even more drawings can be formed by combining each part with part of another embodiment mode in the drawings of this embodiment mode.
This embodiment mode shows an example of an embodied case of the contents (or may be part of the contents) described in other embodiment modes, an example of slight transformation thereof, an example of partial modification thereof, an example of improvement thereof, an example of detailed description thereof, an application example thereof, an example of related part thereof, or the like. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiment modes can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment mode.
Embodiment Mode 7In this embodiment mode, a driving method of a display device is described. In particular, a driving method of a liquid crystal display device is described.
First, overdriving is described with reference to
Overdriving is a technique for increasing this response speed. Specifically, this is a method as follows: first, Vo which is larger voltage than Vi is applied to the element for a certain time to increase response speed of the element and output luminance is made close to the intended output luminance Lo, and then, the input voltage is returned to Vi. The input voltage and the output luminance at this time are as shown by input voltage 30122 and output voltage 30124, respectively. In the graph of the output luminance 30124, time for reaching the intended output luminance Lo is shorter than that of the output luminance 30123.
Note that although the case where output luminance is changed positively with respect to input voltage is described in
A circuit for realizing such driving is described with reference to
First, the input image signal 30131 is input to the encoding circuit 30101 and encoded. That is, the input image signal 30131 is converted from an analog signal into a digital signal with an appropriate bit number. After that, the converted digital signal is input to each of the frame memory 30102 and the correction circuit 30103. An image signal of the previous frame which is held in the frame memory 30102 is input to the correction circuit 30103 at the same time. Then, in the correction circuit 30103, an image signal corrected using an image signal of a frame and the image signal of the previous frame is output in accordance with a numeric value table which is prepared in advance. At this time, an output switching signal 30133 may be input to the correction circuit 30103 and the corrected image signal and the image signal of the frame may be switched to be output. Next, the corrected image signal or the image signal of the frame is input to the D/A converter circuit 30104. Then, the output image signal 30132 which is an analog signal having a value in accordance with the corrected image signal or the image signal of the frame is output. In this manner, overdriving is realized.
Next, the case where the input image signal 30131 is a signal having a digital value and the output image signal 30132 is also a signal having a digital value is described with reference to
First, the input image signal 30131 is a digital signal and is input to each of the frame memory 30112 and the correction circuit 30113. An image signal of the previous frame which is held in the frame memory 30112 is input to the correction circuit 30113 at the same time. Then, in the correction circuit 30113, an image signal corrected using an image signal of a frame and the image signal of the previous frame is output in accordance with a numeric value table which is prepared in advance. At this time, the output switching signal 30133 may be input to the correction circuit 30113 and the corrected image signal and the image signal of the frame may be switched to be output. In this manner, overdriving is realized.
Note that the case where the input image signal 30131 is an analog signal and the output image signal 30132 is a digital signal is included in the overdriving circuit in this embodiment mode. At this time, it is only necessary to omit the D/A converter circuit 30104 from the circuit shown in
Driving which controls a potential of a common line is described with reference to
A gate electrode of the transistor 30201 is electrically connected to the scan line 30205; one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the transistor 30201 is electrically connected to the video signal line 30204; and the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 30201 is electrically connected to one of electrodes of the auxiliary capacitor 30202 and one of electrodes of the display element 30203. In addition, the other of the electrodes of the auxiliary capacitor 30202 is electrically connected to the common line 30206.
First, in each of pixels selected by the scan line 30205, voltage corresponding to an image signal is applied to the display element 30203 and the auxiliary capacitor 30202 through the video signal line 30204 because the transistor 30201 is turned on. At this time, when the image signal is a signal which makes all of pixels connected to the common line 30206 display a minimum gray scale or when the image signal is a signal which makes all of the pixels connected to the common line 30206 display a maximum gray scale, it is not necessary that the image signal be written in each of the pixels through the video signal line 30204. Voltage applied to the display element 30203 can be changed by changing a potential of the common line 30206 instead of writing the image signal through the video signal line 30204.
Next,
A gate electrode of the transistor 30211 is electrically connected to the scan line 30215; one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the transistor 30211 is electrically connected to the video signal line 30214; and the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 30211 is electrically connected to one of electrodes of the auxiliary capacitor 30212 and one of electrodes of the display element 30213. In addition, the other of the electrodes of the auxiliary capacitor 30212 is electrically connected to the first common line 30216. Further, in a pixel which is adjacent to the pixel, the other of the electrodes of the auxiliary capacitor 30212 is electrically connected to the second common line 30217.
In the pixel circuits shown in
A scanning backlight is described with reference to
Change in luminance of each of the cold cathode fluorescent lamps in scanning is described with reference to
By performing driving as in
Note that an LED may be used as a light source of the scanning backlight. The scanning backlight in that case is as shown in
Note that when the LED is used as the light source of the backlight, driving can be performed by changing luminance as shown in
Although this embodiment mode is described with reference to various drawings, the contents (or may be part of the contents) described in each drawing can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with the contents (or may be part of the contents) described in another drawing. Further, even more drawings can be formed by combining each part with another part in the above-described drawings.
The contents (or may be part of the contents) described in each drawing of this embodiment mode can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with the contents (or may be part of the contents) described in a drawing in another embodiment mode. Further, even more drawings can be formed by combining each part with part of another embodiment mode in the drawings of this embodiment mode.
This embodiment mode shows an example of an embodied case of the contents (or may be part of the contents) described in other embodiment modes, an example of slight transformation thereof, an example of partial modification thereof, an example of improvement thereof, an example of detailed description thereof, an application example thereof, an example of related part thereof, or the like. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiment modes can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment mode.
Embodiment Mode 8In this embodiment mode, a pixel structure and an operation of a pixel which can be applied to a liquid crystal display device are described.
In this embodiment mode, as an operation mode of a liquid crystal element, a TN (twisted nematic) mode, an IPS (in-plane-switching) mode, an FFS (fringe field switching) mode, an MVA (multi-domain vertical alignment) mode, a PVA (patterned vertical alignment) mode, an ASM (axially symmetric aligned micro-cell) mode, an OCB (optical compensated birefringence) mode, an FLC (ferroelectric liquid crystal) mode, an AFLC (antiferroelectric liquid crystal) mode, or the like can be used.
A pixel 40100 includes a transistor 40101, a liquid crystal element 40102, and a capacitor 40103. A gate electrode of the transistor 40101 is connected to a wiring 40105. A first electrode of the transistor 40101 is connected to a wiring 40104. A second electrode of the transistor 40101 is connected to a first electrode of the liquid crystal element 40102 and a first electrode of the capacitor 40103. A second electrode of the liquid crystal element 40102 corresponds to a counter electrode 40107. A second electrode of the capacitor 40103 is connected to a wiring 40106.
The wiring 40104 functions as a signal line. The wiring 40105 functions as a scan line. The wiring 40106 functions as a capacitor line. The transistor 40101 functions as a switch. The capacitor 40103 functions as a storage capacitor.
It is only necessary that the transistor 40101 function as a switch, and the transistor 40101 may be a P-channel transistor or an N-channel transistor.
A video signal is input to the wiring 40104. A scan signal is input to the wiring 40105. A constant potential is supplied to the wiring 40106. Note that the scan signal is an H-level or L-level digital voltage signal. In the case where the transistor 40101 is an N-channel transistor, an H level of the scan signal is a potential which can turn on the transistor 40101 and an L level of the scan signal is a potential which can turn off the transistor 40101. Alternatively, in the case where the transistor 40101 is a P-channel transistor, the H level of the scan signal is a potential which can turn off the transistor 40101 and the L level of the scan signal is a potential which can turn on the transistor 40101. Note that the video signal has analog voltage. The video signal is a potential which is lower than the H level of the scan signal and higher than the L level of the scan signal. Note also that the constant potential supplied to the wiring 40106 is preferably equal to a potential of the counter electrode 40107.
Operations of the pixel 40100 are described by diving the whole operations into the case where the transistor 40101 is on and the case where the transistor 40101 is off.
In the case where the transistor 40101 is on, the wiring 40104 is electrically connected to the first electrode (a pixel electrode) of the liquid crystal element 40102 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40103. Therefore, the video signal is input to the first electrode (the pixel electrode) of the liquid crystal element 40102 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40103 from the wiring 40104 through the transistor 40101. In addition, the capacitor 40103 holds a potential difference between a potential of the video signal and the potential supplied to the wiring 40106.
In the case where the transistor 40101 is off, the wiring 40104 is not electrically connected to the first electrode (the pixel electrode) of the liquid crystal element 40102 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40103. Therefore, each of the first electrode of the liquid crystal element 40102 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40103 is set in a floating state. Since the capacitor 40103 holds the potential difference between the potential of the video signal and the potential supplied to the wiring 40106, each of the first electrode of the liquid crystal element 40102 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40103 holds a potential which is the same as or corresponds to the video signal. Note that the liquid crystal element 40102 has transmittance in accordance with the video signal.
A pixel 40110 includes a transistor 40111, a liquid crystal element 40112, and a capacitor 40113. A gate electrode of the transistor 40111 is connected to a wiring 40115. A first electrode of the transistor 40111 is connected to a wiring 40114. A second electrode of the transistor 40111 is connected to a first electrode of the liquid crystal element 40112 and a first electrode of the capacitor 40113. A second electrode of the liquid crystal element 40112 is connected to a wiring 40116. A second electrode of the capacitor 40113 is connected to the wiring 40116.
The wiring 40114 functions as a signal line. The wiring 40115 functions as a scan line. The wiring 40116 functions as a capacitor line. The transistor 40111 functions as a switch. The capacitor 40113 functions as a storage capacitor.
It is only necessary that the transistor 40111 function as a switch, and the transistor 40111 may be a P-channel transistor or an N-channel transistor.
A video signal is input to the wiring 40114. A scan signal is input to the wiring 40115. A constant potential is supplied to the wiring 40116. Note that the scan signal is an H-level or L-level digital voltage signal. In the case where the transistor 40111 is an N-channel transistor, an H level of the scan signal is a potential which can turn on the transistor 40111 and an L level of the scan signal is a potential which can turn off the transistor 40111. Alternatively, in the case where the transistor 40111 is a P-channel transistor, the H level of the scan signal is a potential which can turn off the transistor 40111 and the L level of the scan signal is a potential which can turn on the transistor 40111. Note that the video signal has analog voltage. The video signal is a potential which is lower than the H level of the scan signal and higher than the L level of the scan signal.
Operations of the pixel 40110 are described by diving the whole operations into the case where the transistor 40111 is on and the case where the transistor 40111 is off.
In the case where the transistor 40111 is on, the wiring 40114 is electrically connected to the first electrode (a pixel electrode) of the liquid crystal element 40112 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40113. Therefore, the video signal is input to the first electrode (the pixel electrode) of the liquid crystal element 40112 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40113 from the wiring 40114 through the transistor 40111. In addition, the capacitor 40113 holds a potential difference between a potential of the video signal and the potential supplied to the wiring 40116.
In the case where the transistor 40111 is off, the wiring 40114 is not electrically connected to the first electrode (the pixel electrode) of the liquid crystal element 40112 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40113. Therefore, each of the first electrode of the liquid crystal element 40112 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40113 is set in a floating state. Since the capacitor 40113 holds the potential difference between the potential of the video signal and the potential supplied to the wiring 40116, each of the first electrode of the liquid crystal element 40112 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40113 holds a potential which is the same as or corresponds to the video signal. Note that the liquid crystal element 40112 has transmittance in accordance with the video signal.
A pixel 40200 includes a transistor 40201, a liquid crystal element 40202, and a capacitor 40203. A gate electrode of the transistor 40201 is connected to a wiring 40205. A first electrode of the transistor 40201 is connected to a wiring 40204. A second electrode of the transistor 40201 is connected to a first electrode of the liquid crystal element 40202 and a first electrode of the capacitor 40203. A second electrode of the liquid crystal element 40202 corresponds to a counter electrode 40207. A second electrode of the capacitor 40203 is connected to a wiring which is the same as a wiring connected to a gate electrode of a transistor of the previous row.
A pixel 40210 includes a transistor 40211, a liquid crystal element 40212, and a capacitor 40213. A gate electrode of the transistor 40211 is connected to a wiring 40215. A first electrode of the transistor 40211 is connected to the wiring 40204. A second electrode of the transistor 40211 is connected to a first electrode of the liquid crystal element 40212 and a first electrode of the capacitor 40213. A second electrode of the liquid crystal element 40212 corresponds to the counter electrode 40207. A second electrode of the capacitor 40213 is connected to the wiring which is the same as the wiring connected to the gate electrode of the transistor of the previous row (the wiring 40205).
The wiring 40204 functions as a signal line. The wiring 40205 functions as a scan line of the N-th row. The wiring 40205 also functions as a capacitor line of the (N+1)th row. The transistor 40201 functions as a switch. The capacitor 40203 functions as a storage capacitor.
The wiring 40215 functions as a scan line of the (N+1)th row. The wiring 40215 also functions as a capacitor line of an (N+2)th row. The transistor 40211 functions as a switch. The capacitor 40213 functions as a storage capacitor.
It is only necessary that each of the transistor 40201 and the transistor 40211 function as a switch, and each of the transistor 40201 and the transistor 40211 may be a P-channel transistor or an N-channel transistor.
A video signal is input to the wiring 40204. A scan signal (of an N-th row) is input to the wiring 40205. A scan signal (of an (N+1)th row) is input to the wiring 40215.
The scan signal is an H-level or L-level digital voltage signal. In the case where the transistor 40201 (or the transistor 40211) is an N-channel transistor, an H level of the scan signal is a potential which can turn on the transistor 40201 (or the transistor 40211) and an L level of the scan signal is a potential which can turn off the transistor 40201 (or the transistor 40211). Alternatively, in the case where the transistor 40201 (or the transistor 40211) is a P-channel transistor, the H level of the scan signal is a potential which can turn off the transistor 40201 (or the transistor 40211) and the L level of the scan signal is a potential which can turn on the transistor 40201 (or the transistor 40211). Note that the video signal has analog voltage. The video signal is a potential which is lower than the H level of the scan signal and higher than the L level of the scan signal.
Operations of the pixel 40200 are described by diving the whole operations into the case where the transistor 40201 is on and the case where the transistor 40201 is off.
In the case where the transistor 40201 is on, the wiring 40204 is electrically connected to the first electrode (a pixel electrode) of the liquid crystal element 40202 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40203. Therefore, the video signal is input to the first electrode (the pixel electrode) of the liquid crystal element 40202 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40203 from the wiring 40204 through the transistor 40201. In addition, the capacitor 40203 holds a potential difference between a potential of the video signal and a potential supplied to the wiring which is the same as the wiring connected to the gate electrode of the transistor of the previous row.
In the case where the transistor 40201 is off, the wiring 40204 is not electrically connected to the first electrode (the pixel electrode) of the liquid crystal element 40202 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40203. Therefore, each of the first electrode of the liquid crystal element 40202 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40203 is set in a floating state. Since the capacitor 40203 holds the potential difference between the potential of the video signal and the potential of the wiring which is the same as the wiring connected to the gate electrode of the transistor of the previous row, each of the first electrode of the liquid crystal element 40202 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40203 holds a potential which is the same as or corresponds to the video signal. Note that the liquid crystal element 40202 has transmittance in accordance with the video signal.
Operations of the pixel 40210 are described by diving the whole operations into the case where the transistor 40211 is on and the case where the transistor 40211 is off.
In the case where the transistor 40211 is on, the wiring 40204 is electrically connected to the first electrode (a pixel electrode) of the liquid crystal element 40212 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40213. Therefore, the video signal is input to the first electrode (the pixel electrode) of the liquid crystal element 40212 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40213 from the wiring 40204 through the transistor 40211. In addition, the capacitor 40213 holds a potential difference between a potential of the video signal and a potential supplied to a wiring which is the same as the wiring connected to the gate electrode of the transistor of the previous row (the wiring 40205).
In the case where the transistor 40211 is off, the wiring 40214 is not electrically connected to the first electrode (the pixel electrode) of the liquid crystal element 40212 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40213. Therefore, each of the first electrode of the liquid crystal element 40212 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40213 is set in a floating state. Since the capacitor 40213holds the potential difference between the potential of the video signal and the potential of the wiring which is the same as the wiring connected to the gate electrode of the transistor of the previous row (the wiring 40215), each of the first electrode (the pixel electrode) of the liquid crystal element 40212 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40213 holds a potential which is the same as or corresponds to the video signal. Note that the liquid crystal element 40212 has transmittance in accordance with the video signal.
A pixel 40320 includes a subpixel 40300 and a subpixel 40310. Although the case in which the pixel 40320 includes two subpixels is described below, the pixel 40320 may include three or more subpixels.
The subpixel 40300 includes a transistor 40301, a liquid crystal element 40302, and a capacitor 40303. A gate electrode of the transistor 40301 is connected to a wiring 40305. A first electrode of the transistor 40301 is connected to a wiring 40304. A second electrode of the transistor 40301 is connected to a first electrode of the liquid crystal element 40302 and a first electrode of the capacitor 40303. A second electrode of the liquid crystal element 40302 corresponds to a counter electrode 40307. A second electrode of the capacitor 40303 is connected to a wiring 40306.
The subpixel 40310 includes a transistor 40311, a liquid crystal element 40312, and a capacitor 40313. A gate electrode of the transistor 40311 is connected to a wiring 40315. A first electrode of the transistor 40311 is connected to the wiring 40304. A second electrode of the transistor 40311 is connected to a first electrode of the liquid crystal element 40312 and a first electrode of the capacitor 40313. A second electrode of the liquid crystal element 40312 corresponds to the counter electrode 40307. A second electrode of the capacitor 40313 is connected to a wiring 40306.
The wiring 40304 functions as a signal line. Each of the wiring 40305 and the wiring 40315 functions as a scan line. The wiring 40306 functions as a capacitor line. Each of the transistor 40301 and the transistor 40311 functions as a switch. Each of the capacitor 40303 and the capacitor 40313 functions as a storage capacitor.
It is only necessary that each of the transistor 40301 and the transistor 40311 function as a switch, and each of the transistor 40301 and the transistor 40311 may be a P-channel transistor or an N-channel transistor.
A video signal is input to the wiring 40304. A scan signal is input to the wiring 40305 and the wiring 40315. A constant potential is supplied to the wiring 40306.
The scan signal is an H-level or L-level digital voltage signal. In the case where the transistor 40301 (or the transistor 40311) is an N-channel transistor, an H level of the scan signal is a potential which can turn on the transistor 40301 (or the transistor 40311) and an L level of the scan signal is a potential which can turn off the transistor 40301 (or the transistor 40311). Alternatively, in the case where the transistor 40301 (or the transistor 40311) is a P-channel transistor, the H level of the scan signal is a potential which can turn off the transistor 40301 (or the transistor 40311) and the L level of the scan signal is a potential which can turn on the transistor 40301 (or the transistor 40311). Note that the video signal has analog voltage. The video signal is a potential which is lower than the H level of the scan signal and higher than the L level of the scan signal. Note also that the constant potential supplied to the wiring 40306 is preferably equal to a potential of the counter electrode 40307.
Operations of the pixel 40320 are described by diving the whole operations into the case where the transistor 40301 is on and the transistor 40311 is off, the case where the transistor 40301 is off and the transistor 40311 is on, and the case where the transistor 40301 and the transistor 40311 are off.
In the case where the transistor 40301 is on and the transistor 40311 is off, the wiring 40304 is electrically connected to the first electrode (a pixel electrode) of the liquid crystal element 40302 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40303 in the subpixel 40300. Therefore, the video signal is input to the first electrode (the pixel electrode) of the liquid crystal element 40302 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40303 from the wiring 40304 through the transistor 40301. In addition, the capacitor 40303 holds a potential difference between a potential of the video signal and a potential supplied to the wiring 40306. At this time, the wiring 40304 is not electrically connected to the first electrode (the pixel electrode) of the liquid crystal element 40312 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40313 in the subpixel 40310. Therefore, the video signal is not input to the subpixel 40310.
In the case where the transistor 40301 is off and the transistor 40311 is on, the wiring 40304 is not electrically connected to the first electrode (the pixel electrode) of the liquid crystal element 40302 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40303 in the subpixel 40300. Therefore, each of the first electrode of the liquid crystal element 40302 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40303 is set in a floating state. Since the capacitor 40303 holds the potential difference between the potential of the video signal and the potential supplied to the wiring 40306, each of the first electrode of the liquid crystal element 40302 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40303 holds a potential which is the same as or corresponds to the video signal. At this time, the wiring 40304 is electrically connected to the first electrode (the pixel electrode) of the liquid crystal element 40312 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40313 in the subpixel 40310. Therefore, the video signal is input to the first electrode (the pixel electrode) of the liquid crystal element 40312 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40313 from the wiring 40304 through the transistor 40311. In addition, the capacitor 40313 holds a potential difference between a potential of the video signal and a potential supplied to the wiring 40306.
In the case where the transistor 40301 and the transistor 40311 are off, the wiring 40304 is not electrically connected to the first electrode (the pixel electrode) of the liquid crystal element 40302 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40303 in the subpixel 40300. Therefore, each of the first electrode of the liquid crystal element 40302 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40303 is set in a floating state. Since the capacitor 40303 holds the potential difference between the potential of the video signal and the potential supplied to the wiring 40306, each of the first electrode of the liquid crystal element 40302 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40303 holds a potential which is the same as or corresponds to the video signal. Note that the liquid crystal element 40302 has transmittance in accordance with the video signal. At this time, the wiring 40304 is not electrically connected to the first electrode (the pixel electrode) of the liquid crystal element 40312 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40313 similarly in the subpixel 40310. Therefore, each of the first electrode of the liquid crystal element 40312 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40313 is set in a floating state. Since the capacitor 40313 holds the potential difference between the potential of the video signal and the potential of the wiring 40306, each of the first electrode of the liquid crystal element 40312 and the first electrode of the capacitor 40313 holds a potential which is the same as or corresponds to the video signal. Note that the liquid crystal element 40312 has transmittance in accordance with the video signal.
A video signal input to the subpixel 40300 may be a value which is different from that of a video signal input to the subpixel 40310. In this case, the viewing angle can be widened because alignment of liquid crystal molecules of the liquid crystal element 40302 and alignment of liquid crystal molecules of the liquid crystal element 40312 can be varied from each other.
Although this embodiment mode is described with reference to various drawings, the contents (or may be part of the contents) described in each drawing can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with the contents (or may be part of the contents) described in another drawing. Further, even more drawings can be formed by combining each part with another part in the above-described drawings.
The contents (or may be part of the contents) described in each drawing of this embodiment mode can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with the contents (or may be part of the contents) described in a drawing in another embodiment mode. Further, even more drawings can be formed by combining each part with part of another embodiment mode in the drawings of this embodiment mode.
This embodiment mode shows an example of an embodied case of the contents (or may be part of the contents) described in other embodiment modes, an example of slight transformation thereof, an example of partial modification thereof, an example of improvement thereof, an example of detailed description thereof, an application example thereof, an example of related part thereof, or the like. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiment modes can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment mode.
Embodiment Mode 9In this embodiment mode, various liquid crystal modes are described.
First, various liquid crystal modes are described with reference to cross-sectional views.
A liquid crystal layer 50100 is held between a first substrate 50101 and a second substrate 50102 which are provided so as to be opposite to each other. A first electrode 50105 is formed on a top surface of the first substrate 50101. A second electrode 50106 is formed on a top surface of the second substrate 50102. A first polarizing plate 50103 is provided on a surface of the first substrate 50101, which does not face the liquid crystal layer. A second polarizing plate 50104 is provided on a surface of the second substrate 50102, which does not face the liquid crystal layer. Note that the first polarizing plate 50103 and the second polarizing plate 50104 are provided so as to be in a cross nicol state.
The first polarizing plate 50103 may be provided on the top surface of the first substrate 50101. The second polarizing plate 50104 may be provided on the top surface of the second substrate 50102.
It is only necessary that at least one of the first electrode 50105 and the second electrode 50106 have transparency (a transmissive or reflective liquid crystal display device). Alternatively, both the first electrode 50105 and the second electrode 50106 may have transparency, and part of one of the electrodes may have reflectivity (a semi-transmissive liquid crystal display device).
Note that by controlling voltage applied to the first electrode 50105 and the second electrode 50106, conditions of the liquid crystal molecules can be controlled. Therefore, since the amount of light emitted from the backlight passing through the substrate can be controlled, predetermined image display can be performed.
A liquid crystal display device having a structure shown in
It is only necessary that a known material be used for a liquid crystal material used for a TN mode.
A liquid crystal layer 50200 is held between a first substrate 50201 and a second substrate 50202 which are provided so as to be opposite to each other. A first electrode 50205 is formed on a top surface of the first substrate 50201. A second electrode 50206 is formed on a top surface of the second substrate 50202. A first polarizing plate 50203 is provided on a surface of the first substrate 50201, which does not face the liquid crystal layer. A second polarizing plate 50204 is provided on a surface of the second substrate 50202, which does not face the liquid crystal layer. Note that the first polarizing plate 50203 and the second polarizing plate 50204 are provided so as to be in a cross nicol state.
The first polarizing plate 50203 may be provided on the top surface of the first substrate 50201. The second polarizing plate 50204 may be provided on the top surface of the second substrate 50202.
It is only necessary that at least one of the first electrode 50205 and the second electrode 50206 have transparency (a transmissive or reflective liquid crystal display device). Alternatively, both the first electrode 50205 and the second electrode 50206 may have transparency, and part of one of the electrodes may have reflectivity (a semi-transmissive liquid crystal display device).
Note that by controlling voltage applied to the first electrode 50205 and the second electrode 50206, conditions of the liquid crystal molecules can be controlled. Therefore, since the amount of light emitted from the backlight passing through the substrate can be controlled, predetermined image display can be performed.
A liquid crystal display device having a structure shown in
It is only necessary that a known material be used for a liquid crystal material used for a VA mode.
A liquid crystal layer 50210 is held between a first substrate 50211 and a second substrate 50212 which are provided so as to be opposite to each other. A first electrode 50215 is formed on a top surface of the first substrate 50211. A second electrode 50216 is formed on a top surface of the second substrate 50212. A first protrusion 50217 for controlling alignment is formed on the first electrode 50215. A second protrusion 50218 for controlling alignment is formed over the second electrode 50216. A first polarizing plate 50213 is provided on a surface of the first substrate 50211, which does not face the liquid crystal layer A second polarizing plate 50214 is provided on a surface of the second substrate 50212, which does not face the liquid crystal layer. Note that the first polarizing plate 50213 and the second polarizing plate 50214 are provided so as to be in a cross nicol state.
The first polarizing plate 50213 may be provided on the top surface of the first substrate 50211. The second polarizing plate 50214 may be provided on the top surface of the second substrate 50212.
It is only necessary that at least one of the first electrode 50215 and the second electrode 50216 have transparency (a transmissive or reflective liquid crystal display device). Alternatively, both the first electrode 50215 and the second electrode 50216 may have transparency, and part of one of the electrodes may have reflectivity (a semi-transmissive liquid crystal display device).
Note that by controlling voltage applied to the first electrode 50215 and the second electrode 50216, conditions of the liquid crystal molecules can be controlled. Therefore, since the amount of light emitted from the backlight passing through the substrate can be controlled, predetermined image display can be performed.
A liquid crystal display device having a structure shown in
It is only necessary that a known material be used for a liquid crystal material used for an MVA mode.
A liquid crystal layer 50300 is held between a first substrate 50301 and a second substrate 50302 which are provided so as to be opposite to each other. A first electrode 50305 is formed on a top surface of the first substrate 50301. A second electrode 50306 is formed on a top surface of the second substrate 50302. A first polarizing plate 50303 is provided on a surface of the first substrate 50301, which does not face the liquid crystal layer 50300. A second polarizing plate 50304 is provided on a surface of the second substrate 50302, which does not face the liquid crystal layer 50300. Note that the first polarizing plate 50303 and the second polarizing plate 50304 are provided so as to be in a cross nicol state.
The first polarizing plate 50303 may be provided on the top surface of the first substrate 50301, i.e., may be provided between the first substrate 50301 and the liquid crystal layer. The second polarizing plate 50304 may be provided on the top surface of the second substrate 50302, i.e., may be provided between the second substrate 50302 and the liquid crystal layer.
It is only necessary that at least one of the first electrode 50305 and the second electrode 50306 have transparency (a transmissive or reflective liquid crystal display device). Alternatively, both the first electrode 50305 and the second electrode 50306 may have transparency, and part of one of the electrodes may have reflectivity (a semi-transmissive liquid crystal display device).
Note that by controlling voltage applied to the first electrode 50305 and the second electrode 50306, conditions of the liquid crystal molecules can be controlled. Therefore, since the amount of light emitted from the backlight passing through the substrate can be controlled, predetermined image display can be performed.
A liquid crystal display device having a structure shown in
It is only necessary that a known material be used for a liquid crystal material used for an OCB mode.
A liquid crystal layer 50310 is held between a first substrate 50311 and a second substrate 50312 which are provided so as to be opposite to each other. A first electrode 50315 is formed on a top surface of the first substrate 50311. A second electrode 50316 is formed on a top surface of the second substrate 50312. A first polarizing plate 50313 is provided on a surface of the first substrate 50311, which does not face the liquid crystal layer. A second polarizing plate 50314 is provided on a surface of the second substrate 50312, which does not face the liquid crystal layer. Note that the first polarizing plate 50313 and the second polarizing plate 50314 are provided so as to be in a cross nicol state.
The first polarizing plate 50313 may be provided on the top surface of the first substrate 50311. The second polarizing plate 50314 may be provided on the top surface of the second substrate 50312.
It is only necessary that at least one of the first electrode 50315 and the second electrode 50316 have transparency (a transmissive or reflective liquid crystal display device). Alternatively, both the first electrode 50315 and the second electrode 50316 may have transparency, and part of one of the electrodes may have reflectivity (a semi-transmissive liquid crystal display device).
Note that by controlling voltage applied to the first electrode 50315 and the second electrode 50316, conditions of the liquid crystal molecules can be controlled. Therefore, since the amount of light emitted from the backlight passing through the substrate can be controlled, predetermined image display can be performed.
A liquid crystal display device having a structure shown in
It is only necessary that a known material be used for a liquid crystal material used for an FLC mode or an AFLC mode.
A liquid crystal layer 50400 is held between a first substrate 50401 and a second substrate 50402 which are provided so as to be opposite to each other. A first electrode 50405 and a second electrode 50406 are formed on a top surface of the second substrate 50402. A first polarizing plate 50403 is provided on a surface of the first substrate 50401, which does not face the liquid crystal layer. A second polarizing plate 50404 is provided on a surface of the second substrate 50402, which does not face the liquid crystal layer. Note that the first polarizing plate 50403 and the second polarizing plate 50404 are provided so as to be in a cross nicol state.
The first polarizing plate 50403 may be provided on the top surface of the first substrate 50401. The second polarizing plate 50404 may be provided on the top surface of the second substrate 50402.
Both the first electrode 50405 and the second electrode 50406 may have transparency (a transmissive liquid crystal display device). Alternatively, part of one of the first electrode 50405 and the second electrode 50406 may have reflectivity (a semi-transmissive liquid crystal display device).
Note that by controlling voltage applied to the first electrode 50405 and the second electrode 50406, conditions of the liquid crystal molecules can be controlled. Therefore, since the amount of light emitted from the backlight passing through the substrate can be controlled, predetermined image display can be performed.
A liquid crystal display device having a structure shown in
It is only necessary that a known material be used for a liquid crystal material used for an IPS mode.
A liquid crystal layer 50410 is held between a first substrate 50411 and a second substrate 50412 which are provided so as to be opposite to each other. A second electrode 50416 is formed on a top surface of the second substrate 50412. An insulating film 50417 is formed on a top surface of the second electrode 50416. A first electrode 50415 is formed over the insulating film 50417. A first polarizing plate 50413 is provided on a surface of the first substrate 50411, which does not face the liquid crystal layer 50410. A second polarizing plate 50414 is provided on a surface of the second substrate 50412, which does not face the liquid crystal layer 50410. Note that the first polarizing plate 50413 and the second polarizing plate 50414 are provided so as to be in a cross nicol state.
The first polarizing plate 50413 may be provided on the top surface of the first substrate 50411, i.e., may be provided between the first substrate 50411 and the liquid crystal layer. The second polarizing plate 50414 may be provided on the top surface of the second substrate 50412, i.e., may be provided between the second substrate 50412 and the liquid crystal layer.
It is only necessary that at least one of the first electrode 50415 and the second electrode 50416 have transparency (a transmissive or reflective liquid crystal display device). Alternatively, both the first electrode 50415 and the second electrode 50416 may have transparency, and part of one of the electrodes may have reflectivity (a semi-transmissive liquid crystal display device).
Note that by controlling voltage applied to the first electrode 50415 and the second electrode 50416, conditions of the liquid crystal molecules can be controlled. Therefore, since the amount of light emitted from the backlight passing through the substrate can be controlled, predetermined image display can be performed.
A liquid crystal display device having a structure shown in FIG; 57C or
It is only necessary that a known material be used for a liquid crystal material used for an FFS mode.
Next, various liquid crystal modes are described with reference to top plan views.
Opening portions of the second electrodes (50502a, 50502b, and 50502c) function like protrusions.
In the case where voltage is applied to the first pixel electrode 50501 and the second pixel electrodes (50502a, 50502b, and 50502c) (referred to as a vertical electric field mode), liquid crystal molecules are aligned so as to tilt toward the opening portions of the second pixel electrodes (50502a, 50502b, and 50502c) and the protrusion 50503. Since light emitted from a backlight passes through a substrate when a pair of polarizing plates is provided so as to be in a cross nicol state, white display is performed.
Note that by controlling voltage applied to the first electrode 50501 and the second electrodes (50502a, 50502b, and 50502c), conditions of the liquid crystal molecules can be controlled. Therefore, since the amount of light emitted from the backlight passing through the substrate can be controlled, predetermined image display can be performed.
In the case where voltage is not applied to the first pixel electrode 50501 and the second pixel electrodes (50502a, 50502b, and 50502c), the liquid crystal molecules are aligned longitudinally. Since light emitted from the backlight does not pass through a panel when the pair of polarizing plates is provided so as to be in the cross nicol state, black display is performed. This is a so-called normally black mode.
It is only necessary that a known material be used for a liquid crystal material used for an MVA mode.
In the IPS mode, a pair of electrodes is formed so as to have different shapes.
In the case where voltage is applied to the first pixel electrodes (50601, 50611, 50621, and 50631) and the second pixel electrodes (50602, 50612, 50622, and 50632) (referred to as a horizontal electric field mode), liquid crystal molecules are aligned along a line of electric force which is deviated from a rubbing direction. Since light emitted from a backlight passes through a substrate when a pair of polarizing plates is provided so as to be in a cross nicol state, white display is performed.
Note that by controlling voltage applied to the first pixel electrodes (50601, 50611, 50621, and 50631) and the second pixel electrodes (50602, 50612, 50622, and 50632), conditions of the liquid crystal molecules can be controlled. Therefore, since the amount of light emitted from the backlight passing through the substrate can be controlled, predetermined image display can be performed.
In the case where voltage is not applied to the first pixel electrodes (50601, 50611, 50621, and 50631) and the second pixel electrodes (50602, 50612, 50622, and 50632), the liquid crystal molecules are aligned laterally in the rubbing direction. Since light emitted from the backlight does not pass through the substrate when the pair of polarizing plates is provided so as to be in the cross nicol state, black display is performed. This is a so-called normally black mode.
It is only necessary that a known material be used for a liquid crystal material used for an IPS mode.
In the FFS mode, a first electrode is formed over a top surface of a second electrode so as to be various shapes.
FIG; 60D shows a first pixel electrode 50731 and a second pixel electrode 50732. The first pixel electrode 50731 is a comb shape. The second pixel electrode 50732 is not necessarily patterned.
In the case where voltage is applied to the first pixel electrodes (50701, 50711, 50721, and 50731) and the second pixel electrodes (50702, 50712, 50722, and 50732) (referred to as a horizontal electric field mode), liquid crystal molecules are aligned along a line of electric force which is deviated from a rubbing direction. Since light emitted from a backlight passes through a substrate when a pair of polarizing plates is provided so as to be in a cross nicol state, white display is performed.
Note that by controlling voltage applied to the first pixel electrodes (50701, 50711, 50721, and 50731) and the second pixel electrodes (50702, 50712, 50722, and 50732), conditions of the liquid crystal molecules can be controlled. Therefore, since the amount of light emitted from the backlight passing through the substrate can be controlled, predetermined image display can be performed.
In the case where voltage is not applied to the first pixel electrodes (50701, 50711, 50721, and 50731) and the second pixel electrodes (50702, 50712, 50722, and 50732), the liquid crystal molecules are aligned laterally in the rubbing direction. Since light emitted from the backlight does not pass through the substrate when the pair of polarizing plates is provided so as to be in the cross nicol state, black display is performed. This is a so-called normally black mode.
It is only necessary that a known material be used for a liquid crystal material used for an FFS mode.
Although this embodiment mode is described with reference to various drawings, the contents (or may be part of the contents) described in each drawing can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with the contents (or may be part of the contents) described in another drawing. Further, even more drawings can be formed by combining each part with another part in the above-described drawings.
The contents (or may be part of the contents) described in each drawing of this embodiment mode can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with the contents (or may be part of the contents) described in a drawing in another embodiment mode. Further, even more drawings can be formed by combining each part with part of another embodiment mode in the drawings of this embodiment mode.
This embodiment mode shows an example of an embodied case of the contents (or may be part of the contents) described in other embodiment modes, an example of slight transformation thereof, an example of partial modification thereof, an example of improvement thereof, an example of detailed description thereof, an application example thereof, an example of related part thereof, or the like. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiment modes can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment mode.
Embodiment Mode 10In this embodiment mode, a pixel structure of a display device is described. In particular, a pixel structure of a display device using an organic EL element is described.
A gate electrode of the first transistor 60105 is electrically connected to the first wiring 60106. One of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the first transistor 60105 is electrically connected to the second wiring 60107. The other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the first transistor 60105 is electrically connected to a gate electrode of the second transistor 60108 and one electrode of the capacitor 60113. Note that the gate electrode of the first transistor 60105 includes a plurality of gate electrodes. Accordingly, leakage current in the off state of the first transistor 60105 can be reduced.
One of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the second transistor 60108 is electrically connected to the third wiring 60111, and the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the second transistor 60108 is electrically connected to the pixel electrode 60115. Accordingly, current flowing to the pixel electrode 60115 can be controlled by the second transistor 60108.
The organic conductive film 60117 is provided over the pixel electrode 60115, and the organic thin film 60118 (an organic compound layer) is further provided thereover. The counter electrode 60112 is provided over the organic thin film 60118 (the organic compound layer). Note that the counter electrode 60112 may be formed over all pixels to be commonly connected to all the pixels, or may be patterned using a shadow mask or the like.
Light emitted from the organic thin film 60118 (the organic compound layer) is transmitted through either the pixel electrode 60115 or the counter electrode 60112.
In
In the case of bottom emission, it is preferable that the pixel electrode 60115 be formed of a transparent conductive film. On the other hand, in the case of top emission, it is preferable that the counter electrode 60112 be formed of a transparent conductive film.
In a light-emitting device for color display, EL elements having respective light emission colors of RGB may be separately formed, or an EL element with a single color may be formed over an entire surface and light emission of RGB can be obtained by using a color filter.
Note that the structures shown in
A gate electrode of the first transistor 60205 is electrically connected to the second wiring 60202. One of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the first transistor 60205 is electrically connected to the first wiring 60201. The other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the first transistor 60205 is electrically connected to a gate electrode of the third transistor 60207. Note that the gate electrode of the first transistor 60205 includes a plurality of gate electrodes. Accordingly, leakage current in the off state of the first transistor 60205 can be reduced.
A gate electrode of the second transistor 60206 is electrically connected to the third wiring 60203. One of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the second transistor 60206 is electrically connected to the fourth wiring 60204. The other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the second transistor 60206 is electrically connected to the gate electrode of the third transistor 60207. Note that the gate electrode of the second transistor 60206 includes a plurality of gate electrodes. Accordingly, leakage current in the off state of the second transistor 60206 can be reduced.
One of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the third transistor 60207 is electrically connected to the fourth wiring 60204, and the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the third transistor 60207 is electrically connected to the pixel electrode 60208. Accordingly, current flowing to the pixel electrode 60208 can be controlled by the third transistor 60207.
The organic conductive film 60212 is provided over the pixel electrode 60208, and the organic thin film 60213 (an organic compound layer) is further provided thereover. The counter electrode 60214 is provided over the organic thin film 60213 (the organic compound layer). Note that the counter electrode 60214 may be formed over all pixels to be commonly connected to all the pixels, or may be patterned using a shadow mask or the like.
Light emitted from the organic thin film 60213 (the organic compound layer) is transmitted through either the pixel electrode 60208 or the counter electrode 60214.
In
In the case of bottom emission, it is preferable that the pixel electrode 60208 be formed of a transparent conductive film. On the other hand, in the case of top emission, it is preferable that the counter electrode 60214 be formed of a light-transmitting conductive film.
In a light-emitting device for color display, EL elements having respective light emission colors of RGB may be separately formed, or an EL element with a single color may be formed over an entire surface and light emission of RGB can be obtained by using a color filter.
Note that the structures shown in
A gate electrode of the first transistor 60305 is electrically connected to the second wiring 60302. One of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the first transistor 60305 is electrically connected to the first wiring 60301. The other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the first transistor 60305 is electrically connected to a gate electrode of the third transistor 60307. Note that the gate electrode of the first transistor 60305 includes a plurality of gate electrodes. Accordingly, leakage current in the off state of the first transistor 60305 can be reduced.
A gate electrode of the second transistor 60306 is electrically connected to the third wiring 60303. One of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the second transistor 60306 is electrically connected to the fifth wiring 60311. The other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the second transistor 60306 is electrically connected to the gate electrode of the third transistor 60307. Note that the gate electrode of the second transistor 60306 includes a plurality of gate electrodes. Accordingly, leakage current in the off state of the second transistor 60306 can be reduced.
One of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the third transistor 60307 is electrically connected to the fifth wiring 60311, and the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the third transistor 60307 is electrically connected to the pixel electrode 60309. Accordingly, current flowing to the pixel electrode 60309 can be controlled by the third transistor 60307.
A gate electrode of the fourth transistor 60308 is electrically connected to the fourth wiring 60304. One of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the fourth transistor 60308 is electrically connected to the sixth wiring 60312. The other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the fourth transistor 60308 is electrically connected to the pixel electrode 60309. Accordingly, a potential of the pixel electrode 60309 can be controlled by the fourth transistor 60308, so that a reverse bias can be applied to the organic conductive film 60322 and the organic thin film 60323. When a reverse bias is applied to a light-emitting element including the organic conductive film 60322, the organic thin film 60323, and the like, reliability of the light-emitting element can be significantly improved.
The organic conductive film 60322 is provided over the pixel electrode 60309, and the organic thin film 60323 (an organic compound layer) is further provided thereover. The counter electrode 60324 is provided over the organic thin film 60213 (the organic compound layer). Note that the counter electrode 60324 may be formed over all pixels to be commonly connected to all the pixels, or may be patterned using a shadow mask or the like.
Light emitted from the organic thin film 60323 (the organic compound layer) is transmitted through either the pixel electrode 60309 or the counter electrode 60324.
In
In the case of bottom emission, it is preferable that the pixel electrode 60309 be formed of a transparent conductive film. On the other hand, in the case of top emission, it is preferable that the counter electrode 60324 be formed of a light-transmitting conductive film.
In a light-emitting device for color display, EL elements having respective light emission colors of RGB may be separately formed, or an EL element with a single color may be formed over an entire surface and light emission of RGB can be obtained by using a color filter.
Note that the structures shown in
Although this embodiment mode is described with reference to various drawings, the contents (or part of the contents) described in each drawing can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with the contents (or part of the contents) described in another drawing. Further, much more drawings can be formed by combining each part with another part in the above-described drawings.
The contents (or part of the contents) described in each drawing in this embodiment mode can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with the contents (or part of the contents) described in a drawing in another embodiment mode. Further, much more drawings can be formed by combining each part in each drawing in this embodiment mode with part of another embodiment mode.
This embodiment mode shows examples of embodying, slightly transforming, partially modifying, improving, describing in detail, or applying the contents (or part of the contents) described in other embodiment modes, an example of related part thereof, or the like. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiment modes can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment mode.
Embodiment Mode 11In this embodiment mode, a structure and an operation of a pixel in a display device are described.
One frame period refers to a period for fully displaying an image for one display region. One frame period includes a plurality of subframe periods, and one subframe period includes an address period and a sustain period. Address periods Ta1 to Ta4 indicate time for writing signals to pixels in all rows, and periods Tb1 to Tb4 indicate time for writing signals to pixels in one row (or one pixel). Sustain periods Ts1 to Ts4 indicate time for maintaining a lighting state or a non-lighting state in accordance with a video signal written to the pixel, and a ratio of the length of the sustain periods is set to satisfy Ts1 Ts2: Ts3: Ts4=23:22:21:20=8 : 4: 2: 1. A gray scale is expressed depending on in which sustain period light emission is performed.
Here, the i-th pixel row is described with reference to
Here, the case where a 4-bit gray scale is expressed is described; however, the number of bits and the number of gray scales are not limited thereto. Note that lighting is not needed to be performed in order of Ts1, Ts2, Ts3, and Ts4, and the order may be random or light emission may be performed in the period divided into a plurality of periods. A ratio of lighting time of Ts1, Ts2, Ts3, and Ts4 is not needed to be power-of-two, and may be the same length or slightly different from a power of two.
Next, a driving method when a signal writing period (an address period) to a pixel and a light-emitting period (a sustain period) are not separated is described. A pixel in a row in which a writing operation of a video signal is completed maintains the signal until another signal is written to the pixel (or the signal is erased). Data holding time refers to a period from the writing operation is performed until another signal is written to the pixel. In the data holding time, the pixel is lit or not lit in accordance with the video signal written to the pixel. The same operations are performed until the last row, and the address period ends. Then, an operation proceeds to a signal writing operation in a next subframe period sequentially from a row in which the data holding time ends.
As described above, in the case of a driving method in which a pixel is immediately lit or not lit in accordance with a video signal written to the pixel after the signal writing operation is completed and the data holding time starts, signals cannot be input to two rows at the same time. Accordingly, address periods need to be prevented from overlapping, so that the data holding time cannot be made shorter than the address period. As a result, it becomes difficult to perform high-level gray scale display.
Thus, the data holding time is set to be shorter than the address period by provision of an erasing period. A driving method when the data holding time is set shorter than the address period by provision of an erasing period is described with reference to
First, in the address period Ta1, a pixel scan signal is input to a scan line in order from a first row, and a pixel is selected. Then, while the pixel is selected, a video signal is input to the pixel from a signal line. Then, when the video signal is written to the pixel, the pixel maintains the signal until a signal is input again. Lighting and non-lighting of the pixel in the sustain period Ts1 are controlled by the written video signal. In a row in which a writing operation of a video signal is completed, a pixel is immediately lit or not lit in accordance with the written video signal. The same operations are performed until the last row, and the address period Ta1 ends. Then, an operation proceeds to a signal writing operation in a next subframe period sequentially from a row in which the data holding time ends. Similarly, in the address periods Ta2, Ta3, and Ta4, a video signal is input to the pixel, and lighting and non-lighting of the pixel in the sustain periods Ts2, Ts3, and Ts4 are controlled by the video signal. The end of the sustain period Ts4 is set by the start of an erasing operation. This is because when a signal written to a pixel in an erasing time Te of each row is erased, the pixel is forced to be not lit regardless of the video signal written to the pixel in the address period until another signal is written to the pixel. That is, the data holding time ends from a pixel in which the erasing time Te starts.
Here, the i-th pixel row is described with reference to
Thus, a display device with a high-level gray scale and a high duty ratio (a ratio of a lighting period in one frame period) can be provided, in which data holding time is shorter than an address period without separating the address period and a sustain period. Since instantaneous luminance can be lowered, reliability of a display element can be improved.
Here, the case where a 4-bit gray scale is expressed is described; however, the number of bits and the number of gray scales are not limited thereto. Note that lighting is not needed to be performed in order of Ts1, Ts2, Ts3, and Ts4, and the order may be random or light emission may be performed in the period divided into a plurality of periods. A ratio of lighting time of Ts1, Ts2, Ts3, and Ts4 is not needed to be power-of-two, and may be the same length or slightly different from a power of two.
Next, a structure and an operation of a pixel to which digital time gray scale drive can be applied are described.
A pixel 80300 includes a switching transistor 80301, a driving transistor 80302, a light-emitting element 80304, and a capacitor 80303. A gate of the switching transistor 80301 is connected to a scan line 80306, a first electrode (one of a source electrode and a drain electrode) of the switching transistor 80301 is connected to a signal line 80305, and a second electrode (the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode) of the switching transistor 80301 is connected to a gate of the driving transistor 80302. The gate of the driving transistor 80302 is connected to a power supply line 80307 through the capacitor 80303, a first electrode of the driving transistor 80302 is connected to the power supply line 80307, and a second electrode of the driving transistor 80302 is connected to a first electrode (a pixel electrode) of the light-emitting element 80304. A second electrode of the light-emitting element 80304 corresponds to a common electrode 80308.
Note that the second electrode (the common electrode 80308) of the light-emitting element 80304 is set to a low power supply potential. The low power supply potential refers to a potential satisfying (the low power supply potential)<(a high power supply potential) based on the high power supply potential set to the power supply line 80307. As the low power supply potential, GND, 0 V, or the like may be set, for example. A potential difference between the high power supply potential and the low power supply potential is applied to the light-emitting element 80304, and current is supplied to the light-emitting element 80304. Here, in order to make the light-emitting element 80304 emit light, each potential is set so that the potential difference between the high power supply potential and the low power supply potential is forward threshold voltage or more.
Note that gate capacitance of the driving transistor 80302 may be used as a substitute for the capacitor 80303, so that the capacitor 80303 can be omitted. The gate capacitance of the driving transistor 80302 may be formed in a region where a source region, a drain region, an LDD region, or the like overlaps with the gate electrode. Alternatively, capacitance may be formed between a channel region and the gate electrode.
When a pixel is selected by the scan line 80306, that is, when the switching transistor 80301 is turned on, a video signal is input to the pixel from the signal line 80305. Then, a charge for voltage corresponding to the video signal is stored in the capacitor 80303, and the capacitor 80303 maintains the voltage. The voltage is voltage between the gate electrode and the first electrode of the driving transistor 80302 and corresponds to gate-source voltage Vgs of the driving transistor 80302.
An operation region of a transistor can be generally divided into a linear region and a saturation region. When drain-source voltage is denoted by Vds, gate-source voltage is denoted by Vgs, and threshold voltage is denoted by Vth, a boundary between the linear region and the saturation region sets so as to satisfy (Vgs−Vth)=Vds. In the case where (Vgs−Vth)>Vds is satisfied, a transistor operates in a linear region, and a current value is determined in accordance with the level of Vds and Vgs. On the other hand, in the case where (Vgs−Vth)<Vds is satisfied, a transistor operates in a saturation region and ideally, a current value hardly changes even when Vds changes. That is, a current value is determined only by the level of Vgs.
Here, in the case of voltage-input voltage driving method, a video signal is input to the gate of the driving transistor 80302 so that the driving transistor 80302 is in either of two states of being sufficiently turned on and turned off. That is, the driving transistor 80302 operates in a linear region.
Thus, when a video signal which makes the driving transistor 80302 turned on is input, a power supply potential VDD set to the power supply line 80307 without change is ideally set to the first electrode of the light-emitting element 80304.
That is, ideally, constant voltage is applied to the light-emitting element 80304 to obtain constant luminance from the light-emitting element 80304. Then, a plurality of subframe periods are provided in one frame period. A video signal is written to a pixel in each subframe period, lighting and non-lighting of the pixel are controlled in each subframe period, and a gray scale is expressed by the sum of lighting subframe periods.
Note that when the video signal by which the driving transistor 80302 operates in a saturation region is input, current can be supplied to the light-emitting element 80304. When the light-emitting element 80304 is an element luminance of which is determined in accordance with current, luminance decay due to deterioration of the light-emitting element 80304 can be suppressed. Further, when the video signal is an analog signal, current in accordance with the video signal can be supplied to the light-emitting element 80304. In this case, analog gray scale drive can be performed.
A pixel 80400 includes a switching transistor 80401, a driving transistor 80402, a capacitor 80403, a light-emitting element 80404, and a rectifying element 80409. A gate of the switching transistor 80401 is connected to a first scan line 80406, a first electrode (one of a source electrode and a drain electrode) of the switching transistor 80401 is connected to a signal line 80405, and a second electrode (the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode) of the switching transistor 80401 is connected to a gate of the driving transistor 80402. The gate of the driving transistor 80402 is connected to a power supply line 80407 through the capacitor 80403, and is also connected to a second scan line 80410 through the rectifying element 80409. A first electrode of the driving transistor 80402 is connected to the power supply line 80407, and a second electrode of the driving transistor 80402 is connected to a first electrode (a pixel electrode) of the light-emitting element 80404. A second electrode of the light-emitting element 80404 corresponds to a common electrode 80408.
The second electrode (the common electrode 80408) of the light-emitting element 80404 is set to a low power supply potential. Note that the low power supply potential refers to a potential satisfying (the low power supply potential)<(a high power supply potential) with respect to the high power supply potential set to the power supply line 80407. As the low power supply potential, GND, 0 V, or the like may be set, for example. In order to apply a potential difference between the high power supply potential and the low power supply potential to the light-emitting element 80404 and supply current to the light-emitting element 80404 so that the light-emitting element 80404 emits light, each potential is set so that the potential difference between the high power supply potential and the low power supply potential is equal to forward threshold voltage or more.
Gate capacitance of the driving transistor 80402 may be used as a substitute for the capacitor 80403, so that the capacitor 80403 can be omitted. The gate capacitance of the driving transistor 80402 may be formed in a region where a source region, a drain region, an LDD region, or the like overlaps with the gate electrode. Alternatively, capacitance may be formed between a channel region and the gate electrode.
As the rectifying element 80409, a diode-connected transistor can be used. A PN junction diode, a PIN junction diode, a Schottky diode, a diode formed of a carbon nanotube, or the like may be used other than a diode-connected transistor. A diode-connected transistor may be an n-channel transistor or a p-channel transistor.
The pixel 80400 is such that the rectifying element 80409 and the second scan line 80410 are added to the pixel shown in
An erasing operation of the pixel shown in
An L-level signal input to the second scan line 80410 has a potential such that current is not supplied to the rectifying element 80409 when a video signal for non-lighting is written to a pixel. An H-level signal input to the second scan line 80410 has a potential such that a potential to turn off the driving transistor 80302 can be set to the gate regardless of a video signal written to a pixel.
A pixel 80500 includes a switching transistor 80501, a driving transistor 80502, a capacitor 80503, a light-emitting element 80504, and an erasing transistor 80509. A gate of the switching transistor 80501 is connected to a first scan line 80506, a first electrode (one of a source electrode and a drain electrode) of the switching transistor 80501 is connected to a signal line 80505, and a second electrode (the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode) of the switching transistor 80501 is connected to a gate of the driving transistor 80502. The gate of the driving transistor 80502 is connected to a power supply line 80507 through the capacitor 80503, and is also connected to a first electrode of the erasing transistor 80509. A first electrode of the driving transistor 80502 is connected to the power supply line 80507, and a second electrode of the driving transistor 80502 is connected to a first electrode (a pixel electrode) of the light-emitting element 80504. A gate of the erasing transistor 80509 is connected to a second scan line 80510, and a second electrode of the erasing transistor 80509 is connected to the power supply line 80507. A second electrode of the light-emitting element 80504 corresponds to a common electrode 80508.
The second electrode (the common electrode 80508) of the light-emitting element 80504 is set to a low power supply potential. The low power supply potential refers to a potential satisfying (the low power supply potential)<(a high power supply potential) with respect to the high power supply potential set to the power supply line 80507. As the low power supply potential, GND, 0 V, or the like may be set, for example. In order to apply a potential difference between the high power supply potential and the low power supply potential to the light-emitting element 80504 and supply current to the light-emitting element 80504 so that the light-emitting element 80504 emits light, each potential is set so that the potential difference between the high power supply potential and the low power supply potential is equal to forward threshold voltage or more.
Gate capacitance of the driving transistor 80502 may be used as a substitute for the capacitor 80503, so that the capacitor 80503 can be omitted. The gate capacitance of the driving transistor 80502 may be formed in a region where a source region, a drain region, an LDD region, or the like overlaps with the gate electrode. Alternatively, capacitance may be formed between a channel region and the gate electrode.
As the erasing transistor 80509, a diode-connected transistor can be used. Further, a PN junction diode, a PIN junction diode, a Schottky diode, a diode formed of a carbon nanotube, or the like may be used other than a diode-connected transistor. A diode-connected transistor may be an n-channel transistor or a p-channel transistor.
The pixel 80500 is such that the erasing transistor 80509 and the second scan line 80510 are added to the pixel shown in
An erasing operation of the pixel shown in
Next, a structure and an operation of a pixel called a threshold voltage compensation pixel are described. A threshold voltage compensation pixel can be applied to digital time gray scale drive and analog gray scale drive.
The pixel in
The second electrode of the light-emitting element 80620 is set to a low power supply potential. Note that the low power supply potential refers to a potential satisfying (the low power supply potential)<(a high power supply potential) based on the high power supply potential set to the power supply line 80612. As the low power supply potential, GND, 0 V, or the like may be set, for example. In order to apply a potential difference between the high power supply potential and the low power supply potential to the light-emitting element 80620 and supply current to the light-emitting element 80620 so that the light-emitting element 80620 emits light, each potential is set so that the potential difference between the high power supply potential and the low power supply potential is equal to forward threshold voltage or more. Note that gate capacitance of the driving transistor 80600 may be used as a substitute for the second capacitor 80605, so that the second capacitor 80605 can be omitted. The gate capacitance of the driving transistor 80600 may be formed in a region where a source region, a drain region, an LDD region, or the like overlaps with the gate electrode. Alternatively, capacitance may be formed between a channel region and the gate electrode. Note that on/off of the first switch 80601, the second switch 80602, and the third switch 80603 is controlled by a first scan line 80613, a second scan line 80615, and a third scan line 80614, respectively.
A method for driving the pixel shown in
In the initialization period, the second switch 80602 and the third switch 80603 are turned on. Then, a potential of the gate electrode of the driving transistor 80600 is lower than at least a potential of the power supply line 80612. At this time, the first switch 80601 may be in an on state or an off state. Note that the initialization period is not necessarily required.
In the threshold detecting period, a pixel is selected by the first scan line 80613. That is, the first switch 80601 is turned on, and a certain constant voltage is input from the signal line 80611. At this time, the second switch 80602 is turned on and the third switch 80603 is turned off. Accordingly, the driving transistor 80600 is diode-connected, and the second electrode and the gate electrode of the driving transistor 80600 are placed in a floating state. Then, a potential of the gate electrode of the driving transistor 80600 is a value obtained by subtracting threshold voltage of the driving transistor 80600 from the potential of the power supply line 80612. Thus, the threshold voltage of the driving transistor 80600 is held in the first capacitor 80604. A potential difference between the potential of the gate electrode of the driving transistor 80600 and the constant voltage input from the signal line 80611 is held in the second capacitor 80605.
In the data writing period, a video signal (voltage) is input from the signal line 80611. At this time, the first switch 80601 is kept on, the second switch 80602 is turned off, and the third switch 80603 is kept off. Since the gate electrode of the driving transistor 80600 is in a floating state, the potential of the gate electrode of the driving transistor 80600 changes depending on a potential difference between the constant voltage input from the signal line 80611 in the threshold detecting period and a video signal input from the signal line 80611 in the data writing period. For example, when (a capacitance value of the first capacitor 80604)<<(a capacitance value of the second capacitor 80605) is satisfied, the potential of the gate electrode of the driving transistor 80600 in the data writing period is approximately equal to the sum of a potential difference (the amount of change) between the potential of the signal line 80611 in the threshold detecting period and the potential of the signal line 80611 in the data writing period; and a value obtained by subtracting the threshold voltage of the driving transistor 80600 from the potential of the power supply line 80612. That is, the potential of the gate electrode of the driving transistor 80600 becomes a potential obtained by correcting the threshold voltage of the driving transistor 80600.
In the light-emitting period, current in accordance with a potential difference (Vgs) between the gate electrode of the driving transistor 80600 and the power supply line 80612 is supplied to the light-emitting element 80620. At this time, the first switch 80601 is turned off, the second switch 80602 is kept off, and the third switch 80603 is turned on. Note that current flowing to the light-emitting element 80620 is constant regardless of the threshold voltage of the driving transistor 80600.
Note that a pixel structure of the invention is not limited to that shown in
A structure and an operation of a pixel called a current input pixel are described. A current input pixel can be applied to digital gray scale drive and analog gray scale drive.
The pixel shown in
The second electrode of the light-emitting element 80730 is set to a low power supply potential. Note that the low power supply potential refers to a potential satisfying (the low power supply potential)<(a high power supply potential) based on the high power supply potential set to the power supply line 80712. As the low power supply potential, GND, 0 V, or the like may be set, for example. In order to apply potential difference between the high power supply potential and the low power supply potential to the light-emitting element 80730 and supply current to the light-emitting element 80730 so that the light-emitting element 80730 emits light, each potential is set so that the potential difference between the high power supply potential and the low power supply potential is equal to forward threshold voltage or more. Note that gate capacitance of the driving transistor 80700 may be used as a substitute for the capacitor 80704, so that the capacitor 80704 can be omitted. The gate capacitance of the driving transistor 80700 may be formed in a region where a source region, a drain region, an LDD region, or the like overlaps with the gate electrode. Alternatively, capacitance may be formed between a channel region and the gate electrode. Note that on/off of the first switch 80701, the second switch 80702, and the third switch 80703 is controlled by a first scan line 80713, a second scan line 80714, and a third scan line 80715, respectively.
A method for driving the pixel shown in
In the data writing period, a pixel is selected by the first scan line 80713. That is, the first switch 80701 is turned on, and current is input as a video signal from the signal line 80711. At this time, the second switch 80702 is turned on and the third switch 80703 is turned off. Accordingly, a potential of the gate electrode of the driving transistor 80700 becomes a potential in accordance with the video signal. That is, voltage between the gate electrode and the source electrode of the driving transistor 80700 which is such that the driving transistor 80700 supplies current same as the video signal is held in the capacitor 80704.
Next, in the light-emitting period, the first switch 80701 and the second switch 80702 are turned off, and the third switch 80703 is turned on. Thus, current with the same value as the video signal is supplied to the light-emitting element 80730.
Note that the invention is not limited to the pixel structure shown in
Although this embodiment mode is described with reference to various drawings, the contents (or part of the contents) described in each drawing can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with the contents (or part of the contents) described in another drawing. Further, much more drawings can be formed by combining each part with another part in the above-described drawings.
The contents (or part of the contents) described in each drawing in this embodiment mode can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with the contents (or part of the contents) described in a drawing in another embodiment mode. Further, much more drawings can be formed by combining each part in each drawing in this embodiment mode with part of another embodiment mode.
This embodiment mode shows examples of embodying, slightly transforming, partially modifying, improving, describing in detail, or applying the contents (or part of the contents) described in other embodiment modes, an example of related part thereof, or the like. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiment modes can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment mode.
Embodiment Mode 12In this embodiment mode, a structure and a manufacturing method of a transistor are described.
Note that the structure and the manufacturing method of the transistors included in a semiconductor device to which the invention can be applied are not limited to those shown in
First, structure examples of transistors included in a semiconductor device to which the invention can be applied are described with reference to
Next, characteristics of each layer forming the transistor included in a semiconductor device to which the invention can be applied are described.
A substrate 110111 can be a glass substrate using barium borosilicate glass, aluminoborosilicate glass, or the like, a quartz substrate, a ceramic substrate, a metal substrate containing stainless steel, or the like. In addition, a substrate formed of plastics typified by polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polyethylene naphthalate (PEN), or polyethersulfone (PES), or a substrate formed of a flexible synthetic resin such as acrylic can also be used. By using a flexible substrate, a semiconductor device capable of being bent can be formed. A flexible substrate has no strict limitations on the area or a shape of the substrate. Accordingly, for example, when a substrate having a rectangular shape, each side of which is 1 meter or more, is used as the substrate 110111, productivity can be significantly improved. Such an advantage is highly favorable as compared with the case where a circular silicon substrate is used.
An insulating film 110112 functions as a base film and is provided to prevent alkali metal such as Na or alkaline earth metal from the substrate 110111 from adversely affecting characteristics of a semiconductor element. The insulating film 110112 can have a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure of an insulating film containing oxygen or nitrogen, such as silicon oxide (SiOx), silicon nitride (SiNx), silicon oxynitride (SiOxNy) (x>y), or silicon nitride oxide (SiNxOy) (x>y). For example, when the insulating film 110112 is provided to have a two-layer structure, it is preferable that a silicon nitride oxide film be used as a first insulating film and a silicon oxynitride film be used as a second insulating film. Further, when the insulating film 110112 is provided to have a three-layer structure, it is preferable that a silicon oxynitride film be used as a first insulating film, a silicon nitride oxide film be used as a second insulating film, and a silicon oxynitride film be used as a third insulating film.
Semiconductor layers 110113, 110114, and 110115 can be formed using an amorphous semiconductor or a semi-amorphous semiconductor (SAS). Alternatively, a polycrystalline semiconductor layer may be used. SAS is a semiconductor having an intermediate structure between amorphous and crystalline (including single crystal and polycrystalline) structures and having a third state which is stable in free energy. Moreover, SAS includes a crystalline region with a short-range order and lattice distortion. A crystalline region of 0.5 to 20 nm can be observed at least in part of a film. When silicon is contained as a main component, Raman spectrum shifts to a wave number side lower than 520 cm−1. The diffraction peaks of (111) and (220) which are thought to be contributed to a silicon crystalline lattice are observed by X-ray diffraction. SAS contains hydrogen or halogen of at least 1 atomic % or more to compensate dangling bonds. SAS is formed by glow discharge decomposition (plasma CVD) of a material gas. As the material gas, Si2H6, SiH2Cl2, SiHCl3, SiCl4, SiF4, or the like as well as SiH4 can be used. Alternatively, GeF4 may be mixed. The material gas may be diluted with H2, or H2 and one or more kinds of rare gas elements selected from He, Ar, Kr, and Ne. A dilution ratio is in the range of 2 to 1000 times. Pressure is in the range of approximately 0.1 to 133 Pa, and a power supply frequency is 1 to 120 MHz, preferably 13 to 60 MHz. A substrate heating temperature may be 300° C. or lower. A concentration of impurities in atmospheric components such as oxygen, nitrogen, and carbon is preferably 1×1020 cm−1 or less as impurity elements in the film. In particular, an oxygen concentration is 5×1019/cm3 or less, preferably 1×1019/cm3 or less. Here, an amorphous semiconductor layer is formed using a material containing silicon (Si) as its main component (e.g., SiXGe1-x) by a known method (such as a sputtering method, an LPCVD method, or a plasma CVD method). Then, the amorphous semiconductor layer is crystallized by a known crystallization method such as a laser crystallization method, a thermal crystallization method using RTA or an annealing furnace, or a thermal crystallization method using a metal element which promotes crystallization.
An insulating film 110116 can have a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure of an insulating film containing oxygen or nitrogen, such as silicon oxide (SiOx), silicon nitride (SiNx), silicon oxynitride (SiOxNy) (x>y), or silicon nitride oxide (SiNxOy) (x>y).
A gate electrode 110117 can have a single-layer structure of a conductive film or a stacked-layer structure of two or three conductive films. As a material for the gate electrode 110117, a known conductive film can be used. For example, a single film of an element such as tantalum (Ta), titanium (Ti), molybdenum (Mo), tungsten (W), chromium (Cr), or silicon (Si); a nitride film containing the aforementioned element (typically, a tantalum nitride film, a tungsten nitride film, or a titanium nitride film); an alloy film in which the aforementioned elements are combined (typically, a Mo—W alloy or a Mo—Ta alloy); a silicide film containing the aforementioned element (typically, a tungsten silicide film or a titanium silicide film); and the like can be used. Note that the aforementioned single film, nitride film, alloy film, silicide film, and the like can have a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure.
An insulating film 110118 can have a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure of an insulating film containing oxygen or nitrogen, such as silicon oxide (SiOx), silicon nitride (SiNx), silicon oxynitride (SiOxNy) (x>y), or silicon nitride oxide (SiNxOy) (x>y); or a film containing carbon, such as a DLC (diamond-like carbon), by a known method (such as a sputtering method or a plasma CVD method).
An insulating film 110119 can have a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure of a siloxane resin; an insulating film containing oxygen or nitrogen, such as silicon oxide (SiOx), silicon nitride (SiNx), silicon oxynitride (SiOxNy) (x>y), or silicon nitride oxide (SiNxOy) (x>y); a film containing carbon, such as a DLC (diamond-like carbon); or an organic material such as epoxy, polyimide, polyamide, polyvinyl phenol, benzocyclobutene, or acrylic. Note that a siloxane resin corresponds to a resin having Si—O—Si bonds. Siloxane includes a backbone structure of a bond of silicon (Si) and oxygen (O). As a substituent, an organic group containing at least hydrogen (such as an alkyl group or an aryl group) is used. Alternatively, a fluoro, group, or a fluoro group and an organic group containing at least hydrogen can be used as a substituent. Note that in a semiconductor device applicable to the invention, the insulating film 110119 can be directly provided so as to cover the gate electrode 110117 without provision of the insulating film 110118.
As a conductive film 110123, a single film of an element such as Al, Ni, C, W, Mo, Ti, Pt, Cu, Ta, Au, or Mn, a nitride film containing the aforementioned element, an alloy film in which the aforementioned elements are combined, a silicide film containing the aforementioned element, or the like can be used. For example, as an alloy containing the plurality of elements, an Al alloy containing C and Ti, an Al alloy containing Ni, an Al alloy containing C and Ni, an Al alloy containing C and Mn, or the like can be used. Further, when the conductive film has a stacked-layer structure, Al can be interposed between Mo, Ti, or the like; thus, resistance of Al to heat and chemical reaction can be improved.
Next, characteristics of each structure are described with reference to the cross-sectional view of the plurality of transistors each having a different structure in
Reference numeral 110101 denotes a single drain transistor. Since the single drain transistor can be formed by a simple method, it is advantageous in low manufacturing cost and high yield. Here, the semiconductor layers 110113 and 110115 have different concentrations of impurities, and the semiconductor layer 110113 is used as a channel region and the semiconductor layers 110115 are used as a source region and a drain region. By controlling the concentration of impurities in this manner, resistivity of the semiconductor layer can be controlled. Further, an electrical connection state of the semiconductor layer and the conductive film 110123 can be closer to ohmic contact. Note that as a method of separately forming the semiconductor layers each having different amount of impurities, a method can be used in which impurities are doped in a semiconductor layer using the gate electrode 110117 as a mask.
Reference numeral 110102 denotes a transistor in which the gate electrode 110117 is tapered at an angle of at least certain degrees. Since the transistor can be formed by a simple method, it is advantageous in low manufacturing cost and high yield. Here, a tapered angle is 45° or more and less than 95°, and preferably 60° or more and less than 95°. Note that the tapered angle may be less than 45°. The semiconductor layers 110113, 110114, and 110115 have different concentrations of impurities. The semiconductor layer 110113 is used as a channel region, the semiconductor layers 110114 as lightly doped drain (LDD) regions, and the semiconductor layers 110115 as a source region and a drain region. By controlling the amount of impurities in this manner, resistivity of the semiconductor layer can be controlled. Further, an electrical connection state of the semiconductor layer and the conductive film 110123 can be closer to ohmic contact. Moreover, since the transistor includes the LDD regions, a high electric field is hardly applied inside the transistor, so that deterioration of the element due to hot carriers can be suppressed. Note that as a method of separately forming the semiconductor layers having different amount of impurities, a method can be used in which impurities are doped in a semiconductor layer using the gate electrode 110117 as a mask. In the transistor 110102, since the gate electrode 110117 is tapered at an angle of at least certain degrees, gradient of the concentration of impurities doped in the semiconductor layer through the gate electrode 110117 can be provided, and the LDD region can be easily formed.
Reference numeral 110103 denotes a transistor in which the gate electrode 110117 is formed of at least two layers and a lower gate electrode is longer than an upper gate electrode. In this specification, a shape of the lower and upper gate electrodes is called a hat shape. When the gate electrode 110117 has a hat shape, an LDD region can be formed without addition of a photomask. Note that a structure where the LDD region overlaps with the gate electrode 110117, like the transistor 110103, is particularly called a GOLD (gate overlapped LDD) structure. As a method of forming the gate electrode 110117 with a hat shape, the following method may be used.
First, when the gate electrode 110117 is patterned, the lower and upper gate electrodes are etched by dry etching so that side surfaces thereof are inclined (tapered). Then, an inclination of the upper gate electrode is processed to be almost perpendicular by anisotropic etching. Thus, the gate electrode a cross section of which is a hat shape is formed. After that, impurity elements are doped twice, so that the semiconductor layer 110113 used as the channel region, the semiconductor layers 110114 used as the LDD regions, and the semiconductor layers 110115 used as a source electrode and a drain electrode are formed.
Note that part of the LDD region, which overlaps with the gate electrode 110117, is referred to as an Lov region, and part of the LDD region, which does not overlap with the gate electrode 110117, is referred to as an Loff region. The Loff region is highly effective in suppressing an off-current value, whereas it is not very effective in preventing deterioration in an on-current value due to hot carriers by relieving an electric field in the vicinity of the drain. On the other hand, the Lov region is effective in preventing deterioration in the on-current value by relieving the electric field in the vicinity of the drain, whereas it is not very effective in suppressing the off-current value. Thus, it is preferable to form a transistor having a structure appropriate for characteristics of each of the various circuits. For example, when a semiconductor device applicable to the invention is used for a display device, a transistor having an Loff region is preferably used as a pixel transistor in order to suppress the off-current value. On the other hand, as a transistor in a peripheral circuit, a transistor having an Lov region is preferably used in order to prevent deterioration in the on-current value by relieving the electric field in the vicinity of the drain.
Reference numeral 110104 denotes a transistor including a sidewall 110121 in contact with the side surface of the gate electrode 110117. When the transistor includes the sidewall 110121, a region overlapping with the sidewall 110121 can be made to be an LDD region.
Reference numeral 110105 denotes a transistor in which an LDD (Loff) region is formed by doping in the semiconductor layer with the use of a mask. Thus, the LDD region can surely be formed, and an off-current value of the transistor can be reduced.
Reference numeral 110106 denotes a transistor in which an LDD (Lov) region is formed by doping in the semiconductor layer with the use of a mask. Thus, the LDD region can surely be formed, and deterioration in an on-current value can be prevented by relieving the electric field in the vicinity of the drain of the transistor.
Next, an example of a method for manufacturing a transistor included in a semiconductor device to which the invention can be applied is described with reference to
Note that a structure and a manufacturing method of a transistor included in a semiconductor device to which the invention can be applied are not limited to those in
In this embodiment mode, a surface of the substrate 110111, a surface of the insulating film 110112, a surface of the semiconductor layer 110113, a surface of the semiconductor layer 110114, a surface of the semiconductor layer 110115, a surface of the insulating film 110116, a surface of the insulating film 110118, or a surface of the insulating film 110119 is oxidized or nitrided by using plasma treatment, so that the semiconductor layer or the insulating film can be oxidized or nitrided. By oxidizing or nitriding the semiconductor layer or the insulating film by plasma treatment in such a manner, the surface of the semiconductor layer or the insulating film is modified, and the insulating film can be formed to be denser than an insulating film formed by a CVD method or a sputtering method. Thus, a defect such as a pinhole can be suppressed, and characteristics and the like of a semiconductor device can be improved.
First, the surface of the substrate 110111 is washed using hydrofluoric acid (HF), alkaline, or pure water. The substrate 110111 can be a glass substrate using barium borosilicate glass, aluminoborosilicate glass, or the like, a quartz substrate, a ceramic substrate, a metal substrate containing stainless steel, or the like. In addition, a substrate formed of plastics typified by polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polyethylene naphthalate (PEN), or polyethersulfone (PES), or a substrate formed of a flexible synthetic resin such as acrylic can also be used. Here, the case where a glass substrate is used as the substrate 110111 is shown.
Here, an oxide film or a nitride film may be formed on the surface of the substrate 110111 by oxidizing or nitriding the surface of the substrate 110111 by plasma treatment (
When the surface is oxidized by plasma treatment, the plasma treatment is performed in an oxygen atmosphere (e.g., in an atmosphere of oxygen (O2) and a rare gas (containing at least one of He, Ne, Ar, Kr, and Xe), in an atmosphere of oxygen, hydrogen (H2), and a rare gas, or in an atmosphere of dinitrogen monoxide and a rare gas). On the other hand, when the surface is nitrided by plasma treatment, the plasma treatment is performed in a nitrogen atmosphere (e.g., in an atmosphere of nitrogen (N2) and a rare gas (containing at least one of He, Ne, Ar, Kr, and Xe), in an atmosphere of nitrogen, hydrogen, and a rare gas, or in an atmosphere of NH3 and a rare gas). As a rare gas, Ar can be used, for example. Alternatively, a gas in which Ar and Kr are mixed may be used. Accordingly, the plasma-treated insulating film contains a rare gas (containing at least one of He, Ne, Ar, Kr, and Xe) used for plasma treatment. For example, the plasma-treated insulating film contains Ar when Ar is used.
In addition, it is preferable to perform plasma treatment in the atmosphere containing the aforementioned gas, with conditions of an electron density in the range of 1×1011 to 1×1013 cm−3 and a plasma electron temperature in the range of 0.5 to 1.5 eV. Since the plasma electron density is high and the electron temperature in the vicinity of an object to be treated is low, damage by plasma to the object to be treated can be prevented. Further, since the plasma electron density is as high as 1×1011 cm−3 or more, an oxide film or a nitride film formed by oxidizing or nitriding the object to be treated by plasma treatment is superior in its uniformity of thickness and the like as well as being dense, as compared with a film formed by a CVD method, a sputtering method, or the like. Alternatively, since the plasma electron temperature is as low as 1 eV or less, oxidation or nitridation can be performed at a lower temperature as compared with a conventional plasma treatment or thermal oxidation. For example, oxidation or nitridation can be performed sufficiently even when plasma treatment is performed at a temperature lower than a strain point of a glass substrate by 100 degrees or more. Note that as frequency for generating plasma, high frequency waves such as microwaves (2.45 GHz) can be used. Note that hereinafter, plasma treatment is performed using the aforementioned conditions unless otherwise specified.
Although
Although a plasma-treated insulating film formed by plasma treatment on the surface of the object to be treated is not shown in
Next, the insulating film 110112 is formed over the substrate 110111 by a known method (such as a sputtering method, an LPCVD method, or a plasma CVD method) (
Here, a plasma-treated insulating film may be formed on the surface of the insulating film 110112 by oxidizing or nitriding the surface of the insulating film 110112 by plasma treatment. By oxidizing the surface of the insulating film 110112, the surface of the insulating film 110112 is modified, and a dense film with fewer defects such as a pinhole can be obtained. Further, by oxidizing the surface of the insulating film 110112, the plasma-treated insulating film containing a little amount of N atoms can be formed; thus, interface characteristics of the plasma-treated insulating film and a semiconductor layer are improved when the semiconductor layer is provided over the plasma-treated insulating film. The plasma-treated insulating film contains a rare gas (containing at least one of He, Ne, Ar, Kr, and Xe) used for plasma treatment. Note that the plasma treatment can be similarly performed under the aforementioned conditions.
Next, the island-shaped semiconductor layers 110113 and 110114 are formed over the insulating film 110112 (
Here, a plasma-treated insulating film may be formed on the surfaces of the semiconductor layers 110113 and 110114 by oxidizing or nitriding the surfaces of the semiconductor layers 110113 and 110114 by plasma treatment. For example, when Si is used for the semiconductor layers 110113 and 110114, silicon oxide (SiOx) or silicon nitride (SiNx) is formed as the plasma-treated insulating film. Alternatively, after the semiconductor layers 110113 and 110114 are oxidized by plasma treatment, the semiconductor layers 110113 and 110114 may be nitrided by performing plasma treatment again. In this case, silicon oxide (SiOx) is formed in contact with the semiconductor layers 110113 and 110114, and silicon nitride oxide (SiNxOy) (x>y) is formed on the surface of the silicon oxide. Note that when the semiconductor layer is oxidized by plasma treatment, the plasma treatment is performed in an oxygen atmosphere (e.g., in an atmosphere of oxygen (O2) and a rare gas (containing at least one of He, Ne, Ar, Kr, and Xe), in an atmosphere of oxygen, hydrogen (H2), and a rare gas, or in an atmosphere of dinitrogen monoxide and a rare gas). On the other hand, when the semiconductor layer is nitrided by plasma treatment, the plasma treatment is performed in a nitrogen atmosphere (e.g., in an atmosphere of nitrogen (N2) and a rare gas (containing at least one of He, Ne, Ar, Kr, and Xe), in an atmosphere of nitrogen, hydrogen, and a rare gas, or in an atmosphere of NH3 and a rare gas). As a rare gas, Ar can be used, for example. Alternatively, a gas in which Ar and Kr are mixed may be used. Accordingly, the plasma-treated insulating film contains a rare gas (containing at least one of He, Ne, Ar, Kr, and Xe) used for plasma treatment. For example, the plasma-treated insulating film contains Ar when Ar is used.
Next, the insulating film 110116 is formed (
Here, the surface of the insulating film 110116 may be oxidized or nitrided by plasma treatment, so that a plasma-treated insulating film is formed on the surface of the insulating film 110116. Note that the plasma-treated insulating film contains a rare gas (containing at least one of He, Ne, Ar, Kr, and Xe) used for plasma treatment. The plasma treatment can be similarly performed under the aforementioned conditions.
Alternatively, after the insulating film 110116 is oxidized by plasma treatment once in an oxygen atmosphere, the insulating film 110116 may be nitrided by performing plasma treatment again in a nitrogen atmosphere. By oxidizing or nitriding the surface of the insulating film 110116 by plasma treatment in such a manner, the surface of the insulating film 110116 is modified, and a dense film can be formed. An insulating film obtained by plasma treatment is denser and has fewer defects such as a pinhole, as compared with an insulating film formed by a CVD method, a sputtering method, or the like. Thus, characteristics of a thin film transistor can be improved.
Next, the gate electrode 110117 is formed (
In the transistor 110101, the semiconductor layers 110115 used as the source region and the drain region can be formed by doping impurities after the gate electrode 110117 is formed.
In the transistor 110102, the semiconductor layers 110114 used as the LDD regions and the semiconductor layers 110115 used as the source region and the drain region can be formed by doping impurities after the gate electrode 110117 is formed.
In the transistor 110103, the semiconductor layers 110114 used as the LDD regions and the semiconductor layers 110115 used as the source region and the drain region can be formed by doping impurities after the gate electrode 110117 is formed.
In the transistor 110104, the semiconductor layers 110114 used as the LDD regions and the semiconductor layers 110115 used as the source region and the drain region can be formed by doping impurities after the sidewall 110121 is formed on the side surface of the gate electrode 110117.
Note that silicon oxide (SiOx) or silicon nitride (SiNx) can be used for the sidewall 110121. As a method of forming the sidewall 110121 on the side surface of the gate electrode 110117, a method can be used, for example, in which a silicon oxide (SiOx) film or a silicon nitride (SiNx) film is formed by a known method after the gate electrode 110117 is formed, and then, the silicon oxide (SiOx) film or the silicon nitride (SiNx) film is etched by anisotropic etching. Thus, the silicon oxide (SiOx) film or the silicon nitride (SiNx) film remains only on the side surface of the gate electrode 110117, so that the sidewall 110121 can be formed on the side surface of the gate electrode 110117.
In the transistor 110105, the semiconductor layers 110114 used as the LDD (Loff) regions and the semiconductor layer 110115 used as the source region and the drain region can be formed by doping impurities after a mask 110122 is formed to cover the gate electrode 110117.
In the transistor 110106, the semiconductor layers 110114 used as the LDD (Lov) regions and the semiconductor layers 110115 used as the source region and the drain region can be formed by doping impurities after the gate electrode 110117 is formed.
Next, the insulating film 110118 is formed (
Here, the surface of the insulating film 110118 may be oxidized or nitrided by plasma treatment, so that a plasma-treated insulating film is formed on the surface of the insulating film 110118. Note that the plasma-treated insulating film contains a rare gas (containing at least one of He, Ne, Ar, Kr, and Xe) used for plasma treatment. The plasma treatment can be similarly performed under the aforementioned conditions.
Next, the insulating film 110119 is formed. The insulating film 110119 can have a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure of an organic material such as epoxy, polyimide, polyamide, polyvinyl phenol, benzocyclobutene, or acrylic; or a siloxane resin, in addition to an insulating film containing oxygen or nitrogen, such as silicon oxide (SiOx), silicon nitride (SiNx), silicon oxynitride (SiOxNy) (x>y), or silicon nitride oxide (SiNxOy) (x>y); or a film containing carbon, such as a DLC (diamond-like carbon), by known method (such as a sputtering method or a plasma CVD method). Note that a siloxane resin corresponds to a resin having Si—O—Si bonds. Siloxane includes a skeleton structure of a bond of silicon (Si) and oxygen (O). As a substituent, an organic group containing at least hydrogen (such as an alkyl group or an aryl group) is used. Alternatively, a fluoro group, or a fluoro group and an organic group containing at least hydrogen can be used as a substituent. In addition, the plasma-treated insulating film contains a rare gas (containing at least one of He, Ne, Ar, Kr, and Xe) used for plasma treatment. For example, the plasma-treated insulating film contains Ar when Ar is used.
When an organic material such as polyimide, polyamide, polyvinyl phenol, benzocyclobutene, or acrylic, or a siloxane resin is used for the insulating film 110119, the surface of the insulating film 110119 can be modified by oxidizing or nitriding the surface of the insulating film by plasma treatment. Modification of the surface improves strength of the insulating film 110119, and physical damage such as a crack generated when an opening is formed, for example, or film reduction in etching can be reduced. Further, when the conductive film 110123 is formed over the insulating film 110119, modification of the surface of the insulating film 110119 improves adhesion to the conductive film. For example, when a siloxane resin is used for the insulating film 110119 and nitrided by plasma treatment, a plasma-treated insulating film containing nitrogen or a rare gas is formed by nitriding a surface of the siloxane resin, and physical strength is improved.
Next, a contact hole is formed in the insulating films 110119, 110118, and 110116 in order to form the conductive film 110123 which is electrically connected to the semiconductor layer 110115. Note that the contact hole may have a tapered shape. Thus, coverage with the conductive film 110123 can be improved.
A first insulating film (an insulating film 110502) is formed over an entire surface of a substrate 110501. The first insulating film can prevent impurities from the substrate from adversely affecting a semiconductor layer and changing properties of a transistor. That is, the first insulating film functions as a base film. Thus, a transistor with high reliability can be formed. As the first insulating film, a single layer or a stacked layer of a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, a silicon oxynitride film (SiOxNy), or the like can be used.
A first conductive layer (conductive layers 110503 and 110504) is formed over the first insulating film. The conductive layer 110503 includes a portion functioning as a gate electrode of a transistor 110520. The conductive layer 110504 includes a portion functioning as a first electrode of a capacitor 110521. As the first conductive layer, an element such as Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, W, Al, Nd, Cu, Ag, Au, Pt, Nb, Si, Zn, Fe, Ba, or Ge, or an alloy of these elements can be used. Alternatively, a stacked layer of these elements (including the alloy thereof) can be used.
A second insulating film (an insulating film 110514) is formed to cover at least the first conductive layer. The second insulating film functions as a gate insulating film. As the second insulating film, a single layer or a stacked layer of a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, a silicon oxynitride film (SiOxNy), or the like can be used.
For a portion of the second insulating film, which is in contact with the semiconductor layer, a silicon oxide film is preferably used. This is because the trap level at the interface between the semiconductor layer and the second insulating film is lowered.
When the second insulating film is in contact with Mo, a silicon oxide film is preferably used for a portion of the second insulating film in contact with Mo. This is because the silicon oxide film does not oxidize Mo.
A semiconductor layer is formed in part of a portion over the second insulating film, which overlaps with the first conductive layer, by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like. Part of the semiconductor layer extends to a portion over the second insulating film, which does not overlap with the first conductive layer. The semiconductor layer includes a channel formation region (a channel formation region 110510), an LDD region (LDD regions 110508 and 110509), and an impurity region (impurity regions 110505, 110506, and 110507). The channel formation region 110510 functions as a channel formation region of the transistor 110520. The LDD regions 110508 and 110509 function as LDD regions of the transistor 110520. Note that the LDD regions 110508 and 110509 are not necessarily formed. The impurity region 110505 includes a portion functioning as one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the transistor 110520. The impurity region 110506 includes a portion functioning as the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 110520. The impurity region 110507 includes a portion functioning as a second electrode of the capacitor 110521.
A third insulating film (an insulating film 110511) is entirely formed. A contact hole is selectively formed in part of the third insulating film. The insulating film 110511 functions as an interlayer film. As the third insulating film, an inorganic material (e.g., silicon oxide, silicon nitride, or silicon oxynitride), an organic compound material having a low dielectric constant (e.g., a photosensitive or nonphotosensitive organic resin material), or the like can be used. Alternatively, a material containing siloxane may be used. Note that siloxane is a material in which a skeleton structure is formed by a bond of silicon (Si) and oxygen (O). As a substitute, an organic group containing at least hydrogen (such as an alkyl group or an aryl group) is used. Alternatively, a fluoro group, or a fluoro group and an organic group containing at least hydrogen may be used as a substituent.
A second conductive layer (conductive layers 110512 and 110513) is formed over the third insulating film. The conductive layer 110512 is connected to the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 110520 through the contact hole formed in the third insulating film. Thus, the conductive layer 110512 includes a portion functioning as the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 110520. When the conductive layer 110513 is electrically connected to the conductive layer 110504, the conductive layer 110513 includes a portion functioning as the first electrode of the capacitor 110521. As the second conductive layer, an element such as Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, W, Al, Nd, Cu, Ag, Au, Pt, Nb, Si, Zn, Fe, Ba, or Ge, or an alloy of these elements can be used. Alternatively, a stacked layer of these elements (including the alloy thereof) can be used.
Note that in steps after forming the second conductive layer, various insulating films or various conductive films may be formed.
Next, structures of a transistor and a capacitor are described in the case where an amorphous silicon (a-Si:H) film is used as a semiconductor layer of the transistor.
A first insulating film (an insulating film 110202) is formed over an entire surface of a substrate 110201. The first insulating film can prevent impurities from the substrate from adversely affecting a semiconductor layer and changing properties of a transistor. That is, the first insulating film functions as a base film. Thus, a transistor with high reliability can be formed. As the first insulating film, a single layer or a stacked layer of a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, a silicon oxynitride film (SiOxNy), or the like can be used.
Note that the first insulating film is not necessarily formed. When the first insulating film is not formed, reduction in the number of steps and manufacturing cost can be realized. Further, since the structure can be simplified, the yield can be improved.
A first conductive layer (conductive layers 110203, 110204, and 110205) is formed over the first insulating film. The conductive layer 110203 includes a portion functioning as one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of a transistor 110220. The conductive layer 110204 includes a portion functioning as the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 110220. The conductive layer 110205 includes a portion functioning as a first electrode of a capacitor 110221. As the first conductive layer, an element such as Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, W, Al, Nd, Cu, Ag, Au, Pt, Nb, Si, Zn, Fe, Ba, or Ge, or an alloy of these elements can be used. Alternatively, a stacked layer of these elements (including the alloy thereof) can be used.
A first semiconductor layer (semiconductor layers 110206 and 110207) is formed above the conductive layers 110203 and 110204. The semiconductor layer 110206 includes a portion functioning as one of the source electrode and the drain electrode. The semiconductor layer 110207 includes a portion functioning as the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode. As the first semiconductor layer, silicon containing phosphorus or the like can be used, for example.
A second semiconductor layer (a semiconductor layer 110208) is formed over the first insulating film and between the conductive layer 110203 and the conductive layer 110204. Part of the semiconductor layer 110208 extends over the conductive layers 110203 and 110204. The semiconductor layer 110208 includes a portion functioning as a channel region of the transistor 110220. As the second semiconductor layer, a semiconductor layer having no crystallinity such as an amorphous silicon (a-Si:H) layer, a semiconductor layer such as a microcrystalline semiconductor (μ-Si:H) layer, or the like can be used.
A second insulating film (insulating films 110209 and 110210) is formed to cover at least the semiconductor layer 110208 and the conductive layer 110205. The second insulating film functions as a gate insulating film. As the second insulating film, a single layer or a stacked layer of a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, a silicon oxynitride film (SiOxNy), or the like can be used.
For a portion of the second insulating film, which is in contact with the second semiconductor layer, a silicon oxide film is preferably used. This is because the trap level at the interface between the second semiconductor layer and the second insulating film is lowered.
When the second insulating film is in contact with Mo, a silicon oxide film is preferably used for a portion of the second insulating film in contact with Mo. This is because the silicon oxide film does not oxidize Mo.
A second conductive layer (conductive layers 110211 and 110212) is formed over the second insulating film. The conductive layer 110211 includes a portion functioning as a gate electrode of the transistor 110220. The conductive layer 110212 functions as a second electrode of the capacitor 110221 or a wiring. As the second conductive layer, an element such as Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, W, Al, Nd, Cu, Ag, Au, Pt, Nb, Si, Zn, Fe, Ba, or Ge, or an alloy of these elements can be used. Alternatively, a stacked layer of these elements (including the alloy thereof) can be used.
Note that in steps after forming the second conductive layer, various insulating films or various conductive films may be formed.
A first insulating film (an insulating film 110302) is formed over an entire surface of a substrate 110301. The first insulating film can prevent impurities from the substrate from adversely affecting a semiconductor layer and changing properties of a transistor. That is, the first insulating film functions as a base film. Thus, a transistor with high reliability can be formed. As the first insulating film, a single layer or a stacked layer of a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, a silicon oxynitride film (SiOxNy), or the like can be used.
Note that the first insulating film is not necessarily formed. When the first insulating film is not formed, reduction in the number of steps and manufacturing cost can be realized. Further, since the structure can be simplified, the yield can be improved.
A first conductive layer (conductive layers 110303 and 110304) is formed over the first insulating film. The conductive layer 110303 includes a portion functioning as a gate electrode of a transistor 110320. The conductive layer 110304 includes a portion functioning as a first electrode of a capacitor 110321. As the first conductive layer, an element such as Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, W, Al, Nd, Cu, Ag, Au, Pt, Nb, Si, Zn, Fe, Ba, or Ge, or an alloy of these elements can be used. Alternatively, a stacked layer of these elements (including the alloy thereof) can be used.
A second insulating film (an insulating film 110305) is formed to cover at least the first conductive layer. The second insulating film functions as a gate insulating film. As the second insulating film, a single layer or a stacked layer of a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, a silicon oxynitride film (SiOxNy), or the like can be used.
For a portion of the second insulating film, which is in contact with the semiconductor layer, a silicon oxide film is preferably used. This is because the trap level at the interface between the semiconductor layer and the second insulating film is lowered.
When the second insulating film is in contact with Mo, a silicon oxide film is preferably used for a portion of the second insulating film in contact with Mo. This is because the silicon oxide film does not oxidize Mo.
A first semiconductor layer (a semiconductor layer 110306) is formed in part of a portion over the second insulating film, which overlaps with the first conductive layer, by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like. Part of the semiconductor layer 110306 extends to a portion over the second insulating film, which does not overlap with the first conductive layer. The semiconductor layer 110306 includes a portion functioning as a channel region of the transistor 110320. As the semiconductor layer 110306, a semiconductor layer having no crystallinity such as an amorphous silicon (a-Si:H) layer, a semiconductor layer such as a microcrystalline semiconductor (μ-Si:H) layer, or the like can be used.
A second semiconductor layer (semiconductor layers 110307 and 110308) is formed over part of the first semiconductor layer. The semiconductor layer 110307 includes a portion functioning as one of a source electrode and a drain electrode. The semiconductor layer 110308 includes a portion functioning as the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode. As the second semiconductor layer, silicon containing phosphorus or the like can be used, for example.
A second conductive layer (conductive layers 110309, 110310, and 110311) is formed over the second semiconductor layer and the second insulating film. The conductive layer 110309 includes a portion functioning as one of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 110320. The conductive layer 110310 includes a portion functioning as the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 110320. The conductive layer 110311 includes a portion functioning as a second electrode of the capacitor 110321. As the second conductive layer, an element such as Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, W, Al, Nd, Cu, Ag, Au, Pt, Nb, Si, Zn, Fe, Ba, or Ge, or an alloy of these elements can be used. Alternatively, a stacked layer of these elements (including the alloy thereof) can be used.
Note that in steps after forming the second conductive layer, various insulating films or various conductive films may be formed.
Here, an example of a step characteristic of a channel etch type transistor is described. The first semiconductor layer and the second semiconductor layer can be formed using the same mask. Specifically, the first semiconductor layer and the second semiconductor layer are continuously formed. Further, the first semiconductor layer and the second semiconductor layer are formed using the same mask.
Another example of a step characteristic of a channel etch type transistor is described. The channel region of the transistor can be formed without using an additional mask. Specifically, after the second conductive layer is formed, part of the second semiconductor layer is removed using the second conductive layer as a mask. Alternatively, part of the second semiconductor layer is removed by using the same mask as the second conductive layer. The first semiconductor layer below the removed second semiconductor layer serves as the channel region of the transistor.
A first insulating film (an insulating film 110402) is formed over an entire surface of a substrate 110401. The first insulating film can prevent impurities from the substrate from adversely affecting a semiconductor layer and changing properties of a transistor. That is, the first insulating film functions as a base film. Thus, a transistor with high reliability can be formed. As the first insulating film, a single layer or a stacked layer of a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, a silicon oxynitride film (SiOxNy), or the like can be used.
Note that the first insulating film is not necessarily formed. When the first insulating film is not formed, reduction in the number of steps and manufacturing cost can be realized. Further, since the structure can be simplified, the yield can be improved.
A first conductive layer (conductive layers 110403 and 110404) is formed over the first insulating film. The conductive layer 110403 includes a portion functioning as a gate electrode of a transistor 110420. The conductive layer 110404 includes a portion functioning as a first electrode of a capacitor 110421. As the first conductive layer, an element such as Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, W, Al, Nd, Cu, Ag, Au, Pt, Nb, Si, Zn, Fe, Ba, or Ge, or an alloy of these elements can be used. Alternately, a stacked layer of these elements (including the alloy thereof) can be used.
A second insulating film (an insulating film 110405) is formed to cover at least the first conductive layer. The second insulating film functions as a gate insulating film. As the second insulating film, a single layer or a stacked layer of a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, a silicon oxynitride film (SiOxNy), or the like can be used.
For a portion of the second insulating film, which is in contact with the semiconductor layer, a silicon oxide film is preferably used. This is because the trap level at the interface between the semiconductor layer and the second insulating film is lowered.
When the second insulating film is in contact with Mo, a silicon oxide film is preferably used for a portion of the second insulating film in contact with Mo. This is because the silicon oxide film does not oxidize Mo.
A first semiconductor layer (a semiconductor layer 110406) is formed in part of a portion over the second insulating film, which overlaps with the first conductive layer, by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like. Part of the semiconductor layer 110406 extends to a portion over the second insulating film, which does not overlap with the first conductive layer. The semiconductor layer 110406 includes a portion functioning as a channel region of the transistor 110420. As the semiconductor layer 110406, a semiconductor layer having no crystallinity such as an amorphous silicon (a-Si:H) layer, a semiconductor layer such as a microcrystalline semiconductor (μ-Si:H) layer, or the like can be used.
A third insulating film (an insulating film 110412) is formed over part of the first semiconductor layer. The insulating film 110412 prevents the channel region of the transistor 110420 from being removed by etching. That is, the insulating film 110412 functions as a channel protection film (a channel stop film). As the third insulating film, a single layer or a stacked layer of a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, a silicon oxynitride film (SiOxNy), or the like can be used.
A second semiconductor layer (semiconductor layers 110407 and 110408) is formed over part of the first semiconductor layer and part of the third insulating film. The semiconductor layer 110407 includes a portion functioning as one of a source electrode and a drain electrode. The semiconductor layer 110408 includes a portion functioning as the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode. As the second semiconductor layer, silicon containing phosphorus or the like can be used, for example.
A second conductive layer (conductive layers 110409, 110410, and 110411) is formed over the second semiconductor layer. The conductive layer 110409 includes a portion functioning as one of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 110420. The conductive layer 110410 includes a portion functioning as the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 110420. The conductive layer 110411 includes a portion functioning as a second electrode of the capacitor 110421. As the second conductive layer, an element such as Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, W. Al, Nd, Cu, Ag, Au, Pt, Nb, Si, Zn, Fe, Ba, or Ge, or an alloy of these elements can be used. Alternately, a stacked layer of these elements (including the alloy thereof) can be used.
Note that in steps after forming the second conductive layer, various insulating films or various conductive films may be formed.
Here, an example of a step characteristic of a channel protection transistor is described. The first semiconductor layer, the second semiconductor layer, and the second conductive layer can be formed using the same mask. At the same time, the channel region can be formed. Specifically, the first semiconductor layer is formed, and next, the third insulating film (i.e., the channel protection film or the channel stop film) is patterned using a mask. Next, the second semiconductor layer and the second conductive layer are continuously formed. Then, after the second conductive layer is formed, the first semiconductor layer, the second semiconductor layer, and the second conductive film are patterned using the same mask. Note that part of the first semiconductor layer below the third insulating film is protected by the third insulating film, and thus is not removed by etching. This part (a part of the first semiconductor layer over which the third insulating film is formed) serves as the channel region.
Although this embodiment mode is described with reference to various drawings, the contents (or part of the contents) described in each drawing can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with the contents (or part of the contents) described in another drawing. Further, much more drawings can be formed by combining each part with another part in the above-described drawings.
The contents (or part of the contents) described in each drawing in this embodiment mode can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with the contents (or part of the contents) described in a drawing in another embodiment mode. Further, much more drawings can be formed by combining each part in each drawing in this embodiment mode with part of another embodiment mode.
This embodiment mode shows examples of embodying, slightly transforming, partially modifying, improving, describing in detail, or applying the contents (or part of the contents) described in other embodiment modes, an example of related part thereof, or the like. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiment modes can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment mode.
Embodiment Mode 13In this embodiment mode, a structure of an EL element is described. In particular, a structure of an inorganic EL element is described.
An inorganic EL element is classified as either a dispersion type inorganic EL element or a thin-film type inorganic EL element, depending on its element structure. These elements differ in that the former includes an electroluminescent layer in which particles of a light-emitting material are dispersed in a binder, whereas the latter includes an electroluminescent layer formed of a thin film of a light-emitting material. However, the former and the latter have in common in that they need electrons accelerated by a high electric field. Note that mechanisms for obtaining light emission are donor-acceptor recombination light emission which utilizes a donor level and an acceptor level; and localized light emission which utilizes inner-shell electron transition of a metal ion. In general, donor-acceptor recombination light emission is employed in dispersion type inorganic EL elements and localized light emission is employed in thin-film type inorganic EL elements in many cases.
A light-emitting material includes a base material and an impurity element to be a luminescence center. Light emission of various colors can be obtained by changing the impurity element to be included. The light-emitting material can be formed using various methods, such as a solid phase method or a liquid phase method (a coprecipitation method). Further, a liquid phase method such as a spray pyrolysis method, a double decomposition method, a method employing precursor pyrolysis, a reverse micelle method, a method in which one or more of these methods are combined with high-temperature baking, or a freeze-drying method, or the like can be used.
A solid phase method is a method in which a base material and an impurity element or a compound containing an impurity element are weighed, mixed in a mortar, and heated and baked in an electric furnace so as to be reacted; thus, the impurity element is included in the base material. The baking temperature is preferably 700 to 1500° C. This is because a solid-phase reaction does not proceed when the temperature is too low, and the base material decomposes when the temperature is too high. Note that although the materials may be baked in powder form, they are preferably baked in pellet form. Although a solid phase method needs a comparatively high temperature, it is a simple method, and thus has high productivity and is suitable for mass production.
A liquid phase method (a coprecipitation method) is a method in which a base material or a compound containing a base material, and an impurity element or a compound containing an impurity element are reacted in a solution, dried, and then baked. Particles of a light-emitting material are uniformly distributed, and the reaction can progress even when the particles are small and the baking temperature is low.
As a base material to be used for a light-emitting material, sulfide, oxide, or nitride can be used. As sulfide, zinc sulfide (ZnS), cadmium sulfide (CdS), calcium sulfide (CaS), yttrium sulfide (Y2S3), gallium sulfide (Ga2S3), strontium sulfide (SrS), barium sulfide (BaS), or the like can be used, for example. As oxide, zinc oxide (ZnO), yttrium oxide (Y2O3), or the like can be used, for example. As nitride, aluminum nitride (AlN), gallium nitride (GaN), indium nitride (InN), or the like can be used, for example. Further, zinc selenide (ZnSe), zinc telluride (ZnTe), or the like; or a ternary mixed crystal such as calcium gallium sulfide (CaGa2S4), strontium gallium sulfide (SrGa2S4), or barium gallium sulfide (BaGa2S4) may be used.
As a luminescence center for localized light emission, manganese (Mn), copper (Cu), samarium (Sm), terbium (Tb), erbium (Er), thulium (Tm), europium (Eu), cerium (Ce), praseodymium (Pr), or the like can be used. Note that a halogen element such as fluorine (F) or chlorine (Cl) may be added for charge compensation.
On the other hand, as a luminescence center for donor-acceptor recombination light emission, a light-emitting material including a first impurity element forming a donor level and a second impurity element forming an acceptor level can be used. As the first impurity element, fluorine (F), chlorine (Cl), aluminum (Al), or the like can be used, for example. As the second impurity element, copper (Cu), silver (Ag), or the like can be used, for example.
When the light-emitting material for donor-acceptor recombination light emission is synthesized using a solid phase method, a base material, the first impurity element or a compound containing the first impurity element, and the second impurity element or a compound containing the second impurity element are weighed, mixed in a mortar, and heated and baked in an electric furnace. As the base material, the aforementioned base material can be used. As the first impurity element or the compound containing the first impurity element, fluorine (F), chlorine (Cl), aluminum sulfide (Al2S3), or the like can be used, for example. As the second impurity element or the compound containing the second impurity element, copper (Cu), silver (Ag), copper sulfide (Cu2S), silver sulfide (Ag2S), or the like can be used, for example. The baking temperature is preferably 700 to 1500° C. This is because a solid-phase reaction does not proceed when the temperature is too low, and the base material decomposes when the temperature is too high. Note that although the materials may be baked in powder form, they are preferably baked in pellet form.
As the impurity element in the case of using a solid phase reaction, a compound formed of the first impurity element and the second impurity element may be used in combination. In this case, the impurity elements are easily diffused, and the solid phase reaction proceeds readily, so that a uniform light-emitting material can be obtained. Further, since an unnecessary impurity element is not included, a light-emitting material with high purity can be obtained. As the compound formed of the first impurity element and the second impurity element, copper chloride (CuCl), silver chloride (AgCl), or the like can be used, for example.
Note that the concentration of these impurity elements is in the range of 0.01 to 10 atomic %, and is preferably in the range of 0.05 to 5 atomic % with respect to the base material.
In the case of a thin-film type inorganic EL element, an electroluminescent layer includes the aforementioned light-emitting material, and can be formed using a vacuum evaporation method such as a resistance heating evaporation method or an electron beam evaporation (EB evaporation) method, a physical vapor deposition (PVD) method such as a sputtering method, a chemical vapor deposition (CVD) method such as a metal organic CVD method or a low-pressure hydride transport CVD method, an atomic layer epitaxy (ALE) method, or the like.
The light-emitting elements in
Note that the insulating film 120104 is provided in contact with the first electrode layer 120100 in
In the case of a dispersion type inorganic EL, a film-shaped electroluminescent layer is formed by dispersing particulate light-emitting materials in a binder. When particles with a desired size cannot be sufficiently obtained by a method of forming the light-emitting material, the light-emitting materials may be processed into particles by being crushed in a mortar or the like. The binder is a substance for fixing the particulate light-emitting material in a dispersed state and maintaining the shape as the electroluminescent layer. The light-emitting material is uniformly dispersed in the electroluminescent layer and fixed by the binder.
In the case of a dispersion type inorganic EL, as a method of forming the electroluminescent layer, a droplet discharging method by which the electroluminescent layer can be selectively formed, a printing method (such as screen printing or offset printing), a coating method such as a spin coating method, a dipping method, a dispenser method, or the like can be used. The thickness of the electroluminescent layer is not particularly limited, but preferably in the range of 10 to 1000 nm. In the electroluminescent layer including the light-emitting material and the binder, a ratio of the light-emitting material is preferably 50 wt % or more and 80 wt % or less.
An insulating material is used for the binder. As the insulating material, an organic material or an inorganic material can be used. Alternatively, a mixed material containing an organic material and an inorganic material may be used. As the organic insulating material, a polymer having a comparatively high dielectric constant, such as a cyanoethyl cellulose based resin, or a resin such as polyethylene, polypropylene, a polystyrene based resin, a silicone resin, an epoxy resin, or vinylidene fluoride can be used. Alternatively, a heat-resistant polymer such as aromatic polyamide or polybenzimidazole, or a siloxane resin may be used. Note that a siloxane resin corresponds to a resin having Si—O—Si bonds. Siloxane includes a backbone structure of a bond of silicon (Si) and oxygen (O). As a substituent, an organic group containing at least hydrogen (such as an alkyl group or an aryl group) is used. Alternatively, a fluoro group, or a fluoro group and an organic group containing at least hydrogen may be used as a substituent. Further alternately, a resin material, for example, a vinyl resin such as polyvinyl alcohol or polyvinylbutyral, a phenol resin, a novolac resin, an acrylic resin, a melamine resin, an urethane resin, an oxazole resin (polybenzoxazole), or the like may be used. A dielectric constant can be adjusted by appropriately mixing these resins with fine particles having a high dielectric constant, such as barium titanate (BaTiO3) or strontium titanate (SrTiO3).
The inorganic insulating material included in the binder can be formed using silicon oxide (SiOx), silicon nitride (SiNx), silicon containing oxygen and nitrogen, aluminum nitride (AlN), aluminum containing oxygen and nitrogen, aluminum oxide (Al2O3) containing oxygen and nitrogen, titanium oxide (TiO2), BaTiO3, SrTiO3, lead titanate (PbTiO3), potassium niobate (KNbO3), lead niobate (PbNbO3), tantalum oxide (Ta2O5), barium tantalite (BaTa2O6), lithium tantalite (LiTaO3), yttrium oxide (Y2O3), zirconium oxide (ZrO2), ZnS, or a substance containing another inorganic insulating material. When an inorganic material having a high dielectric constant is included in the organic material (by addition or the like), the dielectric constant of the electroluminescent layer formed of the light-emitting material and the binder can be more effectively controlled, and the dielectric constant can be further increased.
In a manufacturing step, the light-emitting material is dispersed in a solution containing the binder. As a solvent for the solution containing the binder, it is acceptable as long as a solvent dissolves a binder material and can make a solution having a viscosity suitable for a method of forming the electroluminescent layer (various wet processes) and for desired film thickness. For example, an organic solvent or the like can be used as the solvent. When a siloxane resin is used as the binder, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (also referred to as PGMEA), 3-methoxy-3-methyl-1-butanol (also referred to as MMB), or the like can be used as the solvent.
The light-emitting elements shown in
Although the insulating film 120204 is provided in contact with the first electrode layer 120200 in
A material used for an insulating film such as the insulating film 120104 in
Note that the light-emitting element can emit light when voltage is applied between the pair of electrode layers interposing the electroluminescent layer. The light-emitting element can operate with DC drive or AC drive.
Although this embodiment mode is described with reference to various drawings, the contents (or part of the contents) described in each drawing can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with the contents (or part of the contents) described in another drawing. Further, much more drawings can be formed by combining each part with another part in the above-described drawings.
The contents (or part of the contents) described in each drawing in this embodiment mode can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with the contents (or part of the contents) described in a drawing in another embodiment mode. Further, much more drawings can be formed by combining each part in each drawing in this embodiment mode with part of another embodiment mode.
This embodiment mode shows examples of embodying, slightly transforming, partially modifying, improving, describing in detail, or applying the contents (or part of the contents) described in other embodiment modes, an example of related part thereof, or the like. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiment modes can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment mode.
Embodiment Mode 14In this embodiment mode, an example of a display device is described. In particular, the case where a display device is optically treated is described.
A rear projection display device 130100 in
Hereinafter, a structure of the projector unit 130111 which is applied to the rear projection display device 130100 in
Each optical path is provided with the display panel 130308 and a color filter which transmits light with a predetermined wavelength or wavelength range. The transmissive display panel 130308 modulates transmitted light based on a video signal. Light of each color transmitted through the display panel 130308 is incident on the prism 130309, and an image is displayed on a screen through the projection optical system 130310. Note that a Fresnel lens may be provided between the mirror and the screen. Projected light which is projected by the projector unit 130111 and reflected by the mirror is converted into generally parallel light by the Fresnel lens to be projected on the screen. Displacement between a chief ray and an optical axis of the parallel light is preferably ±10° or less, and more preferably, ±5° or less.
The projector unit 130111 in
Among light emitted from the light source unit 130101, only light in a wavelength region of red is transmitted through the dichroic mirror 130401 and light in wavelength regions of green and blue is reflected by the dichroic mirror 130401. Further, only the light in the wavelength region of green is reflected by the dichroic mirror 130402. The light in the wavelength region of red, which is transmitted through the dichroic mirror 130401, is reflected by the total reflection mirror 130403 and incident on the polarization beam splitter 130404. The light in the wavelength region of blue is incident on the polarization beam splitter 130405. The light in the wavelength region of green is incident on the polarization beam splitter 130406. The polarization beam splitters 130404, 130405, and 130406 have a function of splitting incident light into p-polarized light and s-polarized light and a function of transmitting only p-polarized light. The reflective display panels 130407, 130408, and 130409 polarize incident light based on a video signal.
Only s-polarized light corresponding to each color is incident on the reflective display panels 130407, 130408, and 130409 corresponding to each color. Note that the reflective display panels 130407, 130408, and 130409 may be liquid crystal panels. In this case, the liquid crystal panel operates in an electrically controlled birefringence (ECB) mode. Liquid crystal molecules are vertically aligned with respect to a substrate at a certain angle. Accordingly, in the reflective display panels 130407, 130408, and 130409, when a pixel is in an off state, display molecules are aligned so as not to change a polarization state of incident light but to reflect the incident light. When the pixel is in an on state, alignment of the display molecules is changed, and the polarization state of the incident light is changed.
The projector unit 130111 in
Although this embodiment mode is described with reference to various drawings, the contents (or part of the contents) described in each drawing can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with the contents (or part of the contents) described in another drawing. Further, much more drawings can be formed by combining each part with another part in the above-described drawings.
The contents (or part of the contents) described in each drawing in this embodiment mode can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with the contents (or part of the contents) described in a drawing in another embodiment mode. Further, much more drawings can be formed by combining each part in each drawing in this embodiment mode with part of another embodiment mode.
This embodiment mode shows examples of embodying, slightly transforming, partially modifying, improving, describing in detail, or applying the contents (or part of the contents) described in other embodiment modes, an example of related part thereof, or the like. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiment modes can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment mode.
Embodiment Mode 15In this embodiment mode, an operation of a display device is described.
A display device 180100 includes a pixel portion 180101, a signal line driver circuit 180103, and a scan line driver circuit 180104. In the pixel portion 180101, a plurality of signal lines S1 to Sn extend from the signal line driver circuit 180103 in a column direction. In the pixel portion 180101, a plurality of scan lines G1 to Gm extend from the scan line driver circuit 180104 in a row direction. Pixels 180102 are arranged in matrix at each intersection of the plurality of signal lines S1 to Sn and the plurality of scan lines G1 to Gm.
The signal line driver circuit 180103 has a function of outputting a signal to each of the signal lines S1 to Sn. This signal may be referred to as a video signal. The scan line driver circuit 180104 has a function of outputting a signal to each of the scan lines G1 to Gm. This signal may be referred to as a scan signal.
The pixel 180102 includes at least a switching element connected to the signal line. On/off of the switching element is controlled by a potential of a scan line (a scan signal). When the switching element is turned on, the pixel 180102 is selected. On the other hand, when the switching element is turned off, the pixel 180102 is not selected.
When the pixel 180102 is selected (a selection state), a video signal is input to the pixel 180102 from the signal line. A state (e.g., luminance, transmittance, or voltage of a storage capacitor) of the pixel 180102 is changed in accordance with the video signal input.
When the pixel 180102 is not selected (a non-selection state), the video signal is not input to the pixel 180102. Note that the pixel 180102 holds a potential corresponding to the video signal which is input when selected; thus, the pixel 180102 maintains the state (e.g., luminance, transmittance, or voltage of a storage capacitor) in accordance with the video signal.
Note that a structure of the display device is not limited to that shown in
The timing chart of
The timing chart of
At the same time as the scan line is selected, the pixel 180102 connected to the scan line is also selected. For example, when the scan line Gi in the i-th row is selected, the pixel 180102 connected to the scan line Gi in the i-th row is also selected.
The scan lines G1 to Gm are sequentially selected (hereinafter also referred to as scanned) from the scan line G1 in the first row to the scan line Gm in the m-th row. For example, while the scan line Gi in the i-th row is selected, the scan lines (G1 to Gi−1 and Gi+1 to Gm) other than the scan line Gi in the i-th row are not selected. Then, during the next period, the scan line Gi+1 in the (i+1)th row is selected. Note that a period during which one scan line is selected is referred to as one gate selection period.
Accordingly, when a scan line in a certain row is selected, video signals from the signal lines S1 to Sn are input to a plurality of pixels 180102 connected to the scan line, respectively. For example, while the scan line Gi in the i-th row is selected, given video signals from the signal lines S1 to Sn are input to the plurality of pixels 180102 connected to the scan line Gi in the i-th row, respectively. Thus, each of the plurality of pixels 180102 can be controlled individually by the scan signal and the video signal.
Next, the case where one gate selection period is divided into a plurality of subgate selection periods is described.
Note that one gate selection period may be divided into three or more subgate selection periods.
The timing chart of
One frame is divided into two subframes (a first subframe and a second subframe).
The timing chart of
At the same time as the scan line is selected, the pixel 180102 connected to the scan line is also selected. For example, when the scan line Gi in the i-th row is selected, the pixel 180102 connected to the scan line Gi in the i-th row is also selected.
The scan lines G1 to Gm are sequentially scanned in each subgate selection period. For example, in one gate selection period, the scan line Gi in the i-th row is selected in the first subgate selection period, and the scan line Gj in the j-th row is selected in the second subgate selection period. Thus, in one gate selection period, an operation can be performed as if the scan signals of two rows are selected. At this time, different video signals are input to the signal lines S1 to Sn in the first subgate selection period and the second subgate selection period. Accordingly, different video signals can be input to a plurality of pixels 180102 connected to the i-th row and a plurality of pixels 180102 connected to the j-th row.
Next, a driving method for displaying images with high quality is described.
The intermediate image 180402 of the frame may be made based on image signals of the frame and the next frame. Alternatively, the intermediate image 180402 of the frame may be formed from the image 180401 of the frame, or may be a black image. Accordingly, the quality of a moving image in a hold-type display device can be improved. Further, when one image and one intermediate image are displayed in one frame period 180400, there is an advantage in that consistency with a frame rate of the video signal can be easily obtained and an image processing circuit is not complicated.
Each of the intermediate image 180412 of the frame and the intermediate image 180413 of the next frame may be made based on video signals of the frame, the next frame, and the frame after next. Alternatively, each of the intermediate image 180412 of the frame and the intermediate image 180413 of the next frame may be a black image. When one image and two intermediate images are displayed in two frame periods, there is an advantage in that operating frequency of a peripheral driver circuit is not so high and image quality of a moving image can be effectively improved.
Although this embodiment mode is described with reference to various drawings, the contents (or part of the contents) described in each drawing can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with the contents (or part of the contents) described in another drawing. Further, much more drawings can be formed by combining each part with another part in the above-described drawings.
The contents (or part of the contents) described in each drawing in this embodiment mode can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with the contents (or part of the contents) described in a drawing in another embodiment mode. Further, much more drawings can be formed by combining each part in each drawing in this embodiment mode with part of another embodiment mode.
This embodiment mode shows examples of embodying, slightly transforming, partially modifying, improving, describing in detail, or applying the contents (or part of the contents) described in other embodiment modes, an example of related part thereof, or the like. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiment modes can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment mode.
Embodiment Mode 16In this embodiment mode, a structure of an EL element is described. In particular, a structure of an organic EL element is described.
A structure of a mixed junction EL element is described. As an example, a structure is described, which includes a layer (a mixed layer) in which a plurality of materials among a hole injecting material, a hole transporting material, a light-emitting material, an electron transporting material, an electron injecting material, and the like are mixed (hereinafter referred to as a mixed junction type EL element), which is different from a stacked-layer structure where a hole injecting layer formed of a hole injecting material, a hole transporting layer formed of a hole transporting material, a light-emitting layer formed of a light-emitting material, an electron transporting layer formed of an electron transporting material, an electron injecting layer formed of an electron injecting material, and the like are clearly distinguished.
In a direction from the anode 190101 to the cathode 190102, a concentration of the hole transporting material in the mixed region 190105 is decreased and a concentration of the electron transporting material in the mixed region 190105 is increased.
A concentration gradient can be freely set. For example, a ratio of concentrations of each functional material may be changed (a concentration gradient may be formed) in the mixed region 190105 including both the hole transporting material and the electron transporting material, without including the hole transporting layer 190103 formed of only the hole transporting material. Alternatively, a ratio of concentrations of each functional material may be changed (a concentration gradient may be formed) in the mixed region 190105 including both the hole transporting material and the electron transporting material, without including the hole transporting layer 190103 formed of only the hole transporting material and the electron transporting layer 190104 formed of only the electron transporting material. Further alternatively, a ratio of concentrations may be changed depending on a distance from the anode or the cathode. Note that the ratio of concentrations may be changed continuously.
A region 190106 to which a light-emitting material is added is included in the mixed region 190105. A light emission color of the EL element can be controlled by the light-emitting material. Further, carriers can be trapped by the light-emitting material. As the light-emitting material, various fluorescent dyes as well as a metal complex having a quinoline backbone, a benzoxazole backbone, or a benzothiazole backbone can be used. The light emission color of the EL element can be controlled by adding the light-emitting material.
As the anode 190101, an electrode material having a high work function is preferably used in order to inject holes efficiently. For example, a transparent electrode formed of indium tin oxide (ITO), indium zinc oxide (IZO), ZnO, SnO2, In2O3, or the like can be used. When a transparency is not needed, the anode 190101 may be formed of an opaque metal material.
As the hole transporting material, an aromatic amine compound or the like can be used.
As the electron transporting material, a metal complex having a quinoline derivative, 8-quinolinol, or a derivative thereof as a ligand (especially tris(8-quinolinolato)aluminum (Alq3)), or the like can be used.
As the cathode 190102, an electrode material having a low work function is preferably used in order to inject electrons efficiently. A metal such as aluminum, indium, magnesium, silver, calcium, barium, or lithium can be used by itself. Alternatively, an alloy of the aforementioned metal or an alloy of the aforementioned metal and another metal may be used.
In
Alternatively, as a material added to the hole transporting region 190103, a material (a hole-transporting and light-emitting material) having both a hole transporting property and a light-emitting property may be used.
In
In
As a method of forming the mixed junction type EL element, a co-evaporation method or the like can be used.
In the mixed junction type EL elements as shown in
Note that the structures shown in
A structure of the mixed junction type EL element is not limited to those described above. A known structure can be freely used.
An organic material which forms an EL layer of an EL element may be a low molecular material or a high molecular material. Alternatively, both of the materials may be used. When a low molecular material is used as an organic compound material, a film can be formed by an evaporation method. When a high molecular material is used as the EL layer, the high molecular material is dissolved in a solvent and a film can be formed by a spin coating method or an inkjet method.
The EL layer may be formed of a middle molecular material. In this specification, a middle molecule organic light-emitting material refers to an organic light-emitting material without a sublimation property and with a polymerization degree of approximately 20 or less. When a middle molecular material is used as the EL layer, a film can be formed by an inkjet method or the like.
Note that a low molecular material, a high molecular material, and a middle molecular material may be used in combination.
An EL element may utilize either light emission (fluorescence) by a singlet exciton or light emission (phosphorescence) by a triplet exciton.
Next, an evaporation device for forming a display device applicable to the invention is described with reference to drawings.
A display device applicable to the invention may be manufactured to include an EL layer. The EL layer is formed including at least partially a material which exhibits electroluminescence. The EL layer may be formed of a plurality of layers having different functions. In this case, the EL layer may be formed of a combination of layers having different functions, which are also called a hole injecting and transporting layer, a light-emitting layer, an electron injecting and transporting layer, and the like.
A substrate introduced into the transfer chamber 190260 from the loading chamber 190262 is transferred to a predetermined treatment chamber by an arm type transfer means 190266 capable of rotating. The substrate is transferred from a certain treatment chamber to another treatment chamber by the transfer means 190266. The transfer chambers 190260 and 190261 are connected by the deposition treatment chamber 190270 at which the substrate is delivered by the transfer means 190266 and a transfer means 190267.
Each treatment chamber connected to the transfer chambers 190260 and 190261 is maintained in a reduced pressure state. Accordingly, in the evaporation apparatus, deposition treatment of an EL layer is continuously performed without exposing the substrate to the room air. A display panel in which formation of the EL layer is finished is deteriorated due to moisture or the like in some cases. Accordingly, in the evaporation apparatus, a sealing treatment chamber 190265 for performing sealing treatment before exposure to the room air in order to maintain quality is connected to the transfer chamber 190261. Since the sealing treatment chamber 190265 is under atmospheric pressure or reduced pressure near atmosphere pressure, an intermediate treatment chamber 190264 is also provided between the transfer chamber 190261 and the sealing treatment chamber 190265. The intermediate treatment chamber 190264 is provided for delivering the substrate and buffering the pressure between the chambers.
An exhaust means is provided in the loading chamber, the unloading chamber, the transfer chamber, and the deposition treatment chamber in order to maintain reduced pressure in the chamber. As the exhaust means, various vacuum pumps such as a dry pump, a turbo-molecular pump, and a diffusion pump can be used.
In the evaporation apparatus of
In the heat treatment chamber 190268, degasification treatment is performed by heating a substrate over which a lower electrode, an insulating partition wall, or the like is formed. In the plasma treatment chamber 190272, a surface of the lower electrode is treated with a rare gas or oxygen plasma. This plasma treatment is performed for cleaning the surface, stabilizing a surface state, or stabilizing a physical or chemical state (e.g., a work function) of the surface.
The deposition treatment chamber 190269 is for forming an electrode buffer layer which is in contact with one electrode of the EL element. The electrode buffer layer has a carrier injection property (hole injection or electron injection) and suppresses generation of a short-circuit or a black spot defect of the EL element. Typically, the electrode buffer layer is formed of an organic-inorganic hybrid material, has a resistivity of 5×104 to 1×106 Ωcm, and is formed having a thickness of 30 to 300 nm. Note that the deposition treatment chamber 190271 is for forming a hole transporting layer.
A light-emitting layer in an EL element has a different structure between the case of emitting single color light and the case of emitting white light. A deposition treatment chamber in the evaporation apparatus is preferably provided depending on the structure. For example, when three kinds of EL elements each having a different light emission color are formed in a display panel, it is necessary to form light-emitting layers corresponding to respective light emission colors. In this case, the deposition treatment chamber 190270 can be used for forming a first light-emitting layer, the deposition treatment chamber 190273 can be used for forming a second light-emitting layer, and the deposition treatment chamber 190274 can be used for forming a third light-emitting layer. By using different deposition treatment chambers for respective light-emitting layers, cross contamination due to different light-emitting materials can be prevented, and throughput of the deposition treatment can be improved.
Note that three kinds of EL elements each having a different light emission color may be sequentially deposited in each of the deposition treatment chambers 190270, 190273, and 190274. In this case, evaporation is performed by moving a shadow mask in accordance with a region to be deposited.
When an EL element which emits white light is formed, the EL element is formed by vertically stacking light-emitting layers of different light emission colors. In this case also, the element substrate can be transferred through the deposition treatment chambers sequentially to form each light-emitting layer. Alternatively, different light-emitting layers can be formed continuously in the same deposition treatment chamber.
In the deposition treatment chamber 190276, an electrode is formed over the EL layer. The electrode can be formed by an electron beam evaporation method or a sputtering method, and preferably by a resistance heating evaporation method.
The element substrate in which formation of the electrode is finished is transferred to the sealing treatment chamber 190265 through the intermediate treatment chamber 190264. The sealing treatment chamber 190265 is filled with an inert gas such as helium, argon, neon, or nitrogen, and a sealing substrate is attached to a side of the element substrate where the EL layer is formed under the atmosphere to be sealed. In a sealed state, a space between the element substrate and the sealing substrate may be filled with the inert gas or a resin material. The sealing treatment chamber 190265 is provided with a dispenser which provides a sealing material, a mechanical element such as an arm or a fixing stage which fixes the sealing substrate to face the element substrate, a dispenser or a spin coater which fills the chamber with a resin material, and the like.
One or a plurality of evaporation sources are provided in the treatment chamber. This is because a plurality of evaporation sources are preferably provided when a plurality of layers having different compositions are formed or when different materials are co-evaporated. In
The substrate 190389 is fixed by using a substrate stage 190386 and a substrate chuck 190387 together. The substrate stage 190386 may have a structure where a heater is incorporated so that the substrate 190389 can be heated. The substrate 190389 is transferred by tightening the substrate chuck 190387 while being fixed to the substrate stage 190386. At the time of evaporation, a shadow mask 190390 provided with an opening corresponding to a deposition pattern can be used when needed. In this case, the shadow mask 190390 is provided between the substrate 190389 and the evaporation sources 190381a to 190381c. The shadow mask 190390 is fixed to the substrate 190389 in close contact with each other or with a certain interval therebetween by a mask chuck 190388. When alignment of the shadow mask 190390 is needed, the alignment is performed by arranging a camera in the treatment chamber and providing the mask chuck 190388 with a positioning means which slightly moves in X—Y-θ directions.
The evaporation sources 190381a to 190381c include an evaporation material supply means which continuously supplies an evaporation material to the evaporation source. The evaporation material supply means includes evaporation material supply sources 190385a, 190385b, and 190385c, which are provided apart from the evaporation sources 190381a, 190381b, and 190381c, and a material supply pipe 190384 which connects between the evaporation source and the evaporation material supply source. Typically, the material supply sources 190385a to 190385c are provided corresponding to the evaporation sources 190381a to 190381c. In
As a method for supplying an evaporation material, an airflow transfer method, an aerosol method, or the like can be employed. In an airflow transfer method, impalpable powder of an evaporation material is transferred in airflow to the evaporation sources 190381a to 190381c by using an inert gas or the like. In an aerosol method, evaporation is performed while material liquid in which an evaporation material is dissolved or dispersed in a solvent is transferred and aerosolized by an atomizer, and the solvent in the aerosol is vaporized. In each case, the evaporation sources 190381a to 190381c are provided with a heating means, and a film is formed over the substrate 190389 by vaporizing the evaporation material transferred thereto. In
When an airflow transfer method or an aerosol method is employed, film formation may be performed under atmospheric pressure or lower pressure in the deposition treatment chamber, and preferably performed under a reduced pressure of 133 to 13300 Pa. The pressure can be adjusted while an inert gas such as helium, argon, neon, krypton, xenon, or nitrogen fills the deposition treatment chamber or is supplied (and exhausted at the same time) to the deposition treatment chamber. Note that an oxidizing atmosphere may be employed by introducing a gas such as oxygen or nitrous oxide in the deposition treatment chamber where an oxide film is formed. Alternately, a reducing atmosphere may be employed by introducing a gas such as hydrogen in the deposition treatment chamber where an organic material is deposited.
As another method for supplying an evaporation material, a screw may be provided in the material supply pipe 190384 to continuously push the evaporation material toward the evaporation source.
With this evaporation apparatus, a film can be formed continuously with high uniformity even in the case of a large display panel. Since it is not necessary to supply an evaporation material to the evaporation source every time the evaporation material is run out, throughput can be improved.
Although this embodiment mode is described with reference to various drawings, the contents (or part of the contents) described in each drawing can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with the contents (or part of the contents) described in another drawing. Further, much more drawings can be formed by combining each part with another part in the above-described drawings.
The contents (or part of the contents) described in each drawing in this embodiment mode can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with the contents (or part of the contents) described in a drawing in another embodiment mode. Further, much more drawings can be formed by combining each part in each drawing in this embodiment mode with part of another embodiment mode.
This embodiment mode shows examples of embodying, slightly transforming, partially modifying, improving, describing in detail, or applying the contents (or part of the contents) described in other embodiment modes, an example of related part thereof, or the like. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiment modes can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment mode.
Embodiment Mode 17In this embodiment mode, examples of electronic devices according to the invention are described.
In the display panel 900101, the pixel portion 900102 and part of peripheral driver circuits (a driver circuit having a low operation frequency among a plurality of driver circuits) may be formed over the same substrate by using transistors, and another part of the peripheral driver circuits (a driver circuit having a high operation frequency among the plurality of driver circuits) may be formed over an IC chip. Then, the IC chip may be mounted on the display panel 900101 by COG (Chip On Glass) or the like. Thus, the area of the circuit board 900111 can be reduced, and a small display device can be obtained. Alternatively, the IC chip may be mounted on the display panel 900101 by using TAB (Tape Automated Bonding) or a printed wiring board. Thus, the area of the display panel 900101 can be reduced, and a display device with a narrower frame can be obtained.
For example, in order to reduce power consumption, a pixel portion may be formed over a glass substrate by using transistors, and all peripheral circuits may be formed over an IC chip. Then, the IC chip may be mounted on a display device by COG or TAB.
By the display panel module shown in
Among the signals received by the tuner 900201, an audio signal is transmitted to an audio signal amplifier circuit 900205, and an output thereof is supplied to a speaker 900207 through an audio signal processing circuit 900206. A control circuit 900208 receives control information on receiving station (receiving frequency) and volume from an input portion 900209 and transmits signals to the tuner 900201 or the audio signal processing circuit 900206.
The printed wiring board 900402 is provided with a controller 900407, a central processing unit (CPU) 900408, a memory 900409, a power supply circuit 9004010, an audio processing circuit 900411, a transmitting/receiving circuit 900412, and the like. The printed wiring board 900402 and the display panel 900401 are connected by a flexible printed circuit (FPC) 900413. The flexible printed circuit (FPC) 900413 may have a structure where a capacitor, a buffer circuit, or the like is provided to prevent noise on power supply voltage or a signal, and increase in rise time of a signal. Note that the controller 900407, the audio processing circuit 900411, the memory 900409, the central processing unit (CPU) 900408, the power supply circuit 900410, or the like can be mounted to the display panel 900401 by using a COG (Chip On Glass) method. By using a COG method, the size of the printed wiring board 900402 can be reduced.
Various control signals are input and output through an interface (I/F) portion 900414 provided in the printed wiring board 900402. An antenna port 900415 for transmitting and receiving a signal to/from an antenna is provided in the printed wiring board 900402.
The power supply circuit 900410 supplies electric power for operating the display panel 900401, the controller 900407, the central processing unit (CPU) 900408, the audio processing circuit 900411, the memory 900409, and the transmitting/receiving circuit 900412. Note that the power supply circuit 900410 may be provided with a current source depending on a panel specification.
The central processing unit (CPU) 900408 includes a control signal generation circuit 900420, a decoder 900421, a register 900422, an arithmetic circuit 900423, a RAM 900424, an interface (I/F) portion 900419 for the central processing unit (CPU) 900408, and the like. Various signals input to the central processing unit (CPU) 900408 via an interface (VIF) portion 900414 are once stored in the register 900422, and subsequently input to the arithmetic circuit 900423, the decoder 900421, or the like. The arithmetic circuit 900423 performs operation based on the signal input thereto so as to designate a location to which various instructions are sent. On the other hand, the signal input to the decoder 900421 is decoded and input to the control signal generation circuit 900420. The control signal generation circuit 900420 generates a signal including various instructions based on the signal input thereto, and transmits the signal to the location designated by the arithmetic circuit 900423, specifically the memory 900409, the transmitting/receiving circuit 900412, the audio processing circuit 900411, and the controller 900407, for example.
The memory 900409, the transmitting/receiving circuit 900412, the audio processing circuit 900411, and the controller 900407 operate in accordance with respective instructions. Hereinafter, the operation is briefly described.
A signal input from an input means 900425 is transmitted to the central processing unit (CPU) 900408 mounted to the printed wiring board via the interface (I/F) portion 900414. The control signal generation circuit 900420 converts image data stored in the VRAM 900416 into a predetermined format depending on the signal transmitted from the input means 900425 such as a pointing device or a keyboard, and transmits the converted data to the controller 900407.
The controller 900407 performs data processing of the signal including the image data transmitted from the central processing unit (CPU) 900408 in accordance with the panel specification, and supplies the signal to the display panel 900401. The controller 900407 generates an Hsync signal, a Vsync signal, a clock signal CLK, alternating voltage (AC Cont), and a switching signal hR based on power supply voltage input from the power supply circuit 900410 or various signals input from the central processing unit (CPU) 900408, and supplies the signals to the display panel 900401.
The transmitting/receiving circuit 900412 processes a signal which is to be transmitted and received as an electric wave by an antenna 900428. Specifically, the transmitting/receiving circuit 900412 may include a high-frequency circuit such as an isolator, a band pass filter, a VCO (voltage controlled oscillator), an LPF (low pass filter), a coupler, or a balun. A signal including audio information among signals transmitted and received by the transmitting/receiving circuit 900412 is transmitted to the audio processing circuit 900411 in accordance with an instruction from the central processing unit (CPU) 900408.
The signal including the audio information which is transmitted in accordance with the instruction from the central processing unit (CPU) 900408 is demodulated into an audio signal by the audio processing circuit 900411 and transmitted to a speaker 900427. An audio signal transmitted from a microphone 900426 is modulated by the audio processing circuit 900411 and transmitted to the transmitting/receiving circuit 900412 in accordance with an instruction from the central processing unit (CPU) 900408.
The controller 900407, the central processing unit (CPU) 900408, the power supply circuit 900410, the audio processing circuit 900411, and the memory 900409 can be mounted as a package of this embodiment mode.
It is needless to say that this embodiment mode is not limited to a television receiver and can be applied to various uses, such as a monitor of a personal computer, and especially as a large display medium such as an information display board at the train station, the airport, or the like, or an advertisement display board on the street.
Next, a structure example of a mobile phone according to the invention is described with reference to
A display panel 900501 is detachably incorporated in a housing 900530. The shape or the size of the housing 900530 can be changed as appropriate in accordance with the size of the display panel 900501. The housing 900530 which fixes the display panel 900501 is fitted in a printed wiring board 900531 to be assembled as a module.
The display panel 900501 is connected to the printed wiring board 900531 through an FPC 900513. The printed wiring board 900531 is provided with a speaker 900532, a microphone 900533, a transmitting/receiving circuit 900534, and a signal processing circuit 900535 including a CPU, a controller, and the like. Such a module, an input means 900536, and a battery 900537 are combined and stored in a housing 900539. A pixel portion of the display panel 900501 is provided to be seen from an opening window formed in the housing 900539.
In the display panel 900501, the pixel portion and part of peripheral driver circuits (a driver circuit having a low operation frequency among a plurality of driver circuits) may be formed over the same substrate by using transistors, and another part of the peripheral driver circuits (a driver circuit having a high operation frequency among the plurality of driver circuits) may be formed over an IC chip. Then, the IC chip may be mounted on the display panel 900501 by COG (Chip On Glass). Alternatively, the IC chip may be connected to a glass substrate by using TAB (Tape Automated Bonding) or a printed wiring board. With such a structure, power consumption of a display device can be reduced, and operation time of the mobile phone per charge can be extended. Further, reduction in cost of the mobile phone can be realized.
In a mobile phone shown in
Specifications of the display panel (A) 900608 and the display panel (B) 900609, such as the number of pixels, can be set as appropriate in accordance with functions of a mobile phone 900600. For example, the display panel (A) 900608 used as a main screen and the display panel (B) 900609 used as a sub-screen can be combined.
A mobile phone according to this embodiment mode can be changed in various modes depending on functions or applications thereof. For example, it may be a camera-equipped mobile phone by incorporating an imaging element in the hinge 900610. When the operation switches 900604, the display panel (A) 900608, and the display panel (B) 900609 are placed in one housing, the aforementioned effects can be obtained. Further, a similar effect can be obtained when the structure of this embodiment mode is applied to an information display terminal equipped with a plurality of display portions.
The invention can be applied to various electronic devices. Specifically, the invention can be applied to a display portion of an electronic device. Examples of such electronic devices include cameras such as a video camera and a digital camera, a goggle-type display, a navigation system, an audio reproducing device (such as car audio components and audio components), a computer, a game machine, a portable information terminal (such as a mobile computer, a mobile phone, a mobile game machine, and an electronic book), and an image reproducing device provided with a recording medium (specifically, a device which reproduces a recording medium such as a digital versatile disc (DVD) and has a display for displaying the reproduced image).
As shown in
Next, application examples of a semiconductor device according to the invention are described.
Note that the semiconductor device according to the invention can be provided not only to a side wall of the prefabricated bath 900902 as shown in
The display panel 901002 shown in
Note that an example of the display panel 901002 includes a display panel in which a switching element such as an organic transistor is provided over a film-shaped substrate and a display element is driven so as to display an image.
Note that in this embodiment mode, a wall, a column-shaped object, and a prefabricated bath are shown as examples of constructed objects; however, this embodiment mode is not limited thereto, and various constructed objects can be provided with the semiconductor device according to the invention.
Next, examples where the semiconductor device according to the invention is incorporated with a moving object are described.
The semiconductor device according to the invention can be provided not only to the car body 901102 as shown in
Note that the semiconductor device according to the invention can be provided not only to the door 901201, the glass window 901203, and the ceiling 901204 as shown in
The semiconductor device according to the invention can be provided not only to the ceiling 901301 as shown in
Note that in this embodiment mode, bodies of a train car, a car, and an airplane are shown as moving objects; however, the invention is not limited thereto, and the semiconductor device according to the invention can be provided to various objects such as a motorcycle, an four-wheel drive car (including a car, a bus, and the like), a train (including a monorail, a railroad car, and the like), and a vessel. Since the semiconductor device according to the invention can instantly switch images displayed on a display panel in a moving object by an external signal, the moving object provided with the semiconductor device according to the invention can be used as an advertisement display board for an unspecified number of customers, an information display board in disaster, and the like.
Although this embodiment mode is described with reference to various drawings, the contents (or part of the contents) described in each drawing can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with the contents (or part of the contents) described in another drawing. Further, much more drawings can be formed by combining each part with another part in the above-described drawings.
The contents (or part of the contents) described in each drawing in this embodiment mode can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with the contents (or part of the contents) described in a drawing in another embodiment mode. Further, much more drawings can be formed by combining each part in each drawing in this embodiment mode with part of another embodiment mode.
This embodiment mode shows examples of embodying, slightly transforming, partially modifying, improving, describing in detail, or applying the contents (or part of the contents) described in other embodiment modes, an example of related part thereof, or the like. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiment modes can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment mode.
This application is based on Japanese Patent Application serial No. 2006-328670 filed with Japan Patent Office on Dec. 5, 2006, the entire contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference.
Claims
1. A driving method of a liquid crystal display device in which an image is displayed by applying a signal voltage in accordance with an image signal to a liquid crystal element,
- the driving method comprising:
- applying a first voltage to the liquid crystal element in a first subframe period of one frame period; and
- applying a second voltage at which the liquid crystal element performs black display in a second subframe period of the one frame period,
- wherein a level of the first voltage is determined in accordance with a difference between the second voltage and the signal voltage, and a length of the first subframe period.
2. A driving method of a liquid crystal display device according to claim 1, wherein the larger the difference between the first voltage and the signal voltage is, the shorter the length of the subframe period is.
3. A driving method of a liquid crystal display device comprising a backlight, in which an image is displayed by applying a signal voltage in accordance with an image signal to a liquid crystal element,
- the driving method comprising:
- applying an initialization voltage to the liquid crystal element; and
- applying a first voltage to the liquid crystal element in one frame period right after applying the initialization voltage,
- wherein a level of the first voltage is determined in accordance with a difference between the initialization voltage and the signal voltage, and a length of a backlight lighting period in the one frame period.
4. A driving method of a liquid crystal display device according to claim 3, wherein the larger the difference between the initialization voltage and the signal voltage is, the shorter the length of the backlight lighting period is.
5. A driving method of a liquid crystal display device comprising a backlight, in which an image is displayed by applying a signal voltage in accordance with an image signal to a liquid crystal element,
- wherein the backlight is divided into the plurality of light-emitting regions,
- the driving method comprising:
- while sequentially scanning the plurality of light-emitting regions,
- applying an initialization voltage to the liquid crystal element; and
- applying a first voltage to the liquid crystal element in one frame period right after applying the initialization voltage,
- wherein a level of the first voltage is determined in accordance with a difference between the initialization voltage and the signal voltage, and a length of a lighting period of each of the plurality of light-emitting regions in the one frame period.
6. A driving method of a liquid crystal display device according to claim 5, wherein the larger the difference between the initialization voltage and the signal voltage is, the shorter the length of the backlight lighting period is.
7. A driving method of a liquid crystal display device comprising a backlight, in which an image is displayed by applying a signal voltage in accordance with an image signal to a liquid crystal element,
- the driving method comprising:
- applying an initialization voltage to the liquid crystal element;
- applying a first voltage to the liquid crystal element in one frame period right after applying the initialization voltage; and
- applying a second voltage at which the liquid crystal element performs black display in the second subframe period,
- wherein a level of the first voltage is determined in accordance with a difference between the second voltage and the signal voltage, a length of the backlight lighting period in the one frame period, and a length of the first subframe period.
8. A driving method of a liquid crystal display device comprising a backlight, in which an image is displayed by applying a signal voltage in accordance with an image signal to a liquid crystal element,
- wherein the backlight is divided into a plurality of light-emitting regions,
- the driving method comprising: while sequentially scanning a plurality of light-emitting regions, applying an initialization voltage to the liquid crystal element; applying a first voltage to the liquid crystal element in one frame period right after applying the initialization voltage; and applying a second voltage at which the liquid crystal element performs black display in the second subframe period, wherein a level of the first voltage is determined in accordance with a difference between the second voltage and the signal voltage, a length of a lighting period of each of the plurality of light-emitting regions, and a length of the first subframe period.
9. A liquid crystal display device comprising:
- a liquid crystal element,
- wherein an image is configured to be displayed by applying a signal voltage in accordance with an image signal to the liquid crystal element,
- wherein a level of a first voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element in a first subframe period of one frame period is determined in accordance with a difference between a second voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element in a second subframe period of the one frame period and the signal voltage, and a length of the first subframe period, and
- wherein the second voltage is voltage at which the liquid crystal element performs black display.
10. A liquid crystal display device according to claim 9, wherein the larger the difference between the first voltage and the signal voltage is, the shorter the length of the subframe period is.
11. A liquid crystal display device, comprising:
- a liquid crystal element; and
- a backlight,
- wherein an image is configured to be displayed by applying a signal voltage in accordance with an image signal to the liquid crystal element, and
- wherein a level of a first voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element in one frame period is determined in accordance with a difference between an initialization voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element right before the one frame period and the signal voltage, and a length of a backlight lighting period in the one frame period.
12. A liquid crystal display device according to claim 11, wherein the larger the difference between the initialization voltage and the signal voltage is, the shorter the length of the backlight lighting period is.
13. A liquid crystal display device, comprising:
- a liquid crystal element; and
- a backlight,
- wherein an image is configured to be displayed by applying a signal voltage in accordance with an image signal to a liquid crystal element,
- wherein the backlight is divided into a plurality of light-emitting regions and is configured to be sequentially scanned to emit light, and
- wherein a level of a first voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element in one frame period is determined in accordance with a difference between an initialization voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element right before the one frame period and the signal voltage, and a length of the lighting period of each of the plurality of light-emitting regions in the one frame period.
14. A liquid crystal display device according to claim 13, wherein the larger the difference between the initialization voltage and the signal voltage is, the shorter the length of the backlight lighting period is.
15. A liquid crystal display device, comprising:
- a liquid crystal element; and
- a backlight,
- wherein an image is configured to be displayed by applying a signal voltage in accordance with an image signal to the liquid crystal element,
- wherein a level of a first voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element in a first subframe period of one frame period is determined in accordance with a difference between a second voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element in a second subframe period of the one frame period and the signal voltage, and a length of a backlight lighting period in the one frame period, and
- wherein the second voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element in the second subframe period is voltage at which the liquid crystal element performs black display.
16. A liquid crystal display device, comprising:
- a liquid crystal element; and
- a backlight,
- wherein an image is configured to displayed by applying a signal voltage in accordance with an image signal to the liquid crystal element,
- wherein the backlight is divided into a plurality of light-emitting regions and is configured to be sequentially scanned to emit light,
- wherein a level of a first voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element in a first subframe period of one frame period is determined in accordance with a difference between a second voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element in a second subframe period and the signal voltage, a length of the lighting period of each of the plurality of light-emitting regions in the one frame period, and a length of the first subframe period; and
- wherein the second voltage is voltage at which a liquid crystal element performs black display.
Type: Application
Filed: Nov 29, 2007
Publication Date: Jul 31, 2008
Applicant:
Inventors: Yasunori Yoshida (Atsugi), Hajime Kimura (Atsugi)
Application Number: 11/947,525
International Classification: G09G 3/36 (20060101);
